Operating Instructions

Operatin

Instructions

-09TX

perating Instruction

O/V

REC

Printed in<ARB7385-A>

ublished by Pioneer Corporation

Copyri

2007 Pioneer Cor

oration

All ri

hts reserved

IONEER

ELITE

SOUND.VISION.SOUL

and the Pioneer

Elite an

sound.vision.soul lo

os are trademarks of Pioneer Corporation

PIONEER CORPORATION

4-1, Meguro 1-Chome, Meguro-ku, Tokyo 153-8654, Japan

PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC.

P.O. BOX 1540, Long Beach, California 90801-1540, U.S.A. TEL: (800) 421-1404

PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC.

300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R 0P2, Canada TEL: 1-877-283-5901, 905-479-4411

PIONEER EUROPE NV

Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium TEL: 03/570.05.11

PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. LTD.

253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936 TEL: 65-6472-7555

PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD.

178-184 Boundary Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia, TEL: (03) 9586-6300

PIONEER ELE

TRONI

S DE MEXI

O S.A. DE

Blv

vila Camacho 138 10 piso Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico,D.

000

TEL: 55-

-42

K002

IMPORTANT NOTICE – THE SERIAL NUMBER FOR THIS EQUIPMENT IS LOCATED IN THE REAR.

PLEASE WRITE THIS SERIAL NUMBER ON YOUR ENCLOSED WARRANTY CARD AND

KEEP IN A SECURE AREA. THIS IS FOR YOUR SECURITY.

D1-4-2-6-1_En

This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.

Cet appareil numérique de la Classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.

D8-10-1-3_EF

NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to

Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in

a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not

installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.

However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does

cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off

and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

– Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

– Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

– Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

– Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

D8-10-1-2_En

Information to User

Alteration or modifications carried out without appropriate authorization may invalidate the user’s right to operate

the equipment.

D8-10-2_En

CAUTION: This product satisfies FCC regulations when shielded cables and connectors are used to connect the

unit to other equipment. To prevent electromagnetic interference with electric appliances such as radios and

televisions, use shielded cables and connectors for connections.

D8-10-3a_En

FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This

device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including

interference that may cause undesired operation.

Product Name: AUDIO/VIDEO MULTI-CHANNEL RECEIVER

Model Number: SC-09TX

Responsible Party Name: PIONEER ELECTRONICS SERVICE, INC.

Address: 1925 E. DOMINGUEZ ST. LONG BEACH, CA 90801-1760, U.S.A.

Phone: 1-800-421-1404

CAUTION

The STANDBY/ON switch on this unit will not

completely shut off all power from the AC outlet. Since the

power cord serves as the main disconnect device for the

unit, you will need to unplug it from the AC outlet to shut

down all power. Therefore, make sure the unit has been

installed so that the power cord can be easily unplugged

from the AC outlet in case of an accident. To avoid fire

hazard, the power cord should also be unplugged from the

AC outlet when left unused for a long period of time (for

example, when on vacation).

WARNING

To prevent a fire hazard, do not place any naked

flame sources (such as a lighted candle) on the

equipment.

D3-4-2-1-7a_A_En

VENTILATION CAUTION

When installing this unit, make sure to leave space

around the unit for ventilation to improve heat

radiation (at least 60 cm at top, 10 cm at rear, and

30 cm at each side).

WARNING

Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for

ventilation to ensure reliable operation of the

product, and to protect it from overheating. To

prevent fire hazard, the openings should never be

blocked or covered with items (such as newspapers,

table-cloths, curtains) or by operating the

equipment on thick carpet or a bed.

D3-4-2-1-7b_A_En

Operating Environment

Operating environment temperature and humidity:

+5 ºC to +35 ºC (+41 ºF to +95 ºF); less than 85 %RH

(cooling vents not blocked)

Do not install this unit in a poorly ventilated area, or in

locations exposed to high humidity or direct sunlight (or

strong artificial light)

D3-4-2-1-7c_A_En

SC_09TX.book Page 2 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

D3-4-2-1-1_En-A

The exclamation point within an equilateral

triangle is intended to alert the user to the

presence of important operating and

maintenance (servicing) instructions in the

literature accompanying the appliance.

The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol,

within an equilateral triangle, is intended to

alert the user to the presence of uninsulated

"dangerous voltage" within the product's

enclosure that may be of sufficient

magnitude to constitute a risk of electric

shock to persons.

CAUTION:

TO PREVENT THE RISK OF ELECTRIC

SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR

BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS

INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED

SERVICE PERSONNEL.

CAUTION

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

IMPORTANT

Read these instructions.

Keep these instructions.

Heed all warnings.

Follow all instructions.

Do not use this apparatus near water.

Clean only with dry cloth.

Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in

accordance with the manufacturer’s

instructions.

Do not install near any heat sources such as

radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other

apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce

heat.

Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized

or grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two

blades with one wider than the other. A

grounding type plug has two blades and a third

grounding prong. The wide blade or the third

prong are provided for your safety. If the provided

plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an

electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet.

Protect the power cord from being walked on or

pinched particularly at plugs, convenience

receptacles, and the point where they exit from

the apparatus.

10)

Only use attachments/accessories specified by

the manufacturer.

Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or

table specified by the manufacturer, or sold with

the apparatus. When a cart is used, use caution

when moving the cart/apparatus combination to

avoid injury from tip-over.

Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms

or when unused for long periods of time.

Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel.

Servicing is required when the apparatus has

been damaged in any way, such as power-supply

cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled

or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the

apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture,

does not operate normally, or has been dropped.

P1-4-2-2_En

11)

12)

13)

14)

This product is for general household purposes. Any

failure due to use for other than household purposes

(such as long-term use for business purposes in a

restaurant or use in a car or ship) and which requires

repair will be charged for even during the warranty

period.

K041_En

WARNING

The voltage of the available power supply differs

according to country or region. Be sure that the

power supply voltage of the area where this unit

will be used meets the required voltage (e.g., 230 V

or 120 V) written on the rear panel.

D3-4-2-1-4_A_En

Before plugging in for the first time, read the following

section carefully.

WARNING

This equipment is not waterproof. To prevent a fire

or shock hazard, do not place any container filled

with liquid near this equipment (such as a vase or

flower pot) or expose it to dripping, splashing, rain

or moisture.

D3-4-2-1-3_B_En

SC_09TX.book Page 3 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

WARNING: Handling the cord on this product or

cords associated with accessories sold with the

product will expose you to chemicals listed on

proposition 65 known to the State of California and

other governmental entities to cause cancer and

birth defect or other reproductive harm.

Wash hands after handling

D36-P4_A_En

This product contains mercury. Disposal of this

material may be regulated due to environmental

considerations. For disposal or recycling

information, please contact your local authorities or

the Electronics Industries Alliance : www.eiae.org.

K057_En

If the AC plug of this unit does not match the AC

outlet you want to use, the plug must be removed

and appropriate one fitted. Replacement and

mounting of an AC plug on the power supply cord of

this unit should be performed only by qualified

service personnel. If connected to an AC outlet, the

cut-off plug can cause severe electrical shock. Make

sure it is properly disposed of after removal.

The equipment should be disconnected by removing

the mains plug from the wall socket when left

unused for a long period of time (for example, when

on vacation).

D3-4-2-2-1a_A_En

For U.S. and Australia Model

C67-7-3_En

SC_09TX.book Page 4 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Contents

01 Before you start

Checking what’s in the box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Installing the receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Loading the batteries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

02 Simple Home Theater Guide

Introduction to home theater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Listening to Surround Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Selecting the speaker layout/usage pattern . . . . . . . . 10

Normal surround connections (default setting). . . . 10

5.2-channel Bi-amp connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

7.2-channel front Bi-amp connections . . . . . . . . . . . 10

7.2-channel + Zone 2 connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

7.2-channel + speaker B connections . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Positioning and connecting the speakers. . . . . . . . . . 11

Normal surround connections (default setting). . . . 12

5.2-channel Bi-amp connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

7.2-channel front Bi-amp connections . . . . . . . . . . . 12

7.2-channel + Zone 2 connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

7.2-channel + speaker B connections . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Automatically setting up for surround sound

(MCACC & Full Band Phase Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup . . . . 14

Playing a source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Better sound using Phase Control and

Full Band Phase Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Using Phase Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Using Full Band Phase Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

03 Connecting your equipment

Rear panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

When making cable connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

About the video converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Connecting using HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

About HDMI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Connecting your TV and DVD player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Connecting your Blu-ray disc player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Connecting a satellite/cable receiver or

other set-top box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Connecting a DVD/HDD recorder, VCR and

other video sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Using the component video jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Connecting digital audio sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

About the WMA9 Pro decoder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Connecting analog audio sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Connecting a component to the front panel inputs

. . . 27

Installing your speaker system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Connecting the speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Placing the speakers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

THX speaker system setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Connecting antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

AM loop antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

FM wire antenna. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Connecting external antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Plugging in the receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

04 Controls and displays

Front panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Operating range of remote control unit . . . . . . . . . . 33

Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

05 Listening to your system

Auto playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Listening in surround sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Standard surround sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Using the Home THX modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Using the Advanced surround effects . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Listening in stereo. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

Using Front Stage Surround Advance . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

Using Stream Direct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

Selecting MCACC presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Choosing the input signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Using surround back channel processing . . . . . . . . . 40

Using the Virtual Surround Back mode . . . . . . . . . . 40

Using the genre synchronizing function. . . . . . . . . . . 41

06 Using the tuner

Listening to the radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Improving FM stereo sound. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Using the noise cut mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Using Neural THX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Tuning directly to a station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Saving station presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Naming station presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Listening to station presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

07 The System Setup menu

Making receiver settings from

the System Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Automatic MCACC (Expert) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Speaker output setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Manual MCACC setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Fine Channel Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Fine Speaker Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Fine-adjusting the positions of the speakers

(Precision Distance). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Standing Wave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Acoustic Calibration EQ Adjust. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Full Band Phase Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Data Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Thank you for buying this Pioneer product. Please read through these operating instructions so you will know how to operate

your model properly. After you have finished reading the instructions, put them away in a safe place for future reference.

SC_09TX.book Page 5 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Manual speaker setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Speaker Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Channel Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Speaker Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

X-Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

THX Audio Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

08 Other connections

Connecting an iPod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Connecting your iPod to the receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

iPod playback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Watching photos and video content . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Switching the iPod operation mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Using XM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Connecting your XM Radio receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Listening to XM Radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Using XM HD Surround . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Saving channel presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Using the XM Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Using SIRIUS Radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Connecting your SIRIUS Connect Tuner. . . . . . . . . . 64

Listening to SIRIUS Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Saving channel presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Using the SIRIUS Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Using the i.LINK interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Checking the i.LINK inputs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

About i.LINK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

About PQLS rate control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Creating an i.LINK network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Connecting the multichannel analog inputs. . . . . . . . 67

Selecting the multichannel analog inputs . . . . . . . . 68

Switching the speaker system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Switching the speaker system according to

the playback environment (Application Manual) . . . . 69

Setting the speaker system for high sound quality

multi-channel music sources

(DVD Audio discs and SACDs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Setting the speaker system for movie sources. . . . . 69

Bi-amping your speakers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Bi-wiring your speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Connecting additional amplifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

MULTI-ZONE listening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Making MULTI-ZONE connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Using the MULTI-ZONE controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Connecting an IR receiver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Switching components on and off using the 12 volt

trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Using this receiver with a Pioneer plasma display . . . 75

Using the SR+ mode with a Pioneer plasma display

. . . 76

Connecting a PC for Advanced MCACC output . . . . . 77

Advanced MCACC output using your PC . . . . . . . . . 77

09 Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY

inputs

Enjoying the Home Media Gallery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

Usable free media servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

PlaysForSure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

DLNA CERTIFIED™ Audio/Video/Image Player . . . . 78

Supported file formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

Connecting to the network through LAN interface

. . . . 79

Using the USB interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Confirming the IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Connecting a USB device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Readable USB devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Readable data files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Removing a USB device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Starting the Home Media Gallery function . . . . . . . . . 81

Navigating the files and folders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Selectable screen display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Using the Tool Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Media Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Screen Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

My Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Enjoying movie files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Screen Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Movie Player key guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Time Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Slow Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Add to My Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Fast Forward/Fast Reverse. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Forward/Reverse (15 sec.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

A-B Repeat Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Repeat Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Random Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Enjoying music files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Screen Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Music Player key guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

A-B Repeat Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Repeat Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Random Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Enjoying photo files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

Screen Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

Photo Player key guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

Setting up the slideshow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Setting up BGM for the slideshow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Starting the slideshow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Rotating the image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Repeating the slideshow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Playing the slideshow at random . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Other useful functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Sort. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Adding files to My Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

Switching the server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

Resetting to default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

Other convenient features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

Confirming the existing Home Media Gallery

version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Default Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol)

Server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

DLNA (Digital Living Network Alliance) . . . . . . . . . . 95

DNS (Domain Name Service) Server . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

IP (Internet Protocol) Address. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

LAN Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

MAC (Media Access Control) Address . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Mass Storage Class devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

PlaysForSure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Subnet mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

SC_09TX.book Page 6 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

UPnP (Universal Plug and Play) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

USB (Universal Serial Bus) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Windows Media Connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Windows Media DRM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Windows Media Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Details of compatible formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

10 HDMI Control

Making the HDMI Control connections. . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Setting the HDMI options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Setting the HDMI Control mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Before using synchronization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Synchronized amp mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Synchronized amp mode operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Canceling synchronized amp mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

About HDMI Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

11 Other Settings

The Input Setup menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Input function default and possible settings . . . . . 102

Changing the OSD display language

(OSD Language) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

The Other Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Multi Channel Input Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

ZONE Video Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

ZONE Audio Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

SR+ Setup for Pioneer plasma displays. . . . . . . . . 104

Select the OSD display’s background pattern

(Display Image) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

12 Using other functions

Setting the Audio options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Adjusting the surround B speaker delay

(Surr B DELAY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Setting the Video options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Making an audio or a video recording . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Playing a different source when recording. . . . . . . 109

Reducing the level of an analog signal . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Using the sleep timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Switching the contents displayed on the LCD . . . . . 110

Dimming the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Switching the HDMI output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Checking the settings of the sound

currently playing, etc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Resetting the system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Default system settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

13 Controlling the rest of your system

Setting the remote to control other components . . . 113

Selecting preset codes directly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Programming signals from other remote controls

. . . 113

Erasing one of the remote control button settings

. . . 114

Resetting the remote control presets . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Confirming preset codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Renaming input source names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Direct function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Multi Operation and System Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Programming a multi-operation or

a shutdown sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Using multi operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Using System off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Controls for TVs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Controls for other components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Operating other Pioneer components with

this unit’s sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

14 Additional information

Speaker Setting Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Positional relationship between speakers and

monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

No sound. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Other audio problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Professional Calibration EQ graphical output . . . . 125

Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

i.LINK interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Important information regarding

the HDMI connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

HOME MEDIA GALLERY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

iPod messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

XM radio messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

SIRIUS radio messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

i.LINK messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Meaning of messages displayed when

the HDMI control function is set to ON . . . . . . . . . 131

HOME MEDIA GALLERY messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Surround sound formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

Dolby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

DTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

Windows Media Audio 9 Professional . . . . . . . . . . 134

About THX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

About Neural - THX Surround . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

About XM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

About open source related licenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Listening modes with different input signal formats

. . . 149

Stream direct with different input signal formats

. . . 153

Cautions on Handing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

Liquid crystal screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

Liquid crystal backlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

Cleaning the shiny surfaces of the panel and

the liquid crystal display window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Cleaning the unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

Our philosophy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

SC_09TX.book Page 7 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Before you start

Chapter 1:

Before you start

Checking what’s in the box

An accessory box is supplied with this receiver. It can be

used to store the supplied accessories other than the

Warranty card.

Please check that you’ve received the following supplied

accessories:

• Setup microphone (cable: 5 m (16.4 ft.))

• Remote control unit

• AA/IEC R6P dry cell batteries x2

• AM loop antenna

•FM wire antenna

• iPod control cable

•Power cord

• Wiping cloth

• Warranty card

• These operating instructions

Installing the receiver

• When installing this unit, make sure to put it on a

level and stable surface.

Don’t install it on the following places:

– on a color TV (the screen may distort)

– near a cassette deck (or close to a device that gives off

a magnetic field). This may interfere with the sound.

– in direct sunlight

– in damp or wet areas

– in extremely hot or cold areas

– in places where there is vibration or other movement

– in places that are very dusty

– in places that have hot fumes or oils (such as a kitchen)

• Do not touch this receiver’s bottom panel while the

power is turned on. The bottom panel gets hot when

the power is on, and touching it could cause burns.

Loading the batteries

Caution

Incorrect use of batteries may result in such hazards as

leakage and bursting. Observe the following precautions:

• Never use new and old batteries together.

• Insert the plus and minus sides of the batteries

properly according to the marks in the battery case.

• Batteries with the same shape may have different

voltages. Do not use different batteries together.

• When disposing of used batteries, please comply

with governmental regulations or environmental

public instruction’s rules that apply in your country or

area.

• WARNING

Do not use or store batteries in direct sunlight or

other excessively hot place, such as inside a car or

near a heater. This can cause batteries to leak,

overheat, explode or catch fire. It can also reduce the

life or performance of batteries.

SC_09TX.book Page 8 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Simple Home Theater Guide

Chapter 2:

Simple Home Theater Guide

Introduction to home theater

Home theater refers to the use of multiple audio tracks to

create a surround sound effect, making you feel like

you’re in the middle of the action or concert. The

surround sound you get from a home theater system

depends not only on your speaker setup, but also on the

source and the sound settings of the receiver.

This receiver will automatically decode multichannel

Dolby Digital, DTS, or Dolby Surround sources according

to your speaker setup. In most cases, you won’t have to

make changes for realistic surround sound, but other

possibilities (like listening to a CD with multichannel

surround sound) are explained in Listening to your

system on page 36.

Listening to Surround Sound

This receiver has been designed with the easiest possible

setup in mind. However, before proceeding to the quick

setup guide given below, you have to decide the purpose

of your speaker system and hook up your system for

surround sound. After the following quick setup, you can

simply leave the receiver in the default settings in most

cases.

• Be sure to complete all connections before

connecting this unit to an AC power source.

1 Select the speaker usage method.

See Selecting the speaker layout/usage pattern on

page 10.

2 Connect your speakers and place them for optimum

surround sound.

Connect your speakers as shown in Positioning and

connecting the speakers on page 11.

3 Connect your TV and DVD player.

See Connecting your TV and DVD player on page 21 to do

this. For surround sound, you’ll want to hook up using a

digital connection from the DVD player to the receiver.

4 Plug in the receiver and switch it on, followed by

your DVD player, your subwoofer and the TV.

Plug the power cable into the AC outlet and switch on the

receiver.

Make sure you’ve set the video input on your TV

to this receiver. Check the manual that came with the TV

if you don’t know how to do this.

• Set the subwoofer volume to a comfortable level.

5 Use the on-screen Auto MCACC Setup to set up your

system.

See Automatically setting up for surround sound (MCACC

& Full Band Phase Control) on page 12 for more on this.

6 Play a DVD, and adjust the volume to your liking.

Make sure that DVD/LD is showing in the receiver’s

display, indicating that the DVD input is selected. If it

isn’t, press DVD on the remote control to set the receiver

to the DVD input.

In addition to the basic playback explained in Playing a

source on page 14, there are several other sound options

you can select. See Listening to your system on page 36

for more on this.

See also Making receiver settings from the System Setup

menu on page 44 for more setup options.

Note

1 After this receiver is connected to an AC outlet, a 15-second HDMI initialization process begins. You cannot carry out any operations during this process.

The HDMI indicator in the front LCD display blinks during this process, and you can turn on this receiver once it has stopped blinking. When you set the

HDMI Control mode to OFF, you can skip this process. For details about the HDMI Control feature, see HDMI Control on page 98.

SC_09TX.book Page 9 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Simple Home Theater Guide

Selecting the speaker layout/usage

pattern

This receiver is equipped with speaker terminals for 10

channels, and the speaker layout/usage pattern can be

selected to suit the user’s tastes. There are five speaker

layout/usage patterns, as described below. When using

this receiver, be sure to select one of the five patterns

below before proceeding with the connections, settings

and playback operations.

Once you have decided on the speaker layout/usage

pattern, connect the speakers. Proceed to Positioning

and connecting the speakers on page 11.

Normal surround connections (default

setting)

Features: Connections can be made in the ways from 2

channels for stereo playback to 5.1 (the basic

requirement for a home theater) or 7.1 channels, and on

this receiver it is even possible to connect 9.2 channels.

With 9.1-channel (or 9.2-channel) connections, two

surround speakers are used on each of the left and right

sides, a speaker layout similar to that used in movie

theaters. Furthermore, the set can be used for both

movies and for high sound quality multi-channel music

sources such as SACD and DVD Audio discs.

Speakers used: Total maximum 9 (2 front, 1 center, 4

surround, 2 surround back)

Applicable listening rooms: The conditions in any

listening room can be accommodated, but when using

9.2 channels of speakers, ideally the space should be

large enough for the speakers.

Output Setup: Normal

5.2-channel Bi-amp connections

Features: The front, center and surround channels are all

reproduced with high quality (bi-amp). Fewer speakers

are used than with other patterns and the maximum

number of channels is 5.2, but this pattern provides the

highest sound quality.

Speakers used: Total 5 bi-amp compatible speakers (2

front, 1 center, 2 surround)

Applicable listening rooms: Suited to all listening

rooms

Output Setup: All Ch Bi-Amp

7.2-channel front Bi-amp connections

Features: Provides up to 7.2-channel surround playback

with high quality sound (bi-amp) from the front and

center speakers.

Speakers used: Total 7 (2 front (bi-amp compatible), 1

center (bi-amp compatible), 2 surround, 2 surround

back)

Applicable listening rooms: Rooms with space to place

the surround back speakers behind or above the listening

position

Output Setup: Front Bi-Amp

Note

1 If you want to expand the system into a surround playback environment though there are currently only two speakers, or if you want to make bi-amp

connections though you do not have enough speaker cables, select the pattern you are thinking of trying. For either pattern, the optimum playback

environment can be achieved using Auto MCACC Setup, regardless of the number of speakers.

Subwoofer

Center (C)

Front

right (R)

Front

left (L)

Surround

left A (SL A)

Surround

right A (SR A)

Surround

left B (SL B)

Surround

right B (SR B)

Surround back

left (SBL)

Surround back

right (SBR)

Subwoofer

Center (C)*

Front

right (R)*

Front

left (L)*

Surround

left (SL)*

Surround

right (SR)*

*: bi-amp compatible speakers

Subwoofer

Center (C)*

Front

right (R)*

Front

left (L)*

Surround

left (SL)

Surround

right (SR)

Surround back

left (SBL)

Surround back

right (SBR)

*: bi-amp compatible speakers

SC_09TX.book Page 10 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Simple Home Theater Guide

7.2-channel + Zone 2 connections

Features: Up to 7.2-channel playback in the main zone

with playback of a different device in Zone 2.

Speakers used: Total 9 (4 front, 1 center, 2 surround, 2

surround back)

Applicable listening rooms: When there are two

listening rooms

Output Setup: 7.2ch + ZONE 2

7.2-channel + speaker B connections

Features: Up to 7.2-channel playback in the normal

listening room plus stereo playback of the same sound in

another room (for example a kitchen). Furthermore,

different front speakers can be used for movies (multi-

channel playback) and music (stereo playback).

Speakers used: Total 9 (4 front, 1 center, 2 surround, 2

surround back)

Applicable listening rooms: When there is a main

listening room + a kitchen, etc.

Output Setup: 7.2ch + Speaker B

Positioning and connecting the

speakers

For the speaker layout, refer to Selecting the speaker

layout/usage pattern on page 10. We recommend

positioning the speakers before connecting them. Use

one of the five connection examples below according to

the speaker layout/usage pattern selected.

Use

commercially available speaker cords to make the

connections.

Bare wire connections

Make sure that the speaker cable you’re going to use is

properly prepared with about 10 mm (

/8 in.) of insulator

stripped from each wire, and the exposed wire strands

twisted together (fig. A).

To connect a terminal, unscrew the terminal a few turns

until there is enough space to insert the exposed wire

(fig. B). Once the wire is in position, tighten the terminal

until the wire is firmly clamped (fig. C).

Banana plug connections

If you want to use speaker cables terminated with banana

plugs, screw the speaker terminal fully shut, then plug

the banana plug into the end of the speaker terminal.

Important

• Before connecting the equipment, make sure that

the power is turned off and the power cords are

unplugged from the power outlets.

Main Zone

Subwoofer

Center (C)

Front

right (R)

Front

left (L)

Surround

left (SL)

Surround

right (SR)

Surround back

left (SBL)

Surround back

right (SBR)

Zone 2

Front

right (R)

Front

left (L)

Subwoofer

Center (C)

Front

right (R)

Front

left (L)

Surround

left (SL)

Surround

right (SR)

Surround back

left (SBL)

Surround back

right (SBR)

Speaker B

Note

1 • You can use speakers with a nominal impedance between 6 Ω and 16 Ω (or between 4 Ω and 16 Ω for the R1/L1 terminals).

• Each speaker connection on the receiver comprises a positive (+) and negative (–) terminal. Make sure to match these up with the terminals on the

speakers themselves.

• Make sure that all the bare speaker wire is twisted together and inserted fully into the speaker terminal. If any of the bare speaker wire touches the back

panel it may cause the power to cut off as a safety measure.

(fig. A) (fig. B) (fig. C)

10 mm (

/8 in.)

SC_09TX.book Page 11 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Simple Home Theater Guide

Normal surround connections (default

setting)

When using only one surround back speaker, connect it

to the L4 (Single) terminals.

When only two surround speakers are connected,

connect them to the L2 (SL A) and R2 (SR A) terminals.

If the center speaker is bi-amp compatible, make bi-amp

connections to achieve high quality sound.

5.2-channel Bi-amp connections

Make bi-amp connections using speakers that are all bi-

amp compatible.

7.2-channel front Bi-amp connections

For details about the bi-amp connections, see Bi-amping

your speakers on page 70.

When using only one surround back speaker, connect it

to the L4 (Single) terminals.

Make bi-amp connections using speakers that are bi-

amp compatible for the front and center.

7.2-channel + Zone 2 connections

When using only one surround back speaker, connect it

to the L4 (Single) terminals.

If the center speaker is bi-amp compatible, make bi-amp

connections to achieve high quality sound.

7.2-channel + speaker B connections

When using only one surround back speaker, connect it

to the L4 (Single) terminals.

If the center speaker is bi-amp compatible, make bi-amp

connections to achieve high quality sound.

Automatically setting up for surround

sound (MCACC & Full Band Phase

Control)

The Auto MCACC Setup measures the acoustic

characteristics of your listening area, taking into account

ambient noise, speaker size and distance, and tests for

both channel delay and channel level. After you have set

up the microphone provided with your system, the

receiver uses the information from a series of test tones

to optimize the speaker settings and equalization for your

particular room, and also to calibrate the frequency-

phase characteristics of the speakers connected.

FRONT FRONTCENTER

SUR-

ROUND-A

SUR-

ROUND-A

SUR-

ROUND-B

R1 R2

SURROUND

BACK

SUR-

ROUND-B

R3 R4 R5 L5

SURROUND

BACK

(Single)

L4 L3 L2 L1

Normal

LOW HIGH

FRONT

All ch Bi-Amp.

LOW HIGH

SURROUND

LOW HIGH

CENTER

HIGH LOW

SURROUND

HIGH LOW

FRONT

Center (C)

Front

right (R)

Front

left (L)

Surround

left A (SL A)

Surround

right A (SR A)

Surround

left B (SL B)

Surround

right B (SR B)

Surround back

left (SBL)

Surround back

right (SBR)

FRONT FRONTCENTER

SUR-

ROUND-A

SUR-

ROUND-A

SUR-

ROUND-B

R1 R2

SURROUND

BACK

SUR-

ROUND-B

R3 R4 R5 L5

SURROUND

BACK

(Single)

L4 L3 L2 L1

Normal

LOW HIGH

FRONT

All ch Bi-Amp.

LOW HIGH

SURROUND

LOW HIGH

CENTER

HIGH LOW

SURROUND

HIGH LOW

FRONT

Center (C)

Front

right (R)

Front

left (L)

Surround

left (SL)

Surround

right (SR)

FRONT FRONTCENTER

SUR-

ROUND-A

SUR-

ROUND-A

SUR-

ROUND-B

R1 R2

SURROUND

BACK

SUR-

ROUND-B

R3 R4 R5 L5

SURROUND

BACK

(Single)

L4 L3 L2 L1

Normal

LOW HIGH

FRONT

All ch Bi-Amp.

LOW HIGH

SURROUND

LOW HIGH

CENTER

HIGH LOW

SURROUND

HIGH LOW

FRONT

Center (C)

Front

right (R)

Front

left (L)

Surround

left (SL)

Surround

right (SR)

Surround

back left

(SBL)

Surround

back right

(SBR)

FRONT FRONTCENTER

SUR-

ROUND-A

SUR-

ROUND-A

SUR-

ROUND-B

R1 R2

SURROUND

BACK

SUR-

ROUND-B

R3 R4 R5 L5

SURROUND

BACK

(Single)

L4 L3 L2 L1

Normal

LOW HIGH

FRONT

All ch Bi-Amp.

LOW HIGH

SURROUND

LOW HIGH

CENTER

HIGH LOW

SURROUND

HIGH LOW

FRONT

Center (C)

Front

right (R)

Front

left (L)

Surround

left (SL)

Surround

right (SR)

Surround

back left

(SBL)

Surround

back right

(SBR)

Front

right (R)

Front

left (L)

FRONT FRONTCENTER

SUR-

ROUND-A

SUR-

ROUND-A

SUR-

ROUND-B

R1 R2

SURROUND

BACK

SUR-

ROUND-B

R3 R4 R5 L5

SURROUND

BACK

(Single)

L4 L3 L2 L1

Normal

LOW HIGH

FRONT

All ch Bi-Amp.

LOW HIGH

SURROUND

LOW HIGH

CENTER

HIGH LOW

SURROUND

HIGH LOW

FRONT

Center (C)

Front

right (R)

Front

left (L)

Surround

left (SL)

Surround

right (SR)

Surround

back left

(SBL)

Surround

back right

(SBR)

Front

right (R)

Front

left (L)

SC_09TX.book Page 12 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Simple Home Theater Guide

Make sure you do this before moving on to Playing a

source on page 14.

Important

• Make sure the microphone and speakers are not

moved during the Auto MCACC Setup.

• Using the Auto MCACC Setup will overwrite any

existing settings for the MCACC preset you select.

• Before using the Auto MCACC Setup, the

headphones should be disconnected and the iPod,

HOME MEDIA GALLERY, XM or SIRIUS Radio

function should not be selected as an input source.

Caution

• The test tones used in the Auto MCACC Setup are

output at high volume.

1 Switch on the receiver and your TV.

2 Connect the microphone to the

MCACC SETUP MIC

jack on the front panel.

Place the microphone so that it’s about ear level at your

normal listening position (use a tripod if possible). Make

sure there are no obstacles between the speakers and

the microphone.

• Push down on the lower portion of the front panel

door to access the MCACC SETUP MIC jack:

The Auto MCACC display appears once the microphone

is connected.

3 Make sure ‘

Normal

’ is selected,

select an MCACC

preset

, then select

START

4 Follow the instructions on-screen.

Make sure the microphone is connected, and if you’re

using a subwoofer, make sure it is switched on and set to

a comfortable volume level.

5 Wait for the test tones to finish, then confirm the

speaker configuration in the OSD.

A progress report is displayed on-screen while the

receiver outputs test tones to determine the speakers

present in your setup. Try to be as quiet as possible while

it’s doing this.

If no operations are performed for 10 seconds while the

speaker configuration check screen is being displayed,

the Auto MCACC Setup will resume automatically. In this

case, you don’t need to select ‘OK’ and press ENTER in

step 6.

• With error messages (such as Too much ambient

noise! or Check Microphone) select RETRY after

checking for ambient noise (see Problems when

using the Auto MCACC Setup below) and verifying the

mic connection. If there doesn’t seem to be a

problem, you can simply select GO NEXT and

continue.

The configuration shown on-screen should reflect the

actual speakers you have.

DVD

RECEIVER SOURCE

MAIN

MULTI

OPERATION

ZONE2 3

DVR1

GALLERY

HOME MEDIA

INPUT SELECT

TUNER

iP od HDMI

PHONO

CD-R

DVR2

VIDEO1 VIDEO2

BD TV SAT

SACD

XM SIRIUS

RECEIVER

AUDIO

PARAMETER

TOP MENU

BAND

CATEGORY

T.EDIT

VIDEO

PARAMETER

SETUP

SOURCE

TV RCV

INPUT MUTE

TUNE

ST ST

MUTE

VOL

TV CONTROL

Enter

SOURCE

TV RCV

SETUP

RETURN

SETUP

ENTER

PHONES

SPEAKERS AUTO SURROUND

/STREAM DIRECT

STATUS

LCD

VIEW

DIMMER

TUNER EDITBAND

CTRL

ZONE2 ZONE3

VIDEO/GAME 2 INPUT

DIGITAL INS-VIDEO VIDEO L R

AUDIO

MULTI-ZONE CONTROL

MCACC

SETUP MIC

USB

(TUNE)

PARAMETER

SETUP

(ST) (ST)

AUDIO VIDEO

RETURN

ENTER

Note

1 • You can’t use the System Setup menu in either the main or sub zone when the iPod, HOME MEDIA GALLAERY, XM or SIRIUS Radio input source is

selected. When you set ZONE 2, ZONE 3 or ZONE 2&3 to ON (page 74), you can’t use the System Setup menu.

• If you cancel the Auto MCACC Setup, or leave an error message for over three minutes, the screen saver will appear.

2 • The setting you should select differs according to the selected speaker layout/usage method (for example if you are planning to make bi-amp

connections, to set up another speaker system, etc.). For details see Selecting the speaker layout/usage pattern on page 10 and Speaker output setting on

page 47.

• If you have THX-certified speakers, select CUSTOM and choose YES for the THX Speaker setting.

3 The six MCACC presets are used for storing surround sound settings for different listening positions. Simply choose an unused preset for now (you can

rename it later in Data Management on page 54).

4 Note that correction curves are saved only when set to SYMMETRY. Select CUSTOM to save other correction curves (such as ALL CH ADJUST and

FRONT ALIGN). See Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 44 for more on this.

5 Do not adjust the volume during the test tones. This may result in incorrect speaker settings.

6 If you’re using the front LCD display, the diagram in Listening to Surround Sound above indicates (in bold) how each speaker is displayed.

1. Auto MCACC

DVD/LD

55.0

Output Setup

[ Normal ]

Save SYMMETRY to

[ M1. MEMORY 1 ]

START

ENTER:Start :Cancel

Now Analyzing

…

( 2/10)

Environment Check

Ambient Noise [ OK ]

Microphone [ ]

Speaker YES/NO [ ]

:Cancel

DVD/LD 0.0

1. Auto MCACC

CHECK

Front [ YES ]

Center [ YES ]

Surr A [ YES ]

Surr B [ YES ]

SB [ YESx2 ]

SW [ YESx2 ]

:Cancel

DVD/LD 0.0

1. Auto MCACC

10:Next

SC_09TX.book Page 13 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Simple Home Theater Guide

If you see an error message (ERR) in the right side

column (or the speaker configuration displayed isn’t

correct), there may be a problem with the speaker

connection. If selecting RETRY doesn’t work, turn off the

power and check the speaker connections. If there

doesn’t seem to be a problem, you can simply use /

to select the speaker and / to change the setting

(and number for surround back) and continue.

6 Make sure ‘

’ is selected, then press

ENTER

A progress report is displayed on-screen while the

receiver outputs more test tones to determine the

optimum receiver settings for Channel Level, Speaker

Distance, Standing Wave, Acoustic Cal EQ and Full Band

Phase Control.

Again, try to be as quiet as possible while this is

happening. It may take 3 to 10 minutes.

7 The Auto MCACC Setup has finished! Press

RETURN

to go back to the System Setup menu.

Be sure to disconnect the microphone from this receiver

upon completion of the Auto MCACC setup.

The settings made in the Auto MCACC Setup should give

you excellent surround sound from your system, but it is

also possible to adjust these settings manually using the

System Setup menu (starting on page 44).

Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup

If the room environment is not optimal for the Auto

MCACC Setup (too much background noise, echo off the

walls, obstacles blocking the speakers from the

microphone) the final settings may be incorrect. Check

for household appliances (air conditioner, fridge, fan,

etc.), that may be affecting the environment and switch

them off if necessary. If there are any instructions

showing in the front LCD display, please follow them.

• Some older TVs may interfere with the operation of

the microphone. If this seems to be happening,

switch off the TV when doing the Auto MCACC Setup.

Playing a source

Here are the basic instructions for playing a source (such

as a DVD disc) with your home theater system.

1 Switch on your system components and receiver.

Start by switching on the playback component (for

example a DVD player), your TV

and subwoofer (if you

have one), then the receiver (press RECEIVER).

• Make sure the setup mic is disconnected.

2 Select the input source you want to play.

You can use the input source buttons on the remote

control, INPUT SELECT, or the front panel INPUT

SELECTOR dial.

3 Press

AUTO/DIRECT

(

AUTO SURROUND/STREAM

DIRECT

) to select ‘

AUTO SURROUND

’ and start

playback of the source.

If you’re playing a Dolby Digital or DTS surround sound

DVD disc, you should hear surround sound. If you are

playing a stereo source, you will only hear sound from the

front left/right speakers in the default listening mode.

• See also Listening to your system on page 36 for

information on different ways of listening to sources.

It is possible to check on the LCD whether or not multi-

channel playback is being performed properly.

When using a surround back speaker, Dolby Digital EX

is displayed when playing Dolby Digital signals, and

DTS+Neo:6 is displayed when playing DTS 5.1-channel

signals.

When not using a surround back speaker, Dolby Digital

is displayed when playing Dolby Digital signals.

Note

1 You can also choose to view the settings from the MCACC Data Check screen. See Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 44 for more on this.

2 • Depending on the characteristics of your room, sometimes identical speakers with cone sizes of around 12 cm (5 inches) will end up with different size

settings. You can correct the setting manually using the Manual speaker setup on page 56.

• The subwoofer distance setting may be farther than the actual distance from the listening position. This setting should be accurate (taking delay and

room characteristics into account) and generally does not need to be changed.

• If Auto MCACC Setup measurement results are incorrect due to the interaction of the speakers and viewing environment, we recommend adjusting

the settings manually.

3 Make sure that the TV’s video input is set to this receiver (for example, if you connected this receiver to the VIDEO 1 jacks on your TV, make sure that the

VIDEO 1 input is now selected).

4 If you need to manually switch the input signal type press SIGNAL SEL (page 39).

5 • You may need to check the digital audio output settings on your DVD player or digital satellite receiver. It should be set to output Dolby Digital, DTS and

88.2 kHz / 96 kHz PCM (2 channel) audio, and if there is an MPEG audio option, set this to convert the MPEG audio to PCM.

• Depending on your DVD player or source discs, you may only get digital 2 channel stereo and analog sound. In this case, the receiver must be set to a

multichannel listening mode (see Listening in surround sound on page 36 if you need to do this) if you want multichannel surround sound.

DVD

RECEIVER SOURCE

MAIN

MULTI

OPERATION

ZONE2 3

DVR1

GALLERY

HOME MEDIA

INPUT SELECT

TUNER

iP od HDMI

PHONO

CD-R

DVR2

VIDEO1 VIDEO2

BD TV SAT

SACD

XM SIRIUS

RECEIVER

DVD

GALLERY

HOME MEDIA

INPUT SELECT

TUNER

iP od HDMI

PHONO

CD-R

BD TV SAT

SACD

XM SIRIUS

DVR1 DVR2

VIDEO1 VIDEO2

AUDIO

PARAMETER

VIDEO

PARAMETER

SOURCE

TV RCV

INPUT MUTE

TUNE

MUTE

VOL

TV CONTROL

VOL

CATEGORY

STATUS

THX MPX MEMORY

CH LEVEL

SETUP

TUNE

STEREO/

F.S.SURR

SIGNAL SEL SLEEP AUDIO

iPod CTRL

DIMMER

SR+ SBch PHASE

A.ATT GENRE

HDMI OUT

DISP

AUTO/

DIRECT

STANDARD ADV SURR

AUTO/

DIRECT

RETURN

SC_09TX.book Page 14 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Simple Home Theater Guide

For other details, see Listening modes with different input

signal formats on page 149. If the display does not

correspond to the input signal and listening mode, check

the connections and settings.

4 Use the volume control to adjust the volume level.

Turn down the volume of your TV so that all sound is

coming from the speakers connected to this receiver.

Better sound using Phase Control and

Full Band Phase Control

This receiver is equipped with the two types of functions

that correct phase distortion and group delay: Phase

Control and Full Band Phase Control. Activating Full

Band Phase Control is strongly recommended because it

also involves the effects of Phase Control. For details on

each of these two features, refer to the following

explanations.

Using Phase Control

During multichannel playback, LFE (Low-Frequency

Effects) signals as well as low-frequency signals in each

channel are assigned to the subwoofer or other the

subwoofer and the most appropriate speaker. At least in

theory, however, this type of processing involves a group

delay that varies with frequency, resulting in phase

distortion where the low-frequency sound is delayed or

muffled by the conflict with other channels. With the

Phase Control mode switched on, this receiver can

reproduce powerful bass sound without deteriorating the

quality of the original sound (see illustration below).

Phase Control OFF

• Rhythms blurred and difficult to hear

• Bass sound with loss of depth

• Sound of musical instruments with no reality

Phase Control ON

• Rhythms with crystal-like clarity

• Bass sound with no loss of depth

• Sound of musical instruments with superb reality

Phase Control technology provides coherent sound

reproduction through the use of phase matching

for an

optimal sound image at your listening position. The

default setting is on and we recommend leaving Phase

Control switched on for all sound sources.

• Set the operation selector switch to RCV, then

press PHASE (PHASE CONTROL) to select PHASE

CONTROL.

The PHASE CONTROL indicator on the front panel lights.

Using Full Band Phase Control

The Full Band Phase Control feature calibrates the

frequency-phase characteristics of the speakers

connected.

Standard speakers designed exclusively for audio use

generally reproduce sound with the divided frequency

bands output from a speaker system consisting of

multiple speakers (in case of typical 3-way speakers, for

instance, the tweeter, the squawker (midrange), and the

woofer output sound in the high-, middle-, and low-

frequency ranges, respectively). Though these speakers

are designed to flatten the frequency-amplitude

characteristics across wide ranges, there are cases

where the group delay characteristics are not effectively

flattened. This phase distortion of the speakers

subsequently causes group delay (the delay of low-

frequency sound against high-frequency sound) during

audio signal playback.

Front speaker

Subwoofer

Sound

source

Sound muffled due

to a delay in time

Listening

position

Note

1 • Phase matching is a very important factor in achieving proper sound reproduction. If two waveforms are ‘in phase’, they crest and trough together,

resulting in increased amplitude, clarity and presence of the sound signal. If a crest of a wave meets a trough (as shown in the upper section of the diagram

above), then the sound will be ‘out of phase’ and an unreliable sound image will be produced.

• The PHASE CONTROL feature is available even when the headphones are plugged in.

• If your subwoofer has a phase control switch, set it to the plus (+) sign (or 0°). However, the effect you can actually feel when PHASE CONTROL is set

to ON on this receiver depends on the type of your subwoofer. Set your subwoofer to maximize the effect. It is also recommended you try changing the

orientation or the place of your subwoofer.

• Set the built-in lowpass filter switch of your subwoofer to OFF. If this cannot be done on your subwoofer, set the cutoff frequency to a higher value.

• If the speaker distance is not properly set, you may not have a maximized PHASE CONTROL effect.

• The PHASE CONTROL mode cannot be set to ON in the following cases:

– When the PURE DIRECT mode is switched on.

– When the HDMI audio output parameter is set to THROUGH in Setting the Audio options on page 106.

Front speaker

Subwoofer

Sound

source

Original sound

preserved with no

loss of clarity

Listening

position

SOURCE

TV RCV

VOL

VOLCH

SOURCE

TV RCV

SIGNAL SEL SLEEP AUDIO

iPod CTRL

DIMMER

SR+ SBch PHASE

A.ATT GENRE

HDMI OUT

D ACCESS

MCACC CLASS

DISP

PHASE

SC_09TX.book Page 15 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Simple Home Theater Guide

This receiver analyzes the frequency-phase

characteristics of the speakers by calibrating test signals

output from the speakers with the supplied microphone,

therefore flattening the analyzed frequency-phase

characteristics during audio signal playback

– the same

correction is made for a pair of left and right speakers.

This correction minimizes group delay between the

ranges of a speaker and improves the frequency-phase

characteristics across all ranges.

Furthermore, the enhanced frequency-phase

characteristics between channels ensure better

surround sound integration for multichannel setting.

Full Band Phase Control OFF

Sound in the middle- and low-frequency ranges is

delayed against the high-frequency sound due to group

delay.

Full Band Phase Control ON

With the phase distortion corrected, the frequency-phase

characteristics are improved across all ranges.

• Sound with live dynamics

• Sound of musical instruments with superb reality

• Sound so accurately reproduced that you can even

hear the lip movement of the singer

• Speech heard with no loss of clarity

• Surround sound with excellent integration

• Set the operation selector switch to RCV, then

press PHASE (PHASE CONTROL) to select

FULLBAND PHASE.

Both the Phase Control and Full Band Phase Control

functions are switched on. The PHASE CONTROL

indicator lights on the front LCD display.

Note

1 To calibrate and analyze the frequency-phase characteristics of the speakers, follow the procedures in Auto MCACC Setup (see Automatically setting up

for surround sound (MCACC & Full Band Phase Control) on page 12) or FULL BAND PHASE CTRL in the System Setup (see Full Band Phase Control on

page 53). Select ALL when you perform the Auto MCACC Setup with CUSTOM. Upon calibration of the frequency-phase characteristics of the speakers,

the FULL BAND PHASE CTRL feature is automatically switched on. Note that FULLBAND PHASE cannot be selected unless the frequency-phase

characteristics of the speakers are calibrated.

2 The original characteristics of group delay of the speakers calibrated and the targeted characteristics after correction can be displayed graphically in the

OSD (see Full Band Phase Control on page 53). Also, when your PC is connected to this receiver, the original characteristics of group delay of the speakers

calibrated and the corrected characteristics of group delay can be displayed in 3-dimension on your PC (see Advanced MCACC output using your PC on

page 77).

Tweeter

Midrange

Woofer

Group Delay Characteristics

3The FULL BAND PHASE CTRL mode cannot be set to ON in the following cases:

– When headphones are plugged in.

– When the PURE DIRECT mode is switched on.

– When the HDMI audio output parameter is set to THROUGH in Setting the Audio options on page 106.

Tweeter

Midrange

Woofer

Group Delay Characteristics

SOURCE

TV RCV

VOL

VOLCH

SOURCE

TV RCV

SIGNAL SEL SLEEP AUDIO

iPod CTRL

DIMMER

SR+ SBch PHASE

A.ATT GENRE

HDMI OUT

D ACCESS

MCACC CLASS

DISP

PHASE

SC_09TX.book Page 16 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Connecting your equipment

Chapter 3:

Connecting your equipment

This receiver provides you with many connection possibilities, but it doesn’t have to be difficult. This page explains the

kinds of components you can connect to make up your home theater system.

Rear panel

Caution

• Before making or changing the connections, switch

off the power and disconnect the power cord from the

power outlet. Plugging in should be the final step.

1 XM Radio input

 See Using XM Radio on page 62.

2 Optical and coaxial digital audio inputs (x10)

Use for digital audio sources, including DVD players/

recorders, digital satellite receivers, CD players, etc.

There’s also an RF IN jack for connection to an LD player

with a 2 RF output.

 See also The Input Setup menu on page 101 to assign

the inputs.

3 Optical and coaxial digital audio outputs (x3)

Use for recording to a CD or MiniDisc recorder.

 See Connecting digital audio sources on page 26.

These jacks are also used for MULTI-ZONE connections.

 See MULTI-ZONE listening on page 71.

4 S-400 i.LINK connectors (x2)

Use to connect other i.LINK audio devices for high-

resolution, multichannel digital audio input/output.

 See Using the i.LINK interface on page 65.

5 HDMI connectors (x8)

Multiple inputs and two outputs for high-quality audio/

video connection to compatible HDMI devices.

 See Connecting using HDMI on page 19.

 See Switching the HDMI output on page 110.

6 LAN (10/100) terminal

 See Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs on

page 78.

7 AM and FM antenna terminals

Use to connect indoor or outdoor antennas for radio

broadcasts.

 See Connecting antennas on page 30.

8 iPod input terminal

Use to connect your Apple iPod as an audio or video

source.

 See Connecting an iPod on page 60.

9 SIRIUS Radio input

 See Using SIRIUS Radio on page 64.

S400S400

(AUDIO)

(

For LD

)

ASSIGNABLE

FRONT FRONTCENTER

SUR-

ROUND-A

SUR-

ROUND-A

SUR-

ROUND-B

VIDEOAUD IO

AUD IO

LAN (10/100)

ZONE3

OUT

ZONE2

OUT

ZONE2

OUT

ZONE3

OUT

MONITOR

OUT

CONTROL

COMPONENT

VIDEO

ASSIGN-

ABLE

ASSIGN-

ABLE

VIDEO

OUT

SUB

WOOFER

FRONT

CENTER

EXTRA

SUR-

ROUND

(

Single

)

SUB W.

FRONT

CENTER

SUR-

ROUND

SUR-

ROUND

BACK

SURROUND

BACK

PRE OUT

MULTI CH

SIRIUS

iPod

LOOP

ANTENNA

OUT1

(HDMI CTRL) OUT2

HDMI

RF IN

(TV)

(SAT)

(DVR/

VCR 1)

(DVR/

VCR 2)

(VIDEO/

GAME

(CD-R/

TAPE/

MD)

(

DVD/LD

)

(

)

(

)

(SA

)

COAXIAL

1 4

ASSIGNABLE

SELECTABLE

R1 R5

SEE

INSTRUCTION

MANUAL

VOIR LE MODE

EMPLOI

SURROUND

BACK

SUR-

ROUND-B

R3 R4 R5 L5

SURROUND

BACK

(Single)

L4 L3 L2 L1

AC IN

SPEAKERS

Normal

LOW HIGH

FRONT

All ch Bi-Amp.

OPTICAL

1 6

ZONE2

OUT

SOURCE

OUT

ZONE3

/SOURCE

OUT

LOW HIGH

SURROUND

LOW HIGH

CENTER

HIGH LOW

SURROUND

HIGH LOW

FRONT

1 2 34

12 V TRIGGER

(

DC OUT 12V TOTAL 250 mA MAX

)

RS-

232C

VIDEO/

GAME 1

SAT

AUX

CD-R/

TAPE/

REC

SEL

OUT

SACD

PHONO

DVD/ LD

(DVD/LD)

(VIDEO/

GAME

(BD)

(DVR/VCR 1)

(DVR/VCR 2)

ZONE2

OUT

DVR/

VCR 2

DVR/

VCR 1

REC SEL

OUT

REC SEL

OUT

REC SEL

OUT

REC SEL

OUT

S-VIDEO

BPR

1311

SC_09TX.book Page 17 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Connecting your equipment

10 Multichannel pre-amplifier outputs

Use to connect separate amplifiers for front, center,

surround, surround back and subwoofer channels.

 See Connecting additional amplifiers on page 71 (see

also Installing your speaker system on page 28 for

powered subwoofer connection).

11 MULTI-ZONE audio outputs

Use to connect a second or third amplifier in a separate

room.

 See MULTI-ZONE listening on page 71.

12 Multichannel analog audio inputs

7.1 channel inputs for connection to a DVD player with

multichannel analog outputs.

 See Connecting the multichannel analog inputs on

page 67.

13 Stereo analog audio source inputs/(outputs) (x5)

Use for connection to audio sources such as CD players,

tape decks, turntables, etc.

 See Connecting analog audio sources on page 27.

14 Audio/video source inputs/(outputs) (x7)

Use for connection to audio/visual sources, such as DVD

players/recorders, VCRs, etc. Each set of inputs has jacks

for composite video, S-Video

and stereo analog audio.

 See Connecting a DVD/HDD recorder, VCR and other

video sources on page 24.

15 Composite, S-Video and Component monitor

outputs

Use to connect monitors and TVs.

 See Connecting your TV and DVD player on page 21.

 See Using the component video jacks on page 25.

16 MULTI-ZONE video outputs

Use to connect monitors or TVs in a separate room.

 See MULTI-ZONE listening on page 71.

17 12 V trigger jacks

(total 50 mA max.)

(x4)

Use to switch components in your system on and off

according to the input function of the receiver.

 See Switching components on and off using the 12

volt trigger on page 75.

18 Component video inputs (x5)

Use the inputs to connect any video source that has

component video output, such as a DVD recorder.

 See Using the component video jacks on page 25.

19 MULTI-ZONE component video output

Use to connect monitors or TVs in a separate room.

 See MULTI-ZONE listening on page 71.

20 Control input/output

Use to connect other Pioneer components so that you

can control all your equipment from a single IR remote

sensor.

 See Operating other Pioneer components with this

unit’s sensor on page 118.

21 RS-232C connector

Use for connection to a PC for graphical output when

using Advanced MCACC or Full Band Phase Control.

 See Connecting a PC for Advanced MCACC output on

page 77.

22 Remote inputs (MULTI-ZONE and source)

Use for connection to an external remote control sensor

for use in a MULTI-ZONE setup, for example.

 See Connecting an IR receiver on page 74.

23 Speaker terminals

Use for connection to the main front, center, surround

and surround back speakers.

 See Installing your speaker system on page 28.

24 AC power inlet

Connect the supplied power cord here.

When making cable connections

• To avoid hum, do not lay connected cables over the

top of the receiver.

• When connecting optical cables, be careful when

inserting the plug not to damage the shutter

protecting the optical socket.

• When storing optical cable, coil loosely. The cable

may be damaged if bent around sharp corners.

Note

1 You must assign the input source to the S-Video input to which you’ve connected your video component (see The Input Setup menu on page 101).

SC_09TX.book Page 18 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Connecting your equipment

About the video converter

The video converter ensures that all video sources are

output through all of the MONITOR VIDEO OUT jacks.

The only exception is HDMI: since this resolution cannot

be downsampled, you must connect your monitor/TV to

the receiver’s HDMI video outputs when connecting this

video source.

If several video components are assigned to the same

input function (see The Input Setup menu on page 101),

the converter gives priority to HDMI, component, S-

Video, then composite (in that order).

• For optimal video performance, THX recommends

switching Digital Video Conversion (in Setting the

Video options on page 108) OFF.

Connecting using HDMI

If you have a HDMI or DVI (with HDCP) equipped

component, you can connect it to this receiver using a

commercially available HDMI cable.

The HDMI connection transfers uncompressed digital

video, as well as almost every kind of digital audio that the

connected component is compatible with, including

DVD-Video, DVD-Audio, SACD, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby

TrueHD, DTS-HD Master Audio (see below for

limitations), Video CD/Supers VCD, CD and MP3. See

About the video converter on page 19 for more on HDMI

compatibility.

When connecting to an HDMI/DVI-compatible monitor or

a plasma display using the HDMI OUT 2 terminal, switch

the HDMI output setting to HDMI OUT2. See Switching

the HDMI output on page 110.

Note

1 • If the video signal does not appear on your TV or plasma display, try adjusting the resolution settings on your component or display. Note that some

components (such as video game units) have resolutions that may not be converted. In this case, try switching Digital Video Conversion (in Setting the Video

options on page 108) OFF.

• The ZONE 2 video input can also be converted. For details, see ZONE Video Setup on page 103.

HDMI IN

S-VIDEO IN

VIDEO IN

COMPONENT VIDEO IN

HDMI OUT

S-VIDEO

MONITOR OUT

VIDEO

MONITOR OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO

MONITOR OUT

High picture quality

Terminal for connection

with source device

Terminal for connection

with TV monitor

Video signals can be output

2 • An HDMI connection can only be made with DVI-equipped components compatible with both DVI and High Bandwidth Digital Content Protection

(HDCP). If you choose to connect to a DVI connector, you will need a separate adaptor (DVIHDMI) to do so. A DVI connection, however, does not support

audio signals. Consult your local audio dealer for more information.

• If you connect a component that is not compatible with HDCP, a HDCP ERROR message is displayed on the front LCD display. Some components that

are compatible with HDCP still cause this message to be displayed, but so long as there is no problem with displaying video this is not a malfunction.

• This receiver has been designed to be compliant with HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) Version 1.3a. Depending on the component you

have connected, using a DVI connection may result in unreliable signal transfers.

• This receiver supports SACD, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD and DTS-HD Master Audio. To take advantage of these formats, however, make sure

that the component connected to this receiver also supports the corresponding format.

This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is

protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other

intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and

other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology

must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended

for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise

authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or

disassembly is prohibited.

SC_09TX.book Page 19 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Connecting your equipment

1 Use an HDMI cable to connect one of the HDMI IN

interconnects on this receiver to an HDMI output on

your HDMI component.

HDMI indicator lights on the front panel when an HDMI-

equipped component is connected.

2 Use an HDMI cable to connect the HDMI OUT

interconnect on this receiver to an HDMI interconnect

on a HDMI-compatible monitor.

• The arrow on the cable connector body should be

facing right for correct alignment with the connector

on the player.

3Use the

INPUT SELECT

button to select the HDMI

input you’ve connected to (for example, HDMI 2).

You can also perform the same operation by using the

INPUT SELECTOR dial on the front panel or by pressing

HDMI on the remote control repeatedly.

• Set the HDMI parameter in Setting the Audio options

on page 106 to THROUGH if you want to hear HDMI

audio output from your TV or plasma display (no

sound will be heard from this receiver).

• If the video signal does not appear on your TV or

plasma display, try adjusting the resolution settings

on your component or display. Note that some

components (such as video game units) have

resolutions that may not be converted. In this case,

use an analog video connection.

• You can’t hear HDMI audio through this receiver’s

digital out jacks.

About HDMI

HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) supports

both video and audio on a single digital connection for

use with DVD players, DTV, set-top boxes, and other AV

devices. HDMI was developed to provide the

technologies of High Bandwidth Digital Content

Protection (HDCP) as well as Digital Visual Interface

(DVI) in one specification. HDCP is used to protect digital

content transmitted and received by DVI-compliant

displays.

HDMI has the capability to support standard, enhanced,

or high-definition video plus standard to multi-channel

surround-sound audio. HDMI features include

uncompressed digital video, one connector (instead of

several cables and connectors), and communication

between the AV source and AV devices such as DTVs.

HDMI, the logo and High-Definition

Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered

trademarks of HDMI licensing LLC.

S400S400

(AUDIO)

(

For LD

)

ASSIGNABLE

VIDEOAUDIO

AUDIO

LAN (10/100)

ZONE3

OUT

ZONE2

OUT

ZONE2

OUT

ZONE3

OUT

MONITOR

OUT

CONTROL

COMPONENT

VIDEO

ASSIGN-

ABLE

ASSIGN-

ABLE

VIDEO

OUT

SUB

WOOFER

FRONT

CENTER

EXTRA

SUR-

ROUND

(

Single

)

SUB W.

FRONT

CENTER

SUR-

ROUND

SUR-

ROUND

BACK

SURROUND

BACK

PRE OUT

MULTI CH

SIRIUS

iPod

LOOP

ANTENNA

OUT1

(HDMI CTRL) OUT2

HDMI

RF IN

(TV)

(SAT)

(DVR/

VCR 1)

(DVR/

VCR 2)

(VIDEO/

GAME

(CD-R/

TAPE/

MD)

(

DVD/LD

)

(

)

(

)

(SA

)

COAXIAL

1 4

ASSIGNABLE

OPTICAL

1 6

ZONE2

OUT

SOURCE

OUT

ZONE3

/SOURCE

OUT

1 2 34

12 V TRIGGER

(

DC OUT 12V TOTAL 250 mA MAX

)

RS-

232C

VIDEO/

GAME 1

SAT

AUX

CD-R/

TAP E /

REC

SEL

OUT

SACD

PHONO

DVD/ LD

(DVD/LD)

(VIDEO/

GAME

(BD)

(DVR/VCR 1)

(DVR/VCR 2)

ZONE2

OUT

DVR/

VCR 2

DVR/

VCR 1

REC SEL

OUT

REC SEL

OUT

REC SEL

OUT

REC SEL

OUT

S-VIDEO

ASSIGNABLE

OUT1

(HDMI CTRL)

HDMI

HDMI IN

HDMI OUT

SC-09TX

HDMI/DVI-equipped component

HDMI/DVI-compatible monitor or

plasma display

SC_09TX.book Page 20 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Connecting your equipment

Connecting your TV and DVD player

The diagram shows a basic setup of this receiver together

with a TV and DVD player, with S-Video or composite

video connections. Different TVs and DVD players may

offer alternative connections. See also Using the

component video jacks on page 25 if your TV and/or DVD

player has component video inputs/outputs. If your DVD

player offers multichannel analog audio outputs, see

Connecting the multichannel analog inputs on page 67.

1 Connect the

MONITOR OUT

video jack to a video

input on your TV.

Use a standard RCA/phono jack video cable to connect to

the composite video jack, or for higher quality video, use

an S-Video cable to connect to the S-Video jack.

2 Connect a composite or S-Video output on your

DVD player to the

DVD/LD

VIDEO

DVD/LD

S-VIDEO

input.

Connect using a standard video cable or an S-Video

cable.

3 Connect a coaxial-type

digital audio output on

your DVD player to the

COAXIAL IN 1

(

DVD/LD

) input.

Use a coaxial cable designed for digital audio.

4 Connect the stereo audio outputs on your DVD

player to the

DVD/LD

AUDIO

inputs.

Connect using a stereo RCA/phono jack cable.

• If your DVD player has multichannel analog outputs,

you can connect these instead. See also Connecting

the multichannel analog inputs on page 67.

5 If the source component is an LD player with a

digital audio output, connect this to the

RF IN

input

on this receiver.

To ensure compatibility with all laserdiscs, connect both

the PCM and 2 RF outputs from your LD player.

• Use a coaxial cable designed for digital audio for the

2 RF connection.

• You may need to assign the RF IN digital input when

setting up the receiver (see also The Input Setup

menu on page 101).

S400S400

(AUDIO)

(

For LD

)

ASSIGNABLE

VIDEOAUDIO

AUDIO

LAN (10/100)

ZONE3

OUT

ZONE2

OUT

ZONE2

OUT

ZONE3

OUT

MONITOR

OUT

CONTROL

COMPONENT

VIDEO

ASSIGN-

ABLE

ASSIGN-

ABLE

VIDEO

OUT

SUB

WOOFER

FRONT

CENTER

EXTRA

SUR-

ROUND

(

Single

)

SUB W.

FRONT

CENTER

SUR-

ROUND

SUR-

ROUND

BACK

SURROUND

BACK

PRE OUT

MULTI CH

SIRIUS

iPod

LOOP

ANTENNA

OUT1

(HDMI CTRL)

OUT2

HDMI

RF IN

(TV)

(SAT)

(DVR/

VCR 1)

(DVR/

VCR 2)

(VIDEO/

GAME

(CD-R/

TAPE/

MD)

(

DVD/LD

)

(

)

(

)

(SA

)

COAXIAL

1 4

ASSIGNABLE

OPTICAL

1 6

ZONE2

OUT

SOURCE

OUT

ZONE3

/SOURCE

OUT

1 2 34

12 V TRIGGER

(

DC OUT 12V TOTAL 250 mA MAX

)

RS-

232C

VIDEO/

GAME 1

SAT

AUX

CD-R/

TAP E/

REC

SEL

OUT

SACD

PHONO

DVD/ LD

(DVD/LD)

(VIDEO/

GAME

(BD)

(DVR/VCR 1)

(DVR/VCR 2)

ZONE2

OUT

DVR/

VCR 2

DVR/

VCR 1

REC SEL

OUT

REC SEL

OUT

REC SEL

OUT

REC SEL

OUT

S-VIDEO

BPR

DVD/ LD

ASSIGN-

ABLE

(DVD/LD)

MONITOR

OUT

(

DVD/LD

)

(DVR/

VCR 1)

VIDEOAUDIO

VIDEO

S-VIDEO

S-VIDEOOPTICAL

DIGITAL OUT VIDEO OUT

COAXIAL AUDIORL

ANALOG OUT

3 2 4

SC-09TX

DVD player

Note

1 If your DVD player only has an optical digital output, you can connect it to one of the optical inputs on this receiver using an optical cable. When you set

up the receiver you’ll need to tell the receiver which input you connected the player to (see The Input Setup menu on page 101).

SC_09TX.book Page 21 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Connecting your equipment

Connecting your Blu-ray disc player

The diagram shows a basic setup of this receiver together

with a Blu-ray disc player, with S-Video or composite

video connections. See also Using the component video

jacks on page 25 if your Blu-ray disc player has

component video inputs/outputs. If your Blu-ray disc

player offers multi-channel analog audio outputs, see

Connecting the multichannel analog inputs on page 67.

1 Connect a composite video output on your Blu-ray

disc player to the

BD VIDEO

input.

Connect using a standard video cable or an S-Video

cable.

2 Connect an coaxial-type

digital audio output on

your Blu-ray disc player to the

COAXIAL IN 2 (BD)

input.

Use a coaxial cable designed for digital audio.

3 Connect the stereo audio outputs on your Blu-ray

disc player to the

BD AUDIO

inputs.

Connect using a stereo RCA/phono jack cable.

• If your Blu-ray disc player has multi-channel analog

outputs, you can connect these instead. See also

Connecting the multichannel analog inputs on

page 67.

S400S400

(AUDIO)

(

For LD

)

ASSIGNABLE

VIDEOAUDI O

AUDIO

LAN (10/100)

ZONE3

OUT

ZONE2

OUT

ZONE2

OUT

ZONE3

OUT

MONITOR

OUT

CONTROL

COMPONENT

VIDEO

ASSIGN-

ABLE

ASSIGN-

ABLE

VIDEO

OUT

SUB

WOOFER

FRONT

CENTER

EXTRA

SUR-

ROUND

(

Single

)

SUB W.

FRONT

CENTER

SUR-

ROUND

SUR-

ROUND

BACK

SURROUND

BACK

PRE OUT

MULTI CH

SIRIUS

iPod

LOOP

ANTENNA

OUT1

(HDMI CTRL) OUT2

HDMI

RF IN

(TV)

(SAT)

(DVR/

VCR 1)

(DVR/

VCR 2)

(VIDEO/

GAME

(CD-R/

TAPE/

MD)

(

DVD/LD

)

(

)

(

)

(SA

)

COAXIAL

1 4

ASSIGNABLE

OPTICAL

1 6

ZONE2

OUT

SOURCE

OUT

ZONE3

/SOURCE

OUT

1 2 34

12 V TRIGGER

(

DC OUT 12V TOTAL 250 mA MAX

)

RS-

232C

VIDEO/

GAME 1

SAT

AUX

CD-R/

TAP E/

REC

SEL

OUT

SACD

PHONO

DVD/ LD

(DVD/LD)

(VIDEO/

GAME

(BD)

(DVR/VCR 1)

(DVR/VCR 2)

ZONE2

OUT

DVR/

VCR 2

DVR/

VCR 1

REC SEL

OUT

REC SEL

OUT

REC SEL

OUT

REC SEL

OUT

S-VIDEO

BPR

ASSIGN-

ABLE

(DVD/LD)

VIDEOAUDI O

(

)

(CD-R/

TAPE/

MD)

S-VIDEOOPTICAL

DIGITAL OUT VIDEO OUT

COAXIAL AUDIORL

ANALOG OUT

3 2 4

SC-09TX

Blu-ray disc player

Note

1 See The Input Setup menu on page 101 to assign the S-VIDEO input to the BD input function if you make this connection.

2 If your Blu-ray disc player only has an optical digital output, you can connect it to one of the optical inputs on this receiver using an optical cable. When

you set up the receiver, you’ll need to tell the receiver which input you connected the player to (see The System Setup menu on page 44).

SC_09TX.book Page 22 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Connecting your equipment

Connecting a satellite/cable receiver or other set-top box

Satellite and cable receivers, and terrestrial digital TV tuners are all examples of so-called ‘set-top boxes’.

1 Connect the audio/video outputs on the set-top

box to the

SAT

AUDIO

and

VIDEO

inputs.

Connect using a stereo RCA/phono jack cable and a

video or S-Video

cable.

2 Connect an optical-type

digital audio output from

your set-top box to the

OPTICAL IN 2 (SAT)

input.

Use an optical cable for the connection.

S400S400

(AUDIO)

(

For LD

)

ASSIGNABLE

VIDEOAUDIO

AUDIO

LAN (10/100)

ZONE3

OUT

ZONE2

OUT

ZONE2

OUT

ZONE3

OUT

MONITOR

OUT

CONTROL

COMPONENT

VIDEO

ASSIGN-

ABLE

ASSIGN-

ABLE

VIDEO

OUT

SUB

WOOFER

FRONT

CENTER

EXTRA

SUR-

ROUND

(

Single

)

SUB W.

FRONT

CENTER

SUR-

ROUND

SUR-

ROUND

BACK

SURROUND

BACK

PRE OUT

MULTI CH

SIRIUS

iPod

LOOP

ANTENNA

OUT1

(HDMI CTRL)

OUT2

HDMI

RF IN

(TV)

(SAT)

(DVR/

VCR 1)

(DVR/

VCR 2)

(VIDEO/

GAME

(CD-R/

TAPE/

MD)

(

DVD/LD

)

(

)

(

)

(SA

)

COAXIAL

1 4

ASSIGNABLE

OPTICAL

1 6

ZONE2

OUT

SOURCE

OUT

ZONE3

/SOURCE

OUT

1 2 34

12 V TRIGGER

(

DC OUT 12V TOTAL 250 mA MAX

)

RS-

232C

VIDEO/

GAME 1

SAT

AUX

CD-R/

TAP E/

REC

SEL

OUT

SACD

PHONO

DVD/ LD

(DVD/LD)

(VIDEO/

GAME

(BD)

(DVR/VCR 1)

(DVR/VCR 2)

ZONE2

OUT

DVR/

VCR 2

DVR/

VCR 1

REC SEL

OUT

REC SEL

OUT

REC SEL

OUT

REC SEL

OUT

S-VIDEO

BPR

ASSIGN-

ABLE

(DVD/LD)

VIDEOAUDIO

SAT

(SAT)

(

DVD/LD

)

DIGITAL OUT

AV OUT

VIDEOS-VIDEO AUDIORL

SC-09TX

STB

Note

1See The Input Setup menu on page 101 to assign the S-VIDEO input to the SAT input function if you make this connection.

2 If your set-top box only has a coaxial digital output, you can connect it to one of the coaxial inputs on this receiver using a coaxial digital audio cable.

When you set up the receiver you’ll need to tell the receiver which input you connected the set-top box to (see The Input Setup menu on page 101).

3 If your satellite/cable receiver doesn’t have a digital audio output, you can skip this step.

SC_09TX.book Page 23 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Connecting your equipment

Connecting a DVD/HDD recorder, VCR and other video sources

This receiver has two sets of audio/video inputs and outputs suitable for connecting analog or digital video devices,

including DVD/HDD recorders and VCRs.

1 Connect the audio/video outputs of the video

player/recorder to the

DVR/VCR 1

AUDIO

and

VIDEO

inputs.

Use a stereo RCA/phono jack audio cable for the audio

connection and a video or S-Video cable for the video

connection.

• For a second recorder, use the DVR/VCR 2 IN inputs.

2 If the device can record, connect the

DVR/VCR 1

AUDIO

and

VIDEO

outputs to the recorder’s audio/

video inputs.

Use a stereo RCA/phono jack audio cable for the audio

connection and a video or S-Video cable for the video

connection.

• For a second recorder, use the DVR/VCR 2 OUT

outputs.

3 If the device can output digital audio, connect an

optical-type

digital audio output from the recorder to

the

OPTICAL IN 3

(

DVR/VCR 1

) input.

Use an optical cable for the connection.

• For a second recorder, use the OPTICAL IN 4 (DVR/

VCR 2) input.

S400S400

(AUDIO)

(

For LD

)

ASSIGNABLE

VIDEOAUDI O

AUDIO

LAN (10/100)

ZONE3

OUT

ZONE2

OUT

ZONE2

OUT

ZONE3

OUT

MONITOR

OUT

CONTROL

COMPONENT

VIDEO

ASSIGN-

ABLE

ASSIGN-

ABLE

VIDEO

OUT

SUB

WOOFER

FRONT

CENTER

EXTRA

SUR-

ROUND

(

Single

)

SUB W.

FRONT

CENTER

SUR-

ROUND

SUR-

ROUND

BACK

SURROUND

BACK

PRE OUT

MULTI CH

SIRIUS

iPod

LOOP

ANTENNA

OUT1

(HDMI CTRL)

OUT2

HDMI

RF IN

(TV)

(SAT)

(DVR/

VCR 1)

(DVR/

VCR 2)

(VIDEO/

GAME

(CD-R/

TAPE/

MD)

(

DVD/LD

)

(

)

(

)

(SA

)

COAXIAL

1 4

ASSIGNABLE

OPTICAL

1 6

ZONE2

OUT

SOURCE

OUT

ZONE3

/SOURCE

OUT

1 2 34

12 V TRIGGER

(

DC OUT 12V TOTAL 250 mA MAX

)

RS-

232C

VIDEO/

GAME 1

SAT

AUX

CD-R/

TAP E/

REC

SEL

OUT

SACD

PHONO

DVD/ LD

(DVD/LD)

(VIDEO/

GAME

(BD)

(DVR/VCR 1)

(DVR/VCR 2)

ZONE2

OUT

DVR/

VCR 2

DVR/

VCR 1

REC SEL

OUT

REC SEL

OUT

REC SEL

OUT

REC SEL

OUT

S-VIDEO

BPR

VIDEOAUDI O

DVR/

VCR 1

REC SEL

OUT

REC SEL

OUT

S-VIDEO

(SA

)

(DVR/

VCR 1)

AV OUT

VIDEOAUDIORL

AV IN

S-VIDEO AUDIORL

VIDEOS-VIDEO

OPTICALCO AXIAL

DIGITAL OUT

1 23

SC-09TX

DVR, VCR, etc.

Note

1 • In order to record, you must connect the analog audio cables (the digital connection is for playback only).

• If your video component doesn’t have a digital audio output, you can skip this step.

2 If your recorder only has a coaxial digital output, you can connect it to one of the coaxial inputs on this receiver using a coaxial digital audio cable. When

you set up the receiver you’ll need to tell the receiver which input you connected the recorder to (see also The Input Setup menu on page 101).

SC_09TX.book Page 24 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Connecting your equipment

Using the component video jacks

Component video should give superior picture quality when compared to composite or S-Video. You can also take

advantage of progressive scan video (if your source and TV are both compatible), which delivers a very stable, flicker-

free picture. See the manuals that came with your TV and source component to check whether they are compatible

with progressive-scan video.

1 Connect the component video outputs of your

source to a set of

ASSIGNABLE COMPONENT VIDEO

inputs.

Connect using a three-way component video cable.

• Since they are assignable, it doesn’t matter which

component video inputs you use for which source.

After connecting everything, you’ll need to assign the

component video inputs—see The Input Setup menu

on page 101.

2 Connect the

COMPONENT VIDEO OUT

jacks to the

component video inputs on your TV or monitor.

Use a three-way component video cable.

S400S400

(AUDIO)

(

For LD

)

ASSIGNABLE

VIDEOAUDIO

AUDIO

AUDI O

LAN (10/100)

ZONE3

OUT

ZONE2

OUT

ZONE2

OUT

ZONE3

OUT

MONITOR

OUT

CONTROL

COMPONENT

VIDEO

ASSIGN-

ABLE

ASSIGN-

ABLE

VIDEO

OUT

SUB

WOOFER

FRONT

CENTER

EXTRA

SUR-

ROUND

(

Single

)

SUB W.

FRONT

CENTER

SUR-

ROUND

SUR-

ROUND

BACK

SURROUND

BACK

PRE OUT

MULTI CH

SIRIUS

iPod

LOOP

ANTENNA

OUT1

(HDMI CTRL) OUT2

HDMI

RF IN

(TV)

(SAT)

(DVR/

VCR 1)

(DVR/

VCR 2)

(VIDEO/

GAME

(CD-R/

TAPE/

MD)

(

DVD/LD

)

(

)

(

)

(SA

)

COAXIAL

1 4

ASSIGNABLE

OPTICAL

1 6

ZONE2

OUT

SOURCE

OUT

ZONE3

/SOURCE

OUT

1 2 34

12 V TRIGGER

(

DC OUT 12V TOTAL 250 mA MAX

)

RS-

232C

VIDEO/

GAME 1

SAT

AUX

CD-R/

TAP E/

REC

SEL

OUT

SACD

PHONO

DVD/ LD

(DVD/LD)

(VIDEO/

GAME

(BD)

(DVR/VCR 1)

(DVR/VCR 2)

ZONE2

OUT

DVR/

VCR 2

DVR/

VCR 1

REC SEL

OUT

REC SEL

OUT

REC SEL

OUT

REC SEL

OUT

S-VIDEO

BPR

(DVD/LD)

(VIDEO/

GAME

(BD)

(DVR/VCR 1)

(DVR/VCR 2)

YPBPR

ASSIGN-

ABLE

1 5

YPBPR

COMPONENT

VIDEO

YPBPR

COMPONENT

VIDEO

SC-09TX

DVD player

SC_09TX.book Page 25 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Connecting your equipment

Connecting digital audio sources

This receiver has both digital inputs and outputs, allowing you to connect digital audio components for playback and

for making digital recordings.

Most digital components also have analog connections. See Connecting analog audio sources on the following page if

you want to connect these too.

1 Connect an optical-type

digital audio output on

your digital component to the

OPTICAL IN 6 (CD-R/

TAPE/MD)

input.

Use an optical cable for the connection.

2 For recording equipment, connect one of the

optical-type

DIGITAL

outputs to a digital input on the

recorder.

Use an optical cable to connect to the SOURCE OUT or

ZONE3/SOURCE OUT.

About the WMA9 Pro decoder

This unit has an on-board Windows Media™ Audio 9

Professional

(WMA9 Pro) decoder, so it is possible to

playback WMA9 Pro-encoded audio using a coaxial or

optical digital connection when connected to a WMA9

Pro-compatible player. However, the connected PC, DVD

player, set-top box, etc. must be able to output WMA9 Pro

format audio signals through a coaxial or optical digital

output.

S400S400

(AUDIO)

(

For LD

)

ASSIGNABLE

VIDEOAUDIO

AUDIO

LAN (10/100)

ZONE3

OUT

ZONE2

OUT

ZONE2

OUT

ZONE3

OUT

MONITOR

OUT

CONTROL

COMPONENT

VIDEO

ASSIGN-

ABLE

ASSIGN-

ABLE

VIDEO

OUT

SUB

WOOFER

FRONT

CENTER

EXTRA

SUR-

ROUND

(

Single

)

SUB W.

FRONT

CENTER

SUR-

ROUND

SUR-

ROUND

BACK

SURROUND

BACK

PRE OUT

MULTI CH

SIRIUS

iPod

LOOP

ANTENNA

OUT1

(HDMI CTRL) OUT2

HDMI

RF IN

(TV)

(SAT)

(DVR/

VCR 1)

(DVR/

VCR 2)

(VIDEO/

GAME

(CD-R/

TAPE/

MD)

(

DVD/LD

)

(

)

(

)

(SA

)

COAXIAL

1 4

ASSIGNABLE

OPTICAL

1 6

ZONE2

OUT

SOURCE

OUT

ZONE3

/SOURCE

OUT

1 2 34

12 V TRIGGER

(

DC OUT 12V TOTAL 250 mA MAX

)

RS-

232C

VIDEO/

GAME 1

SAT

AUX

CD-R/

TAP E/

REC

SEL

OUT

SACD

PHONO

DVD/ LD

(DVD/LD)

(VIDEO/

GAME

(BD)

(DVR/VCR 1)

(DVR/VCR 2)

ZONE2

OUT

DVR/

VCR 2

DVR/

VCR 1

REC SEL

OUT

REC SEL

OUT

REC SEL

OUT

REC SEL

OUT

S-VIDEO

BPR

ASSIGNABLE

OPTICAL

1 6

SOURCE

OUT

(

)

(CD-R/

TAPE/

MD)

ASSIGNABLE

COAXIAL

1 4

OPTICAL COAXIAL

DIGITAL OUT

OPTICAL

DIGITAL IN

SC-09TX

CD-R, MD, DAT, etc.

Note

1 • If your digital component only has a coaxial digital output, you can connect it to one of the coaxial inputs on this receiver using a coaxial cable. When

you set up the receiver you’ll need to tell the receiver which input you connected the component to (see also The Input Setup menu on page 101).

• The digital outputs from other components can be connected to any spare digital audio inputs on this receiver. You can assign them when setting up

the receiver (see also The Input Setup menu on page 101).

2 • You must switch ZONE 3 ON in Using the MULTI-ZONE controls on page 74 to hear audio from the DIGITAL OUT1.

• In order to record some digital sources, you must make analog connections as explained in Connecting analog audio sources on page 27.

3• Windows Media, and the Windows logo are trademarks, or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

• With WMA9 Pro, sound problems may occur depending on your computer system. Note that WMA9 Pro 96 kHz sources will be downsampled to 48 kHz.

SC_09TX.book Page 26 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Connecting your equipment

Connecting analog audio sources

This receiver features five stereo audio-only inputs. One of these inputs have corresponding outputs for use with audio

recorders.

One of the audio inputs (PHONO) is a dedicated turntable input which should not be used for any other type of

component. This input also has a grounding terminal that most turntables require.

1 Connect the analog audio outputs of the source

component to one of the

AUDIO

inputs.

Connect using a stereo RCA/phono jack audio cable.

• If you’re connecting a tape deck, MD recorder, etc.,

connect the analog audio outputs (RECSEL OUT) to

the analog audio inputs on the recorder.

Turntables only:

Connect the stereo audio outputs to

the

PHONO

inputs.

• If your turntable has a grounding wire, secure it to the

ground terminal on this receiver.

• If your turntable has line-level outputs (i.e., it has a

built-in phono pre-amp), connect it to the CD inputs

instead.

Connecting a component to the front panel inputs

The front panel inputs comprise a composite video jack

(VIDEO), an S-Video jack (S-VIDEO), stereo analog audio

inputs (AUDIO L/R) and an optical digital audio input

(DIGITAL IN). You can use these connections for any kind

of audio/video component, but they are especially

convenient for portable equipment such as camcorders,

video games and portable audio/video equipment.

• Push down on the lower portion of the front panel

door to access the front video connections.

• Select these inputs using INPUT SELECT (remote) or

the INPUT SELECTOR dial (front panel) to select

VIDEO/GAME 2.

S400S400

(AUDIO)

(

For LD

)

ASSIGNABLE

VIDEOAUDIO

AUDIO

LAN (10/100)

ZONE3

OUT

ZONE2

OUT

ZONE2

OUT

ZONE3

OUT

MONITOR

OUT

CONTROL

COMPONENT

VIDEO

ASSIGN-

ABLE

ASSIGN-

ABLE

VIDEO

OUT

SUB

WOOFER

FRONT

CENTER

EXTRA

SUR-

ROUND

(

Single

)

SUB W.

FRONT

CENTER

SUR-

ROUND

SUR-

ROUND

BACK

SURROUND

BACK

PRE OUT

MULTI CH

SIRIUS

iPod

LOOP

ANTENNA

OUT1

(HDMI CTRL) OUT2

HDMI

RF IN

(TV)

(SAT)

(DVR/

VCR 1)

(DVR/

VCR 2)

(VIDEO/

GAME

(CD-R/

TAPE/

MD)

(

DVD/LD

)

(

)

(

)

(SA

)

COAXIAL

1 4

ASSIGNABLE

OPTICAL

1 6

ZONE2

OUT

SOURCE

OUT

ZONE3

/SOURCE

OUT

1 2 34

12 V TRIGGER

(

DC OUT 12V TOTAL 250 mA MAX

)

RS-

232C

VIDEO/

GAME 1

SAT

AUX

CD-R/

TAP E/

REC

SEL

OUT

SACD

PHONO

DVD/ LD

(DVD/LD)

(VIDEO/

GAME

(BD)

(DVR/VCR 1)

(DVR/VCR 2)

ZONE2

OUT

DVR/

VCR 2

DVR/

VCR 1

REC SEL

OUT

REC SEL

OUT

REC SEL

OUT

REC SEL

OUT

S-VIDEO

BPR

AUDIO

PHONO

CD-R/

TAP E/

REC

SEL

OUT

PLAY

OUT

REC

R L

AUDIO IN/OUT

SC-09TX

Turntable

Tape deck, etc.

PHONES

SPEAKERS AUTO SURROUND

/STREAM DIRECT

STATUS

LCD

VIEW

DIMMER

TUNER EDITBAND

CTRL

ZONE2 ZONE3

VIDEO/GAME 2 INPUT

DIGITAL INS-VIDEO VIDEO L R

AUDIO

MULTI-ZONE CONTROL

MCACC

SETUP MIC

USB

(TUNE)

PARAMETER

SETUP

(ST) (ST)

AUDIO VIDEO

RETURN

ENTER

VIDEO/GAME 2 INPUT

DIGITAL INS-VIDEO VIDEO L RAUDIO

VIDEO OUTPUT

DIGITAL OUT

TV game, video camera,

etc.

SC_09TX.book Page 27 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Connecting your equipment

Installing your speaker system

To take full advantage of the receiver’s surround sound

capabilities connect front, center, surround A, surround

B and surround back speakers, as well as subwoofers.

Although this is ideal, other configurations with fewer

speakers—no subwoofer or no center speaker, or even no

surround speakers—will work. At the very least, front left

and right speakers only are necessary. Note that your

main surround speakers should always be connected as

a pair, but you can connect just one surround back

speaker if you like (it must be connected to the left

surround back terminal). The following connections

example is for 9.2-channel surround connections. Note

that many other speaker layouts and usage patterns are

also possible. For details see Selecting the speaker layout/

usage pattern on page 10.

You can use speakers with a nominal impedance

between 6 Ω and 16 Ω (or between 4 Ω and 16 Ω for the

R1/L1 terminals).

Note

1 • When using one subwoofer, connect it to the SUBWOOFER 1 terminal.

• When using only one surround back speaker, connect it to the L4 (Single) terminals.

• When only two surround speakers are connected, connect them to the L2 (SL A) and R2 (SR A) terminals.

S400S400

(AUDIO)

(

For LD

)

ASSIGNABLE

FRONT FRONTCENTER

SUR-

ROUND-A

SUR-

ROUND-A

SUR-

ROUND-B

VIDEOAUDI O

AUDIO

LAN (10/100)

ZONE3

OUT

ZONE2

OUT

ZONE2

OUT

ZONE3

OUT

MONITOR

OUT

CONTROL

COMPONENT

VIDEO

ASSIGN-

ABLE

ASSIGN-

ABLE

VIDEO

OUT

SUB

WOOFER

FRONT

CENTER

EXTRA

SUR-

ROUND

(

Single

)

SUB W.

FRONT

CENTER

SUR-

ROUND

SUR-

ROUND

BACK

SURROUND

BACK

PRE OUT

MULTI CH

SIRIUS

iPod

LOOP

ANTENNA

OUT1

(HDMI CTRL) OUT2

HDMI

RF IN

(TV)

(SAT)

(DVR/

VCR 1)

(DVR/

VCR 2)

(VIDEO/

GAME

(CD-R/

TAPE/

MD)

(

DVD/LD

)

(

)

(

)

(SA

)

COAXIAL

1 4

ASSIGNABLE

SELECTABLE

R1 R5

SEE

INSTRUCTION

MANUAL

VOIR LE MODE

EMPLOI

SURROUND

BACK

SUR-

ROUND-B

R3 R4 R5 L5

SURROUND

BACK

(Single)

L4 L3 L2 L1

AC IN

SPEAKERS

Normal

LOW HIGH

FRONT

All ch Bi-Amp.

OPTICAL

1 6

ZONE2

OUT

SOURCE

OUT

ZONE3

/SOURCE

OUT

LOW HIGH

SURROUND

LOW HIGH

CENTER

HIGH LOW

SURROUND

HIGH LOW

FRONT

1 2 34

12 V TRIGGER

(

DC OUT 12V TOTAL 250 mA MAX

)

RS-

232C

VIDEO/

GAME 1

SAT

AUX

CD-R/

TAP E/

REC

SEL

OUT

SACD

PHONO

DVD/ LD

(DVD/LD)

(VIDEO/

GAME

(BD)

(DVR/VCR 1)

(DVR/VCR 2)

ZONE2

OUT

DVR/

VCR 2

DVR/

VCR 1

REC SEL

OUT

REC SEL

OUT

REC SEL

OUT

REC SEL

OUT

S-VIDEO

BPR

FRONT FRONTCENTER

SUR-

ROUND-A

SUR-

ROUND-A

SUR-

ROUND-B

SELECTABLE

R1 R5

SEE

INSTRUCTION

MANUAL

VOIR LE MODE

EMPLOI

SURROUND

BACK

SUR-

ROUND-B

R3 R4 R5 L5

SURROUND

BACK

(Single)

L4 L3 L2 L1

SPEAKERS

Normal

LOW HIGH

FRONT

All ch Bi-Amp.

LOW HIGH

SURROUND

LOW HIGH

CENTER

HIGH LOW

SURROUND

HIGH LOW

FRONT

SUB

WOOFER

LINE LEVEL

INPUT

LINE LEVEL

INPUT

Front

right

Front

left

Subwoofer 2

Subwoofer 1

Center

SC-09TX

Surround

left A

Surround

right A

Surround

right B

Surround

left B

Surround

back right

Surround

back left

SC_09TX.book Page 28 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Connecting your equipment

Connecting the speakers

Each speaker connection on the receiver comprises a

positive (+) and negative (–) terminal. Make sure to

match these up with the terminals on the speakers

themselves.

Caution

• These speaker terminals carry HAZARDOUS LIVE

voltage. To prevent the risk of electric shock when

connecting or disconnecting the speaker cables,

disconnect the power cord before touching any

uninsulated parts.

• Make sure that all the bare speaker wire is twisted

together and inserted fully into the speaker terminal.

If any of the bare speaker wire touches the back panel

it may cause the power to cut off as a safety measure.

Bare wire connections

Make sure that the speaker cable you’re going to use is

properly prepared with about 10 mm (

/8 in.) of insulator

stripped from each wire, and the exposed wire strands

twisted together (fig. A).

To connect a terminal, unscrew the terminal a few turns

until there is enough space to insert the exposed wire

(fig. B). Once the wire is in position, tighten the terminal

until the wire is firmly clamped (fig. C).

Banana plug connections

If you want to use speaker cables terminated with banana

plugs, screw the speaker terminal fully shut, then plug

the banana plug into the end of the speaker terminal.

Important

• Please refer to the manual that came with your

speakers for details on how to connect the other end

of the speaker cables to your speakers.

• If you are using a THX certified subwoofer use the

THX INPUT jack on the subwoofer (if your subwoofer

has one) or switch the filter position to THX on your

subwoofer.

Placing the speakers

Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect

on the quality of the sound. The following guidelines

should help you to get the best sound from your system.

• The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the

other speakers should be at about ear-level when

you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the

floor (except the subwoofer), or mounting them very

high on a wall is not recommended.

• For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers

2 m to 3 m (6 ft. to 9 ft.) apart, at equal distance from

the TV.

• When placing speakers near the TV, we recommend

using magnetically shielded speakers to prevent

possible interference, such as discoloration of the

picture when the TV is switched on. If you do not have

magnetically shielded speakers and notice

discoloration of the TV picture, move the speakers

farther away from the TV.

• If you’re using a center speaker, place the front

speakers at a wider angle. If not, place them at a

narrower angle.

• Place the center speaker above or below the TV so

that the sound of the center channel is localized at

the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker

does not cross the line formed by the leading edge of

the front left and right speakers.

• It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening

position. The angle depends on the size of the room.

Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.

• Surround and surround back speakers should be

positioned 60 cm to 90 cm (1.5 ft. to 3 ft.) higher than

your ears and titled slight downward. Make sure the

speakers don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the

speakers should be more directly behind the listener

than for home theater playback.

• Try not to place the surround speakers farther away

from the listening position than the front and center

speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound

effect.

fig. A fig. B fig. C

10 mm (

/8 in.)

SC_09TX.book Page 29 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Connecting your equipment

• To achieve the best possible surround sound, install

your speakers as shown below. Be sure all speakers

are installed securely to prevent accidents and

improve sound quality.

Caution

• Make sure that all speakers are securely installed.

This not only improves sound quality, but also

reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from

speakers being knocked over or falling in the event of

external shocks such as earthquakes.

The diagrams below show suggested surround and

surround back speaker orientation. The first diagram (fig.

A) shows orientation with one surround back speaker (or

none) connected. The second (fig. B) shows orientation

with two surround back speakers connected.

• If you have two surround back speakers THX

recommends placing them together and the same

distance from your listening position (see below).

THX speaker system setup

If you have a complete THX speaker system, follow the

diagram below to place your speakers. Note that the

surround speakers ( indicates bi-polar radiating

speakers) should output at an angle parallel to the

listener.

• If you have two surround back speakers THX

recommends placing them together and the same

distance from your listening position for the following

THX modes: THX Ultra2 CINEMA, THX Ultra2

MUSIC and THX Ultra2 GAMES.

See also THX Audio Setting on page 58 to make the

settings that will give you the best sound experience

when using the Home THX modes (page 37).

Connecting antennas

The supplied antennas provide a simple way to listen to

AM and FM radio. If you find that reception quality is

poor, an outdoor antenna should give you better sound

quality—see Connecting external antennas on page 31.

Center

Subwoofer

Front

left

Front

right

Surround

left A

Surround

left B

Surround

right A

Surround

right B

Listening position

Single surround back speaker

Surround back left

Surround back right

SBL

SBR

90° to 120°

0° to 60°

fig. A

fig. B

Surround

SBL

SBR

Surround back

S400S400

(AUDIO)

(

For LD

)

ASSIGNABLE

AUDI O

LAN (10/100)

ZONE2

OUT

ZONE3

OUT

SUB

WOOFER

FRONT

CENTER

EXTRA

SUR-

ROUND

(

Single

)

SUB W.

FRONT

CENTER

SUR-

ROUND

SUR-

ROUND

BACK

SURROUND

BACK

PRE OUT

MULTI CH

SIRIUS

iPod

UNBAL

LOOP

ANTENNA

OUT1

(HDMI CTRL

)

HDMI

RF IN

(TV)

(SAT)

(DVR/

VCR 1)

(DVR/

VCR 2)

(VIDEO/

GAME

(CD-R/

TAPE/

MD)

(

DVD/LD

)

(

)

(

)

(SA

)

COAXIAL

1 4

ASSIGNABLE

OPTICAL

1 6

ZONE2

OUT

SOURCE

OUT

ZONE3

/SOURCE

OUT

LOOP

ANTENNA

SC-09TX

SC_09TX.book Page 30 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Connecting your equipment

AM loop antenna

1 Assemble the stand as shown in the illustration.

• Bend the stand in the direction indicated (fig. A).

• Clip the loop into the stand (fig. B).

• It’s possible to fix the AM antenna to a wall (fig. C).

Before fixing, make sure that the reception is

satisfactory.

2 Pull off the protective shields of both AM antenna

wires.

3 Press the

AM LOOP

antenna terminal tabs to open

and insert one wire into each terminal.

4 Release the tabs to secure the AM antenna wires.

5 Place the AM antenna on a flat surface and point in

the direction giving the best reception.

Avoid placing near computers, television sets or other

electrical appliances and do not let it come into contact

with metal objects.

FM wire antenna

• Connect the FM wire antenna to the

FM UNBAL

75 Ω

in the same way as the AM antenna.

For best results, extend the FM antenna fully and fix to a

wall or door frame. Don’t drape loosely or leave coiled up.

Connecting external antennas

To improve FM reception connect an external FM

antenna to the FM UNBAL 75 Ω.

To improve AM reception, connect a 5 m to 6 m (15 ft. to

18 ft.) length of vinyl-coated wire to the AM LOOP

terminals without disconnecting the supplied AM loop

antenna.

For the best possible reception, suspend horizontally

outdoors.

Plugging in the receiver

Only plug in after you have connected all your

components to this receiver, including the speakers.

1 Plug the supplied power cord into the

AC IN

socket

on the back of the receiver.

2 Plug the other end into a power outlet.

Caution

• Handle the power cord by the plug part. Do not pull

out the plug by tugging the cord, and never touch the

power cord when your hands are wet, as this could

cause a short circuit or electric shock. Do not place

the unit, a piece of furniture, or other object on the

power cord or pinch the cord in any other way. Never

make a knot in the cord or tie it with other cables. The

power cords should be routed so that they are not

likely to be stepped on. A damaged power cord can

cause a fire or give you an electric shock. Check the

power cord once in a while. If you find it damaged,

ask your nearest Pioneer authorized independent

service company for a replacement.

• The receiver should be disconnected by removing the

mains plug from the wall socket when not in regular

use, e.g., when on vacation.

•Make sure the blue  STANDBY/ON light has gone

out before unplugging.

Note

1 Do not use any antennas other than the supplied AM loop antenna.

fig. A

fig. B

fig. C

LOOP

ANTENNA

75 Ω coaxial cable

LOOP

ANTENNA

Outdoor antenna

5 m to 6 m

(15 ft. to 18 ft.)

Indoor antenna

(vinyl-coated wire)

SC_09TX.book Page 31 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Controls and displays

Chapter 4:

Controls and displays

Front panel

 STANDBY/ON

Switches the receiver between on and standby. Power

indicator lights when the receiver is on.

INPUT SELECTOR

dial

Use to select an input source.

PHASE CONTROL

indicator

Lights to indicate Phase Control or Full Band Phase

Control is selected (page 15).

4 Remote sensor

Receives the signals from the remote control (see

Operating range of remote control unit on page 33).

ADVANCED MCACC

indicator

Lights when one of the MCACC presets (page 39) is

selected.

6 LCD display

i.LINK

indicator

Lights when an i.LINK-Audio-equipped component is

selected (page 65).

HDMI

indicator

Blinks when connecting an HDMI-equipped component;

lights when the component is connected (page 19).

PHONES

SPEAKERS AUTO SURROUND

/STREAM DIRECT

STATUS

LCD

VIEW

DIMMER

TUNER EDITBAND

CTRL

ZONE2 ZONE3

VIDEO/GAME 2 INPUT

DIGITAL INS-VIDEO VIDEO L R

AUDIO

MULTI-ZONE CONTROL

MCACC

SETUP MIC

USB

(TUNE)

PARAMETER

SETUP

(ST) (ST)

AUDIO VIDEO

RETURN

ENTER



SC-09TX

MASTER

VOLUME

STANDBY/ON

INPUT

SELECTOR

R1R2R3R4R5

ACTIVE MONITOR

L5L4L3L2L1

1 2

13 15 16 1714 18 20 2119

3 75 89106

23 24 25 26 27 28

Note

1 The MCACC indicator does not light when the MCACC preset memory currently being selected has not been corrected with Acoustic Calibration EQ

Professional or when EQ is set to OFF in the Audio parameter menu (see Setting the Audio options on page 106).

SC_09TX.book Page 32 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Controls and displays

MASTER VOLUME

dial

ACTIVE MONITOR

indicator

The indicators of the speaker terminals compatible with

sound output are lit.

11 Front panel controls

To access the front panel controls, push gently on the

lower third portion of the panel with your finger.

MULTI-ZONE CONTROL

If you’ve made MULTI-ZONE connections (see MULTI-

ZONE listening on page 71) use these controls to control

the sub zone from the main zone (see Using the MULTI-

ZONE controls on page 74).

13 BAND

Switches between AM and FM radio bands (page 42).

TUNER EDIT

Use with / to memorize and name stations for recall

(page 43).

AUDIO PARAMETER

Use to access the Audio options (page 106).

VIDEO PARAMETER

Use to access the Video options (page 108).

///

(

TUNE

) /

ENTER

Use the arrow buttons when setting up your surround

sound system (see page 44). Use the TUNE / buttons

to find radio frequencies and use ST / to find preset

stations (page 43).

STATUS

Information on the currently selected and set functions,

the input signal, etc., is displayed on the LCD (page 111).

LCD VIEW

The information shown on the LCD can be switched in

three steps (page 110).

DIMMER

Dims or brightens the LCD display (page 110).

USB

interface

Connect a USB audio device for playback (page 80).

SPEAKERS

Use to change the speaker system (page 68).

AUTO SURROUND

STREAM DIRECT

Press to select Auto Surround (page 36) or Stream Direct

(page 38) listening.

PHONES

jack

Use to connect headphones. When the headphones are

connected, there is no sound output from the speakers.

MCACC SETUP MIC

jack

Use to connect the supplied microphone.

SETUP

Press to access the System Setup menu (page 44).

RETURN

Press to confirm and exit the current menu screen.

VIDEO/GAME 2 INPUT

See Connecting a component to the front panel inputs on

page 27.

Operating range of remote control unit

The remote control may not work properly if:

• There are obstacles between the remote control and

the receiver’s remote sensor.

• Direct sunlight or fluorescent light is shining onto the

remote sensor.

• The receiver is located near a device that is emitting

infrared rays.

• The receiver is operated simultaneously with another

infrared remote control unit.



SC-LX90

STER

VOLUME

STAN

BY/O

INPUT

SELE

TOR

ACTIVE MONITOR



SC-LX90

STER

VOLUME

INPUT

SELEC

TOR

ACTI

E M

NITOR

7 m (23 ft.)

30°

SC_09TX.book Page 33 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Controls and displays

Remote control

The remote has been conveniently color-coded according

to component control using the following system:

• White – Receiver control, TV Control

• Blue – Other controls

1 MULTI-ZONE operation selector switch

Switch to perform operations in the main zone, zone 2

and zone 3 (page 71).

RECEIVER

This switches between standby and on for this receiver.

MULTI OPERATION

Use this button to perform multi operations (page 115).

4 Input source buttons

Press to select control of other components (see

Controlling the rest of your system on page 113).

5 Character display (LCD)

This display shows information when transmitting

control signals.

The following commands are shown when you’re setting

the remote to control other components (see Controlling

the rest of your system on page 113):

SETUP – Indicates the setup mode, from which you

choose the options below.

PRESET – See Selecting preset codes directly on

page 113.

LEARNING – See Programming signals from other

remote controls on page 113.

MULTI OP – See Multi Operation and System Off on

page 115.

SYS OFF – See Multi Operation and System Off on

page 115.

DIRECT F – See Direct function on page 115.

RENAME – See Renaming input source names on

page 115.

ERASE – See Erasing one of the remote control button

settings on page 114.

RESET – See Resetting the remote control presets on

page 114.

READ ID – See Confirming preset codes on page 115.

TV CONTROL

buttons

These buttons are dedicated to control the TV assigned to

the TV button. Thus if you only have one TV to hook up to

this system assign it to the TV input source button (see

page 113 for more on this).

TV – Use to turn on/off the power of the TV.

TV VOL +/– – Use to adjust the volume on your TV.

INPUT – Use to select the TV input signal.

TV CH +/– – Use to select channels.

MUTE – Use to mute the sound or cancel the mute

mode.

7 Tuner/component control buttons/

SETUP

These button controls can be accessed after you have

selected the corresponding input source button (DVD,

DVR 1, TV, etc.). The BAND and T.EDIT tuner controls

are explained on page 42 and page 43. Set the operation

selector switch to RCV to access the following controls:

AUDIO PARAMETER – Use to access the Audio

options (page 106).

VIDEO PARAMETER – Use to access the Video

options (page 108).

SETUP – Use to access the System Setup menu

(page 44).

RETURN – Press to confirm and exit the current

menu screen (also use to return to the previous menu

with DVDs or to select closed captioning with DTV).

DVD

RECEIVER SOURCE

MAIN

MULTI

OPERATION

AUDIO

PARAMETER

TOP MENU

BAND

CATEGORY

STATUS

THX MPX MEMORY

CH LEVEL

T.EDIT

VIDEO

PARAMETER

RETURN

SETUP

ZONE2

SOURCE

TV RCV

DVR1

GALLERY

HOME MEDIA

INPUT SELECT

TUNER

INPUT MUTE

TUNE

ST ST

MUTE

VOL

TV CONTROL

iPo d HDMI

STEREO/

F.S.SURR

SIGNAL SEL SLEEP AUDIO

iPod CTRL

DIMMER

SR+

CLR

SBch PHASE

A.ATT GENRE

HDMI OUT

D.ACCESS

ENTER

MCACC CLASS

DISP

AUTO/

DIRECT

STANDARD ADV SURR

PHONO

CD-R

DVR2

VIDEO1 VIDEO2

BD TV SAT

SACD

XM SIRIUS

ENTER

SC_09TX.book Page 34 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Controls and displays

///

(

TUNE

) /

ENTER

Use the arrow buttons when setting up your surround

sound system (see page 44) and the Audio or Video

options (page 106 or 108). Also used to control DVD

menus/options and for deck 1 of a double cassette deck

player. Use the TUNE / buttons to find radio

frequencies and use ST / to find preset stations

(page 43).

9 Component control buttons

The main buttons (, , etc.) are used to control a

component after you have selected it using the input

source buttons.

The controls above these buttons can be accessed after

you have selected the corresponding input source button

(for example DVD, DVR 1 or TV).

MPX – Switches between stereo and mono reception

of FM broadcasts. If the signal is weak, then

switching to mono will improve the sound quality

(page 42). NOISE CUT MODE 1 to 4 can be selected

when receiving AM broadcasts.

STATUS – Set the operation selector switch to RCV,

then press to check selected receiver settings

(page 111).

CH LEVEL – Set the remote control operation switch

to RCV, then press repeatedly to select a channel,

then use / to adjust the level (page 57).

10 Receiver controls

STEREO/F.S.SURR – Switches between the stereo

playback mode (page 38) and the Front Stage

Surround Advance mode (page 38).

AUTO/DIRECT – Press to select Auto Surround

(page 36) or Stream Direct (page 38) listening.

THX – Press to select a Home THX listening mode

(page 37).

STANDARD – Press for Standard decoding and to

switch between the various 2 Pro Logic IIx and

Neo:6 options (page 36).

ADV SURR – Use to switch between the various

surround modes (page 37).

11 Number buttons and other receiver/component

controls

Use the number buttons to directly select a radio

frequency (page 42) or the tracks on a CD, DVD, etc.

ENTER can be used to enter commands for TV or DTV.

After set the remote control operation switch to RCV:

SIGNAL SEL – Use to select an input signal (page 39).

SLEEP – Use to put the receiver in sleep mode and

select the amount of time before sleep (page 110).

DIMMER – Dims or brightens the display (page 110).

SR+ – Switches the SR+ mode on/off (page 76).

SBch – Use to select the surround/virtual back

channel mode (page 40).

PHASE – Press to switch on/off Phase Control or Full

Band Phase Control (page 15).

A.ATT – Attenuates (lowers) the level of an analog

input signal to prevent distortion (page 110).

GENRE – Automatically selects the most appropriate

Advanced Surround mode for the genre of the source

currently being played back (this feature is available

only when a Pioneer DVD recorder supporting HDMI

Control is connected to this receiver via HDMI)

(page 41).

HDMI OUT – Switch the HDMI output terminal

(page 98).

MCACC – Press to switch between MCACC presets

(page 39).

Press TUNER first to access:

D.ACCESS – After pressing, you can access a radio

station directly using the number buttons (page 42).

CLASS – Switches between the three banks (classes)

of radio station presets (page 43).

SOURCE

Press to turn on/off other components connected to the

receiver (see page 113 for more on this).

INPUT SELECT

Use to select the input source.

14 Remote control operation selector switch

Set to RCV to operate the receiver, TV or SOURCE to

operate the TV or the source device.

When this switch is set to RCV, the receiver can be

controlled (used to select the green commands above

the number buttons (A.ATT, etc.). Also use this switch to

set up surround sound (page 12, page 44).

VOL +/–

Use to set the listening volume.

MUTE

Mutes the sound or restores the sound if it has been

muted (adjusting the volume also restores the sound).

On this receiver’s remote control, the illumination of some of the

buttons and the LCD light when buttons are operated or the remote

control operation selector switch is switched. They also light when

the remote control illumination button is pressed, and turn off when

the button is pressed again. This function is convenient when

operating in dark rooms.

If you do not want the illumination to light when buttons are

operated, press and hold in the remote control illumination button

for 5 seconds to display LIGHT_M2 on the LCD. To return to the

original setting, press the remote control illumination button again

for 5 seconds to display LIGHT_M1 on the LCD.

THX

AUTO/

DIRECT

STANDARD

VIDEO

PARAMETER

T.E DIT

OP MENU

BAND

RETURN

CATEGORY

STATUS

CH LEVEL

ADV SURR

STEREO/

F.S.SURR

MUTE

SETUP

MUTE

ENTER

TUNE

MEMORY

Remote control

illumination button

SC_09TX.book Page 35 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Listening to your system

Chapter 5:

Listening to your system

Important

• The listening modes and many features described in

this section may not be available depending on the

current source, settings and status of the receiver.

See Listening modes with different input signal

formats on page 149 for more on this.

Auto playback

There are many ways to listen back to sources using this

receiver, but for the simplest, most direct listening option

is the Auto Surround feature. The receiver automatically

detects what kind of source you’re playing and selects

multichannel or stereo playback as necessary.

• While listening to a source, press

AUTO/DIRECT

(

AUTO SURROUND

STREAM DIRECT

)

for auto

playback of a source.

AUTO SURROUND shows briefly in the display before

showing the decoding or playback format. Check the

digital format indicators in the front LCD display to see

how the source is being processed.

• When listening to XM Radio, the XM HD Surround

feature is selected automatically (see Using XM HD

Surround on page 63 for more on this), and also when

listening to the FM Radio, the Neural THX feature is

selected automatically (see Using Neural THX on

page 42 for more on this).

Listening in surround sound

Using this receiver, you can listen to any source in

surround sound. However, the options available will

depend on your speaker setup and the type of source

you’re listening to.

If you connected surround back speakers, see also Using

surround back channel processing on page 40.

Standard surround sound

The following modes provide basic surround sound for

stereo and multichannel sources.

• While listening to a source, press

STANDARD

If necessary, press repeatedly to select a listening mode.

• If the source is Dolby Digital, DTS, or Dolby Surround

encoded, the proper decoding format will

automatically be selected and shows in the display.

With two channel sources, you can select from:

• 2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE – Up to 7.1 channel sound,

especially suited to movie sources

• 2 Pro Logic IIx MUSIC – Up to 7.1 channel sound,

especially suited to music sources

• 2 Pro Logic IIx GAME– Up to 7.1 channel sound,

especially suited to video games

• 2 PRO LOGIC – 4.1 channel surround sound (sound

from the surround speakers is mono)

• Neo:6 CINEMA – 7.1 channel sound, especially

suited to movie sources

• Neo:6 MUSIC – 7.1 channel sound, especially suited

to music sources

• Neural THX – Up to 7.1 channel sound, especially

suited to music sources

Note

1 • Stereo surround (matrix) formats are decoded accordingly using Neo:6 CINEMA or 2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE (see Listening in surround sound above

for more on these decoding formats).

• The Auto Surround feature is canceled if you connect headphones.

2 For more options using this button, see Using Stream Direct on page 38.

THX MPX MEMORY

STEREO/

F.S.SURR

SIGNAL SEL SLEEP AUDIODIMMER

AUTO/

DIRECT

STANDARD ADV SURR

AUTO/

DIRECT

3 In modes that give 6.1 channel sound, the same signal is heard from both surround back speakers.

4 If surround back channel processing (page 40) is switched OFF, or the surround back speakers are set to NO (this happens automatically if the Speaker

output setting on page 47 is set to All Ch Bi-Amp), 2 Pro Logic IIx becomes 2 Pro Logic II (5.2 channel sound).

5 When listening to 2-channel sources in Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music mode, there are three further parameters you can adjust: Center Width, Dimension,

and Panorama. See Setting the Audio options on page 106 to adjust them.

6 When listening to 2-channel sources in Neo:6 Music mode, you can also adjust the center image effect (see Setting the Audio options on page 106).

7 Neural THX can be selected with the FM input.

THX MPX MEMORY

STEREO/

F.S.SURR

SIGNAL SEL SLEEP AUDIODIMMER

AUTO/

DIRECT

STANDARD ADV SURRSTANDARD

SC_09TX.book Page 36 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Listening to your system

• XM HD Surround – Up to 7.1 channel sound,

especially suited to music sources

With multichannel sources, if you have connected

surround back speaker(s) and have selected SBch ON, you

can select (according to format):

• 2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE – See above (only available

when you’re using two surround back speakers)

• 2 Pro Logic IIx MUSIC – See above

• Dolby Digital EX – Creates surround back channel

sound for 5.1 channel sources and provides pure

decoding for 6.1 channel sources (like Dolby Digital

Surround EX)

• DTS-ES – Allows you to hear 6.1 channel playback

with DTS-ES encoded sources

• DTS Neo:6 – Allows you to hear 6.1 channel playback

with DTS encoded sources

Using the Home THX modes

THX and Home THX are technical standards created by

THX Ltd. for cinema and home theater sound. Home THX

is designed to make home theater audio sound more like

what you hear in a cinema.

Different THX options will be available depending on the

source and the setting for surround back channel

processing (see Using surround back channel processing

on page 40 for more on this).

1 Set the operation selector switch to

RCV

2Press

THX

to select a listening mode.

With two channel sources, press THX repeatedly to select

a matrix-decoding process for the THX CINEMA mode

(see Listening in surround sound above for an

explanation of each process):

• 2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE+THX

• 2 PRO LOGIC+THX CINEMA

• Neo:6 CINEMA+THX

• 2 Pro Logic IIx MUSIC+THX

• Neo:6 MUSIC+THX

• 2 Pro Logic IIx GAME+THX

• THX Ultra2 GAMES

With multichannel sources, press THX repeatedly to

select from:

• THX Surround EX – Allows you to hear 6.1 or 7.1

channel playback with 5.1 channel sources

• 2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE+THX

• THX Ultra2 CINEMA – Allows you to hear 7.1

channel playback with 5.1 channel sources

• 2 Pro Logic IIx MUSIC+THX

• THX Ultra2 MUSIC – This mode is suited not only for

sources recorded in Dolby Digital and DTS, but also

to all multi-channel music sources (DVD-Audio, etc.).

• THX Ultra2 GAMES – This mode is suited to playing

the sound of games.

Using the Advanced surround effects

The Advanced surround effects can be used for a variety

of additional surround sound effects. Most Advanced

Surround modes are designed to be used with film

soundtracks, but some modes are also suited for music

sources. Try different settings with various soundtracks

to see which you like.

• Press

ADV SURR

repeatedly to select a listening

mode.

• ACTION – Designed for action movies with dynamic

soundtracks

• DRAMA – Designed for movies with lots of dialog

• SCI-FI – Designed for science fiction with lots of

special effects

• MONOFILM – Creates surround sound from mono

soundtracks

• ENTERTAINMENT SHOW – Suitable for musical

sources

• EXPANDED THEATER – Creates an extra wide stereo

field

• TV SURROUND – Provides surround sound for both

mono and stereo TV sources

• ADVANCED GAME – Suitable for video games

• SPORTS – Suitable for sports programs

• CLASSICAL – Gives a large concert hall-type sound

• ROCK/POP – Creates a live concert sound for rock

and/or pop music

Note

1 XM HD Surround can be selected only with the XM input.

2 • If you only have one surround back speaker connected, THX Ultra2 GAMES is not available.

• You can’t use the THX modes when headphones are connected.

SOURCE

TV RCV

VOL

VOLCH

SOURCE

TV RCV

CATEGORY

STATUS

THX MPX MEMORY

CH LEVEL

TUNE

STEREO/

F.S.SURR

AUTO/

DIRECT

STANDARD ADV SURR

THX

3 • Depending on the source and the sound mode you have selected, you may not get sound from the surround back speakers in your setup. For more on

this, refer to Using surround back channel processing on page 40.

• If you press ADV SURR when the headphones are connected, the PHONES SURROUND mode will automatically be selected.

4 Use with Dolby Pro Logic for a stereo surround effect (stereo field is wider than Standard modes with Dolby Digital sources).

THX MPX MEMORY

STEREO/

F.S.SURR

SIGNAL SEL SLEEP AUDIODIMMER

AUTO/

DIRECT

STANDARD ADV SURRADV SURR

SC_09TX.book Page 37 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Listening to your system

• UNPLUGGED – Suitable for acoustic music sources

• EXTENDED STEREO – Gives multichannel sound to a

stereo source, using all of your speakers

• PHONES SURROUND – When listening through

headphones, you can still get the effect of overall

surround.

Tip

• When an Advanced Surround listening mode is

selected, the effect level can be adjusted using the

EFFECT parameter in Setting the Audio options on

page 106.

Listening in stereo

When you select STEREO, you will hear the source

through just the front left and right speakers (and

possibly your subwoofer depending on your speaker

settings). Dolby Digital, DTS and WMA9 Pro

multichannel sources are downmixed to stereo.

• While listening to a source, press

STEREO/F.S.SURR

for stereo playback.

Press repeatedly to switch between:

• STEREO – The audio is heard with your surround

settings and you can still use the Midnight,

Loudness, and Tone functions.

• F.S.SURR FOCUS – See Using Front Stage Surround

Advance below for more on this.

• F.S.SURR WIDE – See Using Front Stage Surround

Advance below for more on this.

Using Front Stage Surround Advance

The Front Stage Surround Advance function allows you to

create natural surround sound effects using just the front

speakers and the subwoofer.

• While listening to a source, press

STEREO/F.S.SURR

to select Front Stage Surround Advance modes.

• STEREO – See Listening in stereo above for more on

this.

• F.S.SURR FOCUS – Use to provide a rich surround

sound effect directed to the center of where the front

left and right speakers sound projection area

converges.

• F.S.SURR WIDE – Use to provide a surround sound

effect to a wider area than FOCUS mode.

Using Stream Direct

Use the Stream Direct modes when you want to hear the

truest possible reproduction of a source. All unnecessary

signal processing is bypassed, and you’re left with the

pure analog or digital sound source (see Stream direct

with different input signal formats on page 153).

1 While listening to a source, press

AUTO/DIRECT

(

AUTO SURROUND

STREAM DIRECT

) to select the

mode you want.

Check the digital format indicators in the front LCD

display to see how the source is being processed.

• AUTO SURROUND – See Auto playback on page 36.

THX MPX MEMORY

STEREO/

F.S.SURR

SIGNAL SEL SLEEP AUDIODIMMER

AUTO/

DIRECT

STANDARD ADV SURR

STEREO/

F.S.SURR

Note

1 When using F.S.SURR WIDE, a better effect can be obtained if Auto MCACC Setup is performed. For more on this, refer to Automatically setting up for

surround sound (MCACC & Full Band Phase Control) on page 12.

THX MPX MEMORY

STEREO/

F.S.SURR

SIGNAL SEL SLEEP AUDIODIMMER

AUTO/

DIRECT

STANDARD ADV SURR

STEREO/

F.S.SURR

FOCUS position

(Recommended)

WIDE position

Front left

speaker

Front right

speaker

Front left

speaker

Front right

speaker

THX MPX MEMORY

STEREO/

F.S.SURR

SIGNAL SEL SLEEP AUDIODIMMER

AUTO/

DIRECT

STANDARD ADV SURR

AUTO/

DIRECT

SC_09TX.book Page 38 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Listening to your system

• DIRECT – Sources are heard according to the

settings made in the Surround Setup (speaker

setting, channel level, speaker distance, acoustic

calibration EQ, and X-curve), as well as with dual

mono, the input attenuator, and any sound delay and

hi-bit/hi-sampling settings. You will hear sources

according to the number of channels in the signal.

• PURE DIRECT – Analog and PCM sources are heard

without any digital processing.

When the speaker

output setting is set to 7.2ch + Speaker B, no sound

is output from the Speaker B in this mode.

Selecting MCACC presets

• Default setting: MEMORY 1

If you have calibrated your system for different listening

positions

, you can switch between settings to suit the

kind of source you’re listening to and where you’re sitting

(for example, watching movies from a sofa, or playing a

video game close to the TV).

1 Set the operation selector switch to

RCV

2 While listening to a source, press

MCACC

Press repeatedly to select one of the six MCACC presets

or to switch calibration off. See Data Management on

page 54 to check and manage your current settings.

Choosing the input signal

On this receiver, it is possible to switch the input signals

for the different inputs as described below.

1 Set the operation selector switch to

RCV

2Press

SIGNAL SEL (SIGNAL SELECT

) to select the

input signal corresponding to the source component.

Each press cycles through the options as follows:

• AUTO – This is the default setting. The receiver

selects the first available signal in the following order:

; HDMI; 2 RF; DIGITAL; ANALOG.

• ANALOG – Selects an analog signal.

• DIGITAL – Selects an optical or coaxial digital signal.

• 2 RF – Selects a 2 RF signal.

• HDMI – Selects an HDMI signal.

• – Selects an i.LINK signal.

• PCM – Only PCM signals are output.

The receiver

selects the first available signal in the following order:

; HDMI; DIGITAL.

When set to DIGITAL or AUTO, 2 DIGITAL lights with

Dolby Digital or Dolby Digital Plus decoding, 2 HD

lights with Dolby TrueHD decoding, DTS lights with DTS

or DTS-HD decoding, and WMA9 Pro lights to indicate

that a WMA9 Pro signal is being decoded.

Note

1 There are cases where a brief noise is heard before playback of sources other than PCM. Please select AUTO SURROUND or DIRECT if this is a problem.

2 Different presets might also have separate calibration settings for the same listening position, depending on how you’re using your system. These presets

can be set in Automatically setting up for surround sound (MCACC & Full Band Phase Control) on page 12 or Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 44, either

of which you should have already completed.

3 • These settings have no effect when headphones are connected.

• You can also press / to select the MCACC preset.

SOURCE

TV RCV

VOL

VOLCH

SOURCE

TV RCV

CLR

A.ATT GENRE

HDMI OUT

D.ACCESS

ENTER

MCACC CLASS

MCACC

4 • This receiver can only play back Dolby Digital, PCM (32 kHz to 192 kHz), DTS (including DTS 96 kHz / 24 bit) and WMA9 Pro digital signal formats. The

compatible signals via the HDMI and i.LINK terminals are: Dolby Digital, DTS, WMA 9 Pro, PCM (32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 88.2 kHz and 96 kHz sampling

frequencies), Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, DTS-EXPRESS, DTS-HD Master Audio, SACD and DVD Audio (including 192 kHz). With other digital signal

formats, set to ANALOG (the MULTI CH IN, TUNER and PHONO).

• You may get digital noise when a LD or CD player compatible with DTS is playing an analog signal. To prevent noise, make the proper digital connections

(page 26) and set the signal input to DIGITAL.

• Some DVD players don’t output DTS signals. For more details, refer to the instruction manual supplied with your DVD player.

• Even when i.LINK is selected and the i.LINK indicator lights, you won’t hear any sound if the ouput settings of your i.LINK device are off.

• The input signal for unassigned i.LINK-equipped components is fixed to . See Checking the i.LINK inputs on page 66.

5 Make sure you connect your DVD/LD or LD players using the RF IN jack. If your player has a 2 RF output this will ensure you can use all LDs. Refer to

Connecting your TV and DVD player on page 21.

6 When the HDMI option in Setting the Audio options on page 106 is set to THROUGH, the sound will be heard through your TV, not from this receiver.

7 • This is useful if you find there is a slight delay before AUTO recognizes the PCM signal on a CD, for instance.

• When PCM is selected, noise may be output during playback of non-PCM sources. Please select another input signal if this is a problem.

SOURCE

TV RCV

VOL

VOLCH

SOURCE

TV RCV

STEREO

SIGNAL SEL SLEEP AUDIO

iPod CTRL

DIMMER

SR+ SBch PHASE

A ATT GENRE

HDMI OUT

DISP

DIRECT

STANDARD ADV.SURR

SIGNAL SEL

SC_09TX.book Page 39 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Listening to your system

Using surround back channel

processing

•Default setting: SBch ON

You can have the receiver automatically use 6.1 or 7.1

decoding for 6.1 encoded sources (for example, Dolby

Digital EX or DTS-ES), or you can choose to always use

6.1 or 7.1 decoding (for example, with 5.1 encoded

material). With 5.1 encoded sources, a surround back

channel will be generated, but the material may sound

better in the 5.1 format for which it was originally

encoded (in which case, you can simply switch surround

back channel processing off).

The table below indicates when you will hear the

surround back channel when playing various kinds of

sources (

=Sound plays through surround back

speaker(s)).

1 Set the operation selector switch to

RCV

2 Press

SBch

repeatedly to cycle the surround back

channel options.

Each press cycles through the options as follows:

• SBch ON – 6.1 or 7.1 decoding is always used (for

example, a surround back channel will be generated

for 5.1 encoded material)

• SBch AUTO – Automatically switches to 6.1 or 7.1

decoding for 6.1 encoded sources (for example,

Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES)

• SBch OFF – No sound is output from the surround

back speakers

Using the Virtual Surround Back mode

When you’re not using surround back speakers,

selecting this mode allows you to hear a virtual surround

back channel through your surround speakers. You can

choose to listen to sources with no surround back

channel information, or if the material sounds better in

the format (for example, 5.1) for which it was originally

encoded, you can have the receiver only apply this effect

to 6.1 encoded sources like Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES.

The table indicates when you will hear the virtual

surround back channel (

=Virtual surround back

channel is active).

• Press

SBch

repeatedly to cycle the virtual surround

back channel options.

Each press cycles through the options as follows:

• VirtualSB ON – Virtual Surround Back is always used

(for example, on 5.1 encoded material)

• VirtualSB AUTO – Virtual Surround Back is

automatically applied to 6.1 encoded sources (for

example, Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES)

• VirtualSB OFF – Virtual Surround Back mode is

switched off

Note

1 By using a combination of surround back channel processing selection with speaker system selection it is possible to switch between a speaker

configuration for high sound quality multi-channel music sources (DVD Audio discs, SACDs, etc.) and the speaker configuration recommended by THX for

viewing movies. For details, see Switching the speaker system according to the playback environment (Application Manual) on page 69.

SOURCE

TV RCV

VOL

VOLCH

SOURCE

TV RCV

SIGNAL SEL SLEEP AUDIO

iPod CTRL

DIMMER

SR+ SBch PHASE

A.ATT GENRE

HDMI OUT

D ACCESS

MCACC CLASS

DISP

SBch

2 • You can’t use the Virtual Surround Back mode when the headphones are connected to this receiver or when any of the THX, stereo, Front Stage

Surround Advance or Stream Direct mode is selected.

• You can only use the Virtual Surround Back mode if the surround speakers are on and the Surr Back setting is set to NO in the Speaker Setting on

page 56 or All Ch Bi-Amp is selected in the Speaker output setting on page 47.

• The Virtual Surround Back mode cannot be applied to sources that do not have surround channel information.

Type of source

SBch

Processing /

Virtual SB

mode

Standard / THX

Advanced

surround

Multichannel

sources

Stereo sources

Pro Logic IIx

2 Pro Logic Neo:6

Dolby Digital EX/DTS-ES 5.1 ch sources

with 6.1 ch flagged

ON 

AUTO 

Dolby Digital/DTS and DVD-Audio 5.1 ch

sources

ON 

AUTO



Dolby Digital/DTS/PCM and DVD-Audio

stereo sources

ON 





AUTO





Analog 2-channel (stereo) sources ON 





AUTO





DTS-HD Master Audio/DTS-HD/Dolby

Digital Plus/Dolby TrueHD/WMA9 Pro

encoded and

PCM 6.1 ch/7.1 ch sources

ON 



AUTO 



SC_09TX.book Page 40 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Listening to your system

Using the genre synchronizing function

This feature automatically selects the most appropriate

Advanced Surround mode for the source currently being

played back on a Pioneer DVD recorder supporting HDMI

Control connected to this receiver via HDMI.

For details

on HDMI Control, see About HDMI on page 20.

1 Set the operation selector switch to

RCV

2Press

GENRE

while the source assigned to a genre

is being played back.

The most appropriate Advanced Surround mode for the

source being played back is automatically selected.

Dolby Digital Plus/Dolby TrueHD/WMA9

Pro (44.1 kHz/48 kHz) encoded and PCM

5.1 ch sources

ON 



AUTO



DTS-HD Master Audio/DTS-HD/

DTS-EXPRESS/WMA9 Pro (88.2 kHz/96

kHz) encoded 5.1 ch sources



AUTO



Dolby Digital Plus/Dolby TrueHD/WMA9

Pro (44.1 kHz/48 kHz) encoded stereo

sources

ON 



AUTO



DTS-HD Master Audio/DTS-HD/

DTS-EXPRESS/WMA9 Pro (88.2 kHz/96

kHz) encoded stereo sources

AUTO

a. Only applicable when using the Virtual Surround Back mode.

b.Not applicable when using the Virtual Surround Back mode.

c. Sound is output from the surround back speakers only when THX Ultra2 CINEMA, THX MUSIC or THX GAMES is selected.

d.Advanced surround mode may not be available depending on the input signal.

Type of source

SBch

Processing /

Virtual SB

mode

Standard / THX

Advanced

surround

Multichannel

sources

Stereo sources

Pro Logic IIx

2 Pro Logic Neo:6

Note

1 • This feature is available only when the source being played back is assigned to a genre. When the source has no genre assigned to, NO GENRE appears

showing that this feature is not available.

• Make sure that HDMI Control is set to ON. When OFF is selected, CANNOT SELECT appears showing that this feature is not available (see About HDMI

on page 20).

SOURCE

TV RCV

VOL

VOLCH

SOURCE

TV RCV

iPod CTRL

SR+

CLR

SBch PHASE

A.ATT GENRE

HDMI OUT

D.ACCESS

ENTER

MCACC CLASS

DISP

GENRE

SC_09TX.book Page 41 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Using the tuner

Chapter 6:

Using the tuner

Listening to the radio

The following steps show you how to tune in to FM and

AM radio broadcasts using the automatic (search) and

manual (step) tuning functions. If you already know the

frequency of the station you want, see Tuning directly to a

station below. Once you are tuned to a station you can

memorize the frequency for recall later—see Saving

station presets on page 43 for more on how to do this.

1 Press the

TUNER

button to select the tuner.

2Use the

BAND

button to change the band (FM or

AM), if necessary.

Each press switches the band between FM and AM.

3 Tune to a station.

There are three ways to do this:

Automatic tuning

To search for stations in the currently selected band,

press and hold TUNE / for about a second. The

receiver will start searching for the next station,

stopping when it has found one. Repeat to search for

other stations.

Manual tuning

To change the frequency one step at a time, press

TUNE /.

High speed tuning

Press and hold TUNE / for high speed tuning.

Release the button at the frequency you want.

Improving FM stereo sound

If the TUNED or STEREO indicators don’t light when

tuning to an FM station because the signal is weak, press

the MPX button to switch the receiver into mono

reception mode. This should improve the sound quality

and allow you to enjoy the broadcast.

Using the noise cut mode

The four noise cut modes can be used when receiving

AM broadcasts. Press the MPX button to select the noise

cut mode (1 to 4).

Using Neural THX

This feature uses Neural Surround™, THX

technologies

to achieve optimal surround sound from FM radio.

• While listening to FM radio, press AUTO/DIRECT for

Neural THX listening.

See About Neural - THX Surround on page 136 for more on

this.

The Neural THX mode can be selected also with the

STANDARD button.

Tuning directly to a station

Sometimes, you’ll already know the frequency of the

station you want to listen to. In this case, you can simply

enter the frequency directly using the number buttons on

the remote control.

1 Press the

TUNER

button to select the tuner.

2Use the

BAND

button to change the band (FM or

AM), if necessary.

Each press switches the band between FM and AM.

3 Press

D.ACCESS

(Direct Access).

4 Use the number buttons to enter the frequency of

the radio station.

For example, to tune to 106.00 (FM), press 1, 0, 6, 0, 0.

If you make a mistake halfway through, press D.ACCESS

twice to cancel the frequency and start over.

DVD

RECEIVER SOURCE

MAIN

MULTI

OPERATION

ZONE2 3

DVR1

GALLERY

HOME MEDIA

INPUT SELECT

TUNER

iP od HDMI

PHONO

CD-R

DVR2

VIDEO1 VIDEO2

BD TV SAT

SACD

XM SIRIUS

TUNER

AUDIO

PARAMETER

TOP MENU

BAND

CATEGORY

STATUS

THX MPX MEMORY

CH LEVEL

T.EDIT

VIDEO

PARAMETER

RETURN

SETUP

TUNE

ST ST

STEREO/

F.S.SURR

AUTO/

DIRECT

STANDARD ADV SURR

Enter

TUNE

ENTER

BAND

MPX

SIGNAL SEL SLEEP AUDIO

iPod CTRL

DIMMER

SR+

CLR

SBch PHASE

A.ATT GENRE

HDMI OUT

D.ACCESS

ENTER

MCACC CLASS

DISP

D.ACCESS

SC_09TX.book Page 42 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Using the tuner

Saving station presets

If you often listen to a particular radio station, it’s

convenient to have the receiver store the frequency for

easy recall whenever you want to listen to that station.

This saves the effort of manually tuning in each time. This

receiver can memorize up to 30 stations, stored in three

banks, or classes (A, B and C) of 10 stations each. When

saving an FM frequency, the MPX setting (see page 42) is

also stored.

1 Tune to a station you want to memorize.

See Listening to the radio on page 42 for more on this.

2Press

T.EDIT

(

TUNER EDIT

The display shows STATION MEMORY, then a blinking

memory class.

3Press

CLASS

to select one of the three classes, then

press

/

to select the station preset you want.

You can also use the number buttons to select a station

preset.

4Press

ENTER

After pressing ENTER, the preset class and number stop

blinking and the receiver stores the station.

Naming station presets

For easier identification, you can name your station

presets.

1 Choose the station preset you want to name.

See Listening to station presets below for how to do this.

2Press

T.EDIT

(

TUNER EDIT

The display shows STATION NAME, then a blinking

cursor at the first character position.

3 Input the name you want.

Choose from the following characters for a name up to

four characters long.

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ

abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz

0123456789

!”#$%&’()

∗+,–./:;<=>?@[ \ ]^_{|} ˜ [space]

Use / to select a character, / to set the position,

and ENTER to confirm your selection.

Tip

• To erase a station name, simply repeat steps 1 to 3

and input four spaces instead of a name.

• Once you have named a station preset, you can press

DISP when listening to a station to switch the display

between name and frequency.

Listening to station presets

You will need to have some presets stored to do this. See

Saving station presets above if you haven’t done this

already.

1Press

TUNER

to select the tuner.

2Press

CLASS

to select the class in which the station

is stored.

Press repeatedly to cycle through classes A, B and C.

3Press

/

to select the station preset you

want.

• You can also use the number buttons on the remote

control to recall the station preset.

DVD

RECEIVER SOURCE

MAIN

MULTI

OPERATION

ZONE2 3

DVR1

GALLERY

HOME MEDIA

INPUT SELECT

TUNER

iP od HDMI

PHONO

CD-R

DVR2

VIDEO1 VIDEO2

BD TV SAT

SACD

XM SIRIUS

TUNER

AUDIO

PARAMETER

TOP MENU

BAND

CATEGORY

STATUS

THX MPX MEMORY

CH LEVEL

T.EDIT

VIDEO

PARAMETER

RETURN

SETUP

TUNE

ST ST

STEREO/

F.S.SURR

AUTO/

DIRECT

STANDARD ADV SURR

Enter

ENTER

MPX

ST ST

T.EDIT

SURR

SIGNAL SEL SLEEP AUDIO

iPod CTRL

DIMMER

SR+

CLR

SBch PHASE

A.ATT GENRE

HDMI OUT

D.ACCESS

ENTER

MCACC CLASS

DISP

DIRECT

STANDARD ADV

SURR

ENTER

CLASS

DISP

SC_09TX.book Page 43 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

The System Setup menu

Chapter 7:

The System Setup menu

Making receiver settings from the

System Setup menu

The following section shows you how to make detailed

settings to specify how you’re using the receiver (for

example, if you want to set up two speaker systems in

separate rooms), and also explains how to fine-tune

individual speaker system settings to your liking.

1 Switch on the receiver and your TV.

Use the RECEIVER button to switch on.

• If headphones are connected to the receiver,

disconnect them.

2 Set the operation selector switch to

RCV

, then press

the

SETUP

button.

An on-screen display (OSD) appears on your TV. Use the

/// buttons and ENTER to navigate through the

screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to

confirm and exit the current menu.

• Press SETUP at any time to exit the System Setup

menu.

3 Select the setting you want to adjust.

• Auto MCACC – See Automatically setting up for

surround sound (MCACC & Full Band Phase Control)

on page 12 for a quick and effective automatic

surround setup. See Automatic MCACC (Expert)

below for a more detailed setup.

• Output Setup – Specifies how you are using your

speaker terminals (see Speaker output setting on

page 47).

• Manual MCACC – Fine-tunes your speaker settings

and customize the Acoustic Calibration EQ (see

Manual MCACC setup on page 48).

• FULL BAND PHASE CTRL – Calibrates and

automatically corrects the frequency-phase

characteristics of the speakers connected (see Full

Band Phase Control on page 53).

• Data Management – Checks your MCACC presets

and manages them through copying, renaming or

deleting (see Data Management on page 54).

• Manual SP Setup – Specifies the size, number,

distance and overall balance of the speakers you’ve

connected (see Manual speaker setup on page 56).

• Input Setup – Specifies what you’ve connected to

the digital, HDMI, component video and S-Video

inputs (see The Input Setup menu on page 101).

• OSD Language – The OSD’s display language can

be changed (see Changing the OSD display language

(OSD Language) on page 102).

• Other Setup – Makes customized settings to reflect

how you are using the receiver (see The Other Setup

menu on page 103).

Automatic MCACC (Expert)

If your setup requires more detailed settings than those

provided in Automatically setting up for surround sound

(MCACC & Full Band Phase Control) on page 12, you can

customize your setup options below. You can calibrate

your system differently for up to six different MCACC

presets

, which are useful if you have different listening

positions depending on the type of source (for example,

watching movies from a sofa, or playing a video game

close to the TV).

Note

1 Make sure not to switch off the power when using the System Setup menu.

2 • Note that when editing items in the Manual MCACC menu, you will need to first specify the MCACC preset you want to adjust by pressing MCACC

before pressing SETUP

• You can’t use the System Setup menu when the iPod, HOME MEDIA GALLERY, XM or SIRIUS Radio input source is selected (in either the main or sub

zone). When you set ZONE 2, ZONE 3 or ZONE 2&3 to ON (page 74), you can’t use the System Setup menu.

DVD

RECEIVER SOURCE

MAIN

MULTI

OPERATION

ZONE2 3

DVR1

GALLERY

HOME MEDIA

INPUT SELECT

TUNER

iP od HDMI

PHONO

CD-R

DVR2

VIDEO1 VIDEO2

BD TV SAT

SACD

XM SIRIUS

RECEIVER

AUDIO

PARAMETER

TOP MENU

BAND

CATEGORY

STATUS CH LEVEL

T.EDIT

VIDEO

PARAMETER

SETUP

SOURCE

TV RCV

INPUT MUTE

TUNE

ST ST

MUTE

VOL

TV CONTROL

Enter

SOURCE

TV RCV

SETUP

RETURN

SETUP

ENTER

1. Auto MCACC

2. Output Setup

3. Manual MCACC

4. FULL BAND PHASE CTRL

5. Data Management

6. Manual SP Setup

7. Input Setup

8. OSD Language

9. Other Setup

:Exit

System Setup MENU

DVD/LD

55.0

3 These are stored in memory and referred to as MEMORY1 to MEMORY6 until you rename them in Data Management on page 54.

4 You may also want to have separate calibration settings for the same listening position, depending on how you’re using your system.

SC_09TX.book Page 44 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

The System Setup menu

Important

• Make sure the microphone/speakers are not moved

during the Auto MCACC Setup.

• Using the Auto MCACC Setup will overwrite any

existing settings for the MCACC preset you select.

• The screen saver will automatically appear after three

minutes of inactivity.

Caution

• The test tones used in the Auto MCACC Setup are

output at high volume.

1 Select ‘

Auto MCACC

’ from the System Setup menu,

then press

ENTER

If the System Setup screen is not displayed, refer to

Making receiver settings from the System Setup menu

above.

2 Make sure ‘

Normal

’ is selected,

select an MCACC

preset

, then select

START

For a fully customized Auto MCACC setup, select

CUSTOM and set the following parameters using /:

• Custom Menu – The default is ALL (recommended),

but you can limit the system calibration to only one

setting (to save time) if you want.

The available

options are ALL, Keep SP System,

Speaker

Setting, Channel Level, Speaker Distance and EQ

Pro. & S-Wave.

• EQ Type (only available when the Custom Menu

above is EQ Pro. & S-Wave) – This determines how

the frequency balance is adjusted.

After a single calibration is performed, each of the

following three correction curves can be stored

separately in the MCACC memory. SYMMETRY (default)

implements symmetric correction for each pair of left

and right speakers to flatten the frequency-amplitude

characteristics. ALL CH ADJUST is a ‘flat’ setting where

all the speakers are set individually so no special

weighting is given to any one channel. FRONT ALIGN

sets all speakers in accordance with the front speaker

settings (no equalization is applied to the front left and

right channels).

• THX Speaker (only available when the Custom Menu

above is ALL or Speaker Setting) – Select YES if you

are using THX speakers (set all speakers to SMALL),

otherwise leave it set to NO.

• Stand.Wave Multi-Point (only available when the

Custom Menu above is EQ Pro. & S-Wave) – In

addition to measurements at the listening position,

you can use two more reference points for which test

tones will be analyzed for standing waves. This is

useful if you want to get a balanced ‘flat’ calibration

for several seating positions in your listening area.

Place the microphone at the reference point

indicated on-screen and note the last microphone

placement will be at your main listening position:

When you’re finished settings the options, press

RETURN to go back to the Auto MCACC main setup.

Note

1 Except in cases where you are only adjusting one parameter (i.e. channel level) from the CUSTOM setup screen (step 2).

2 If you are planning to select any options other than Normal, read through Speaker output setting on page 47 and make sure to connect your speakers as

necessary before continuing to step 3.

3 The six MCACC presets are used for storing surround sound settings for different listening positions. Simply choose an unused preset for now (you can

rename it later in Data Management on page 54).

4 Note that correction curves are saved only when set to SYMMETRY. Select CUSTOM to save other correction curves (such as ALL CH ADJUST and

FRONT ALIGN).

5 Select DEMO, and then press ENTER to activate the demo mode of Auto MCACC. In the demo mode, no settings are saved and no errors occur. When

the speakers are connected to this receiver, the test tone is output repeatedly. Press RETURN to cancel the test tone.

6• The EQ Pro. & S-Wave measurement is also taken when ALL is selected. See Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional on page 51 for more on this.

• Either effect of Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional and Standing Wave can be switched on and off in the respective MCACC preset. For details, see

Setting the Audio options on page 106.

• The FULL BAND PHASE CTRL measurement is also taken when ALL is selected. See Full Band Phase Control on page 53.

7The Keep SP System option allows you to calibrate your system while leaving your current speaker setting (page 56) unchanged.

1. Auto MCACC

2. Output Setup

3. Manual MCACC

4. FULL BAND PHASE CTRL

5. Data Management

6. Manual SP Setup

7. Input Setup

8. OSD Language

9. Other Setup

:Exit

System Setup MENU

DVD/LD

55.0

1. Auto MCACC

DVD/LD

55.0

Output Setup

[ Normal ]

Save SYMMETRY to

[ M1. MEMORY 1 ]

START

ENTER:Start :Cancel

Output Setup

[ Normal (default) ]

Save SYMMETRY to

[ M1. MEMORY 1 ]

CUSTOM

: Cancel

1. Auto MCACC

DVD/LD

ENTER:Next

55.0

1. Auto MCACC

DVD/LD

ENTER:Next

55.0

Custom Menu

ALL

: Return

Speaker Setting

Channel Level

Speaker Distance

EQ Pro. & S-Wave

FULL BAND PHASE CTRL

SYMMETRY

M1.MEMORY 1

ALL CH ADJ

[ M2.MEMORY 2 ]

FRONT ALIGN

[ M3.MEMORY 3 ]

THX Speaker [ NO ]

[ START ]

: Return

1. Auto MCACC

DVD/LD

55.0

8 If you selected ALL as your Custom Menu, you can specify the MCACC preset where you want to save the ALL CH ADJUST and FRONT ALIGN settings.

9 Switch the Multi-Point setting NO if you only use one listening position.

2nd reference

point

3rd reference

point

Main listening

position

SC_09TX.book Page 45 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

The System Setup menu

3 Connect the microphone to the

MCACC SETUP MIC

jack on the front panel.

Make sure there are no obstacles between the speakers

and the microphone.

If you have a tripod, use it to place the microphone so that

it’s about ear level at your normal listening position.

Otherwise, place the microphone at ear level using a

table or a chair.

4 Follow the instructions on-screen.

• Make sure the microphone is connected.

• If you’re using a subwoofer, it is automatically

detected every time you switch on the system. Make

sure it is on and the volume is turned up.

• See Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup on

page 14 for notes regarding high background noise

levels and other possible interference.

5 Wait for the Auto MCACC Setup to finish

outputting test tones.

A progress report is displayed on-screen while the

receiver outputs test tones to determine the speakers

present in your setup. Try to be as quiet as possible while

it’s doing this.

• Do not adjust the volume during the test tones. This

may result in incorrect speaker settings.

• With error messages (such as Too much ambient

noise! or Check Microphone) select RETRY after

checking for ambient noise (see Problems when

using the Auto MCACC Setup on page 14) and

verifying the mic connection. If there doesn’t seem to

be a problem, you can simply select GO NEXT and

continue.

6 If necessary, confirm the speaker configuration in

the OSD.

The configuration shown on-screen should reflect the

actual speakers you have.

If no operations are performed for 10 seconds while the

speaker configuration check screen is being displayed,

the Auto MCACC Setup will resume automatically. In this

case, you don’t need to select ‘OK’ and press ENTER in

step 7.

If you see an error message (ERR) in the right side

column (or the speaker configuration displayed isn’t

correct), there may be a problem with the speaker

connection. If selecting RETRY doesn’t work, turn off the

power and check the speaker connections. If there

doesn’t seem to be a problem, you can simply use /

to select the speaker and / to change the setting

(and number for surround back) and continue.

7 Make sure ‘

’ is selected, then press

ENTER

A progress report is displayed on-screen while the

receiver outputs more test tones to determine the

optimum receiver settings for channel level, speaker

distance, and Acoustic Calibration EQ.

Again, try to be as quiet as possible while this is

happening. It may take 3 to 7 minutes.

• If you selected a Stand.Wave Multi-Point setup (in

step 2), you will be asked to place the mic at the 2nd

and 3rd reference points before finally placing it at

your main listening position.

8 The Auto MCACC Setup has finished! Press

RETURN

to go back to the System Setup menu.

Note

1 This screen is only shown if you selected ALL or Speaker System in Custom Menu from the Auto MCACC CUSTOM menu.

PHONES

SPEAKERS AUTO SURROUND

/STREAM DIRECT

STATUS

LCD

VIEW

DIMMER

TUNER EDITBAND

CTRL

ZONE2 ZONE3

VIDEO/GAME 2 INPUT

DIGITAL INS-VIDEO VIDEO L R

AUDIO

MULTI-ZONE CONTROL

MCACC

SETUP MIC

USB

(TUNE)

PARAMETER

SETUP

(ST) (ST)

AUDIO VIDEO

RETURN

ENTER

MCACC

SETUP MIC

Now Analyzing

…

( 2/10)

Environment Check

Ambient Noise [ OK ]

Microphone [ ]

Speaker YES/NO [ ]

:Cancel

DVD/LD 0.0

1. Auto MCACC

CHECK

Front [ YES ]

Center [ YES ]

Surr A [ YES ]

Surr B [ YES ]

SB [ YESx2 ]

SW [ YESx2 ]

:Cancel

DVD/LD 0.0

1. Auto MCACC

10:Next

Now Analyzing

…

Subwoofer Check

:Cancel

1. Auto MCACC

DVD/LD

0.0

Now Analyzing

…

( 6/10)

Surround Analysis

Speaker System [ OK ]

Channel Level [ OK ]

Speaker Distance [ ]

:Cancel

1. Auto MCACC

DVD/LD

55.0

:Return

5a. MCACC Data Check

DVD/LD

55.0

1. Speaker Setting

2. Channel Level

3. Speaker Distance

4. Standing Wave

5. Acoustic Cal EQ

6. FULL BAND PHASE CTRL

ENTER:Next

SC_09TX.book Page 46 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

The System Setup menu

The settings made in the Auto MCACC Setup should give

you excellent surround sound from your system, but it is

also possible to adjust these settings manually using the

System Setup menu (starting on page 44).

You can also choose to view the settings by selecting

individual parameters from the MCACC Data Check

screen:

• Speaker Setting – The size and number of speakers

you’ve connected (see page 56 for more on this)

• Channel Level – The overall balance of your speaker

system (see page 48 or 57 for more on this)

• Speaker Distance – The distance of your speakers

from the listening position (see page 49 or 58 for

Category

Preset number

Channel number

Composer name

Song name

Channel name

–55.0dB

Decades A1

Fifties (50's) SR005

Chuck Berry

Johnny B. Goode

[

007 Seventies(70's)

]

[

006 Sixties(60's)

]

[

005 Fifties(50's)

]

[

004 Hank's Place

]

[

003 America

]

[

002 Highway1

]

[

001 Sirius Hits

]

[

000 Sirius ID

]

ENTER Previous

Exit

–55.0dB

Channel Guide

SC_09TX.book Page 64 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Other connections

Tip

• You can select channels directly by pressing

D.ACCESS, then the three-digit channel number.

• The currently selected channel is automatically

chosen (without pressing ENTER) after 10 seconds.

Saving channel presets

This receiver can memorize up to 30 channels, stored in

three banks, or classes (A, B and C) of 10 channels each.

1 Select the channel you want to memorize.

See Selecting channels and browsing by genre above.

2 Set the operation selector switch to

SOURCE

, then

press

T.EDIT

The display shows a blinking memory class.

3Press

CLASS

to select one of the three classes, then

press

/

to select the channel preset you want.

You can also use the number buttons to select a preset.

4Press

ENTER

After pressing ENTER, the preset class and number stop

blinking and the receiver stores the SIRIUS channel.

Tip

•You can also press MEMORY during reception

display to save the information of up to five songs.

See Using the SIRIUS Menu below to recall this

information.

Listening to channel presets

You will need to have some presets stored to do this.

1 Set the operation selector switch to

SOURCE

, then

press

CLASS

to select the class in which the channel is

stored.

Press repeatedly to cycle through classes A, B and C.

2Press

/

to select the channel preset you want.

• You can also use the number buttons on the remote

control to recall the channel preset.

Using the SIRIUS Menu

The SIRIUS Menu provides additional SIRIUS Radio

features.

1 Set the operation selector switch to

SOURCE

, then

press

TOP MENU

2Use

/

to select a menu item, then press

ENTER

Choose from the following menu items:

• Channel Skip/Add – Use / and ENTER to select

channels you would like to remove/restore from/to

the channel guide.

• Parental Lock – Use / and ENTER to select

channels you would like to place under parental lock.

Channels put under parental lock are not displayed in

the Channel Guide, but may be accessed by directly

inputting their channel number and providing the

parental lock password.

• Antenna Aiming – Check the strength of satellite

and terrestrial reception.

• Memory Recall – Use / to browse your saved

song information (see Tip above).

• Password Set – Set the parental lock password.

3 When you’re finished press

TOP MENU

to return to

the reception display.

Using the i.LINK interface

If you have a component with an i.LINK connector, you

can connect it to this receiver using an i.LINK cable.

Since the i.LINK interface does not transmit video

signals, the video signal of i.LINK-connected

components must be connected with other cables (see

Connecting your equipment on page 17 for more on

making video connections). If you’ve already hooked up

the video signal from the component, assign the i.LINK

input to the input function to which you’ve connected the

video signals (see The Input Setup menu on page 101).

See Checking the i.LINK inputs on page 66 to confirm

your i.LINK settings.

The two i.LINK connectors on the rear of your receiver are

4-pin connectors. Use a 4-pin, S400 i.LINK cable to

connect i.LINK-equipped components.

Caution

• If your i.LINK connector comes into contact with

metallic parts of the receiver other than the i.LINK

terminal, an electrical short may occur. Some cables

have metal parts that may touch the unit when

connected. Please take care to use a suitable i.LINK

cable only.

Important

• Please use 4-pin, S400 cables less than 3.5 meters

long. Although longer ones are available, they may

not work reliably.

• There may be cases where the PQLS/rate control

function and/or the i.LINK audio does not work

properly even when connected to i.LINK Audio-

compatible equipment.

• Do not connect/disconnect i.LINK cables or switch

on/off any components connected using i.LINK when

the receiver is on.

Note

1 You can reset the Channel presets, Memory, Channel Skip/Add, Parental Lock and Password settings in Resetting the system on page 111.

SC_09TX.book Page 65 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Other connections

1 Use an i.LINK cable to connect one of the i.LINK

connectors on this receiver to an i.LINK connector on

your i.LINK component.

• The arrow on the cable connector body should be

lined up with the arrow (to the left of the connector)

on the receiver for correct alignment. The i.LINK

cable should be inserted straight into the connector

so that it snaps easily into place. If not connected

properly the receiver will not be able to recognize any

connected components. Note that the i.LINK cable is

fragile and can be broken easily if too much force is

used when connecting.

2 Assign the i.LINK component to the input you want,

then make any necessary output settings on the

component.

See The Input Setup menu on page 101 to assign the

component to an input function on this receiver. Follow

the operating instructions that came with the component

to make any necessary output settings.

• You can connect several components together using

i.LINK. See Creating an i.LINK network below.

Checking the i.LINK inputs

If you have several i.LINK-equipped components and

have assigned them to input functions in The Input Setup

menu on page 101, you can confirm the settings you

made below.

1 Select ‘

i.LINK Check

’ from the Other Setup menu

and press

ENTER

See The Other Setup menu on page 103 for more on

navigating this menu screen.

• If no i.LINK-equipped components are connected

i.LINK Check cannot be selected.

2 Scroll through the list to confirm your settings.

When a number of i.LINK-equipped components are

connected to your receiver, the i.LINK-equipped

component you are looking for might be listed on

additional display screens.

• i.LINK is displayed after unassigned device names

(e.g. DV-79AVi [i.LINK]).

• If a connected devices cannot output (playback) a

source using the i.LINK connection, [- - - -] is

displayed after the input device name (e.g. DV-79AVi

[- - - -]). Non-compatible devices cannot be assigned

to inputs.

• When the cables for an assigned input device

become loose or the power is cut to the device, an

asterisk (*) appears before the device name (e.g.

*DV-79AVi [CD]).

3 When you’re finished, press

RETURN

You will return to the Other Setup menu.

About i.LINK

i.LINK is a trademark name for IEEE1394, a high-speed

interface for digital audio, video and other data found on

personal computers, digital camcorders, and other kinds

of audio and audio/visual equipment. A single i.LINK

connector can both send and receive data at the same

time, so only one cable is required to connect

components for two-way communication.

“i.LINK” and the “i.LINK” logo are trademarks of Sony

Corporation.

S400S400

(AUDIO)

(

For LD

)

ASSIGNABLE

LAN (10/100)

SUB

WOOFER

FRONT

CENTER

EXTRA

SUR-

ROUND

(

Single

)

SURROUND

BACK

PRE OUT

SIRIUS

iPod

LOOP

ANTENNA

HDMI

RF IN

(TV)

(SAT)

(DVR/

VCR 1)

(DVR/

VCR 2)

(VIDEO/

GAME

(CD-R/

TAPE/

MD)

(

DVD/LD

)

(

)

(

)

(SA

)

COAXIAL

1 4

ASSIGNABLE

OPTICAL

1 6

ZONE2

OUT

SOURCE

OUT

ZONE3

/SOURCE

OUT

S400

(AUDIO)

S400

SC-09TX

i.LINK-equipped component

:Return

9. Other Setup

DVD/LD

55.0

a. Multi Ch In Setup

b. ZONE Video Setup

c. ZONE Audio Setup

d. SR+ Setup

e. HDMI Control Setup

f. i.LINK Check

g. Display Image

:Return

9f. i.LINK Check (1/2)

DVD/LD

55.0

* DV-868AVi 1 : TV

1 DV-868AVi 2 : DVD

2 DV-S858Ai 1 : DVR 1

3 DV-S858Ai 2 : i.LINK

4 DV-757Ai : i.LINK

5 RECEIVER-1 : ––––

SC_09TX.book Page 66 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Other connections

About PQLS rate control

Pioneer’s PQLS (Precision Quartz Lock System)

technology provides high-precision digital audio from

DVD-A, SACD and audio CD sources when you use the

i.LINK interface. A precision quartz controller in this

receiver eliminates distortion caused by timing errors

(jitter), giving you the best possible digital-to-analog

conversion from the digital source.

To take advantage of PQLS, you must have a player

compatible with rate-control, and it must be switched on

and connected to this receiver through the i.LINK

network.

Creating an i.LINK network

Using i.LINK it is possible to chain up to 17 components

together so that the digital audio and control signals from

each component is available to other components in the

network. With the addition of an i.LINK repeater, it’s

possible to connect up to 63 components.

i.LINK connectors come in 4-pin and 6-pin

configurations. This receiver uses the 4-pin connection,

but the two types can be mixed on a network.

This receiver is compatible with i.LINK Audio (A&M

protocol) components, such as DVD players. Note that

when connected to i.LINK MPEG-II TS equipment (such

as a digital satellite tuner), i.LINK DV equipment (such as

a DVD recorder or DV camcorder), or an i.LINK-equipped

personal computer, audio and video signals are not

transmitted, and connecting to these devices sometimes

causes network interruptions. Check the operating

instructions supplied with your other i.LINK components

for compatibility information.

This receiver is DTCP (Digital Transmission Content

Protection) compliant, so you can play DVD-A, DVD-

Video, and SACD i.LINK audio.

When setting up an i.LINK network, it’s important that

the components form an open ended chain (fig. 1), or a

tree (fig. 2).

The system will not work if the connected components

form a loop. If a loop is detected, the message LOOP

CONNECT shows in the display. Figs. 3 and 4 show

connections that form a loop.

Another consideration when connecting i.LINK devices

is the speed of the interface. At present there are three

speeds; S100 (slowest), S200 and S400 (fastest). This

receiver uses the S400 type. Although you can use

components with different speeds together, we

recommend connecting slower-speed components at

the edge of the network if possible (shown by the shaded

boxes in figs. 1 and 2). This will keep the network free of

bottlenecks.

When used within an i.LINK network, this receiver must

be on for the i.LINK connection to be maintained. Other

components in the network may or may not maintain the

connection in standby (none will when the power is

completely off)—check the operating instructions

supplied with individual components. Note that the audio

may be momentarily interrupted if a component in the

i.LINK network is switched on/off, or its i.LINK

connection is switched on/off.

This product complies with the following i.LINK interface

specifications:

1) IEEE Std. 1394a-2000, Standard for a High Performance

Serial Bus

2) Audio and Music Data Transmission Protocol 2.0

Following the standard for AM824 sequence adaptation

layers, the product is compatible with IEC60958 bitstream,

DVD-A and SACD.

Connecting the multichannel analog

inputs

For DVD Audio and SACD playback, your DVD player may

have 5.1, 6.1 or 7.1 channel analog outputs (depending

on whether your player supports surround back

channels).

Make sure that the player is set to output

multichannel analog audio.

fig. 1

i.LINK cable

fig. 2

Note

1 To listen to multichannel analog audio you’ll need to switch the input signal selector to MULTI CH IN (see Selecting the multichannel analog inputs above

for more on this).

fig. 3

i.LINK cable

fig. 4

SC_09TX.book Page 67 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Other connections

1 Connect the front, surround, center and subwoofer

outputs on your DVD player to the corresponding

MULTI CH IN

jack on this receiver.

• Use standard RCA/phono jack cables for the

connections.

2 If your DVD player also has outputs for surround

back channels, connect these to the corresponding

MULTI CH IN

jacks on this receiver.

• Use standard RCA/phono jack cables for the

connections.

• If there is a single surround back output, connect it to

the SURROUND BACK L (Single) jack on this

receiver.

Selecting the multichannel analog inputs

If you have connected a decoder or a DVD player as

above, you must select the analog multichannel inputs

for surround sound playback.

With MULTI CH IN inputs, it is possible to switch the

number of channels of the input signal according to the

connected components. For example, when only two

channels of audio signals are being input to the MULTI

CH IN terminals, switch the number of playback

channels to 2 ch using the SIGNAL SEL button.

1 Make sure you have set the playback source to the

proper output setting.

For example, you might need to set your DVD player to

output multichannel analog audio.

2Use the

INPUT SELECT

button to select

MULTI CH

You can also use the INPUT SELECTOR dial on the front

panel.

3 Set the operation selector switch to

RCV

4 Press the

SIGNAL SEL

button repeatedly to select

the number of channels of the input signal you want to

play.

The mode switches as shown below each time the button

is pressed.

• Depending on the DVD player you’re using, the

analog output level of the subwoofer channel may be

too low. In this case, the output level of the subwoofer

can be increased by 10 dB in the Multi Ch In Setup in

Other Setup. For details, see Multi Channel Input

Setup on page 103.

Switching the speaker system

When the A/B speaker system is switched, the speakers

being played switches. Select the speaker system to be

used as necessary.

•Use the

SPEAKERS

terminals button on the front

panel to select a speaker system setting.

The modes that can be selected differ according to the

speaker output setting (see page 47).

The mode switches as shown below each time the button

is pressed.

When set to Normal

When set to All CH Bi-Amp

When set to Front Bi-Amp

When set to 7.2ch + ZONE 2

When set to 7.2ch + Speaker B

Note

1 • When playback from the multichannel inputs is selected, only the volume and channel levels can be set.

• You can’t listen to your speaker B system during playback from the multichannel inputs.

• With MULTI CH IN inputs, it is possible to play pictures simultaneously. For details, see Multi Channel Input Setup on page 103.

SOURCE

TV RCV

INPUT SELECT

TUNER

VOL

VOLCH

iP od HDMI

PHONO

XM SIRIUS

INPUT SELECT

SOURCE

TV RCV

THX MPX MEMORY

STEREO

SIGNAL SEL SLEEP AUDIO

PHOTO

DIMMER

SR+ SBch PHASE

A.ATT GENRE

HDMI OUT

D.ACCESS

MCACC CLASS

DISP

AUTO/

DIRECT

STANDARD ADV.SURR

2 ch 6 ch

8 ch 7 ch

OFF A ON

A+B

B ON

ON OFF

OFF

A ON

A+B

B ON

PHONES

SPEAKERS AUTO SURROUND

/STREAM DIRECT

STATUS

LCD

VIEW

DIMMERTUNER EDITBAND

CTRL

ZONE2 ZONE3

VIDEO/GAME 2 INPUT

DIGITAL INS-VIDEO VIDEO L R

AUDIO

MULTI-ZONE CONTROL

MCACC

SETUP MIC

USB

(TUNE)

PARAMETER

SETUP

(ST) (ST)

AUDIO VIDEO

RETURN

ENTER

SPEAKERS

SC_09TX.book Page 68 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Other connections

When set to Normal

• SP: A+B ON: The surround sound is output from the

speakers connected to both A and B.

• SP: A ON: The surround sound is only output from

the speaker connected to A. It is not output from the

speaker connected to B.

• SP: B ON: The surround sound is only output from the

speaker connected to B. It is not output from the

speaker connected to A.

When set to 7.2ch + Speaker B

• SP: A ON: The sound is output from all the speakers

other than those connected to the L2 and R2 speaker

terminals (surround playback is possible).

• SP: B ON: Only output from speakers connected to

the L2 and R2 speaker terminals. (Only 2-channel

stereo playback possible.)

• SP: A+B ON: The sound of A and B above is output

simultaneously.

When set to All CH Bi-Amp or Front Bi-Amp

• SP: ON: Output from all speakers.

When set to 7.2ch + ZONE 2

• SP: ON: The sound selected for the main zone is

output from the speakers connected to speaker

terminals other than L5 and R5. The sound selected

for ZONE 2 is output from the speakers connected to

the L5 and R5 speaker terminals.

Common to all the above settings

• SP: OFF: No sound is output from the speakers.

Sound is only output from Zone 2 when the speaker

output terminal setting (see page 47) is set to 7.2ch +

ZONE 2. (Sound is always output from the pre-out

terminals, so sound may be output from the

subwoofer.)

Switching the speaker system

according to the playback environment

(Application Manual)

With the receiver, the combination of the speaker system

A/B selection with the surround back channel

processing selection (page 40) can be used to switch

between the speaker configuration for high sound quality

multi-channel music sources (DVD Audio discs, SACDs,

etc.) recommended by the ITU-R and a speaker system

for viewing movies as recommended by THX.

Note that to do so you must make 9.1-channel (or 9.2-

channel) speaker connections and set the speaker

output terminal setting to Normal.

Setting the speaker system for high sound

quality multi-channel music sources (DVD

Audio discs and SACDs)

1 Switch the speaker system.

Select B ON. A is turned off and sound is only produced

from the surround B channel (speaker for listening to

music).

2 Switch the surround back channel.

Select SBch OFF. The above settings allow you to enjoy

high sound quality multi-channel music sources with the

speaker layout recommended by the ITU-R (5.1 or 5.2

channels).

About ITU-R BS.775-1

This configuration is recommended by the ITU-R

(International Telecommunication Union –

Radiocommunication Sector). It is the basic

configuration used in DVD Audio and SACD mixing

studios, though in some cases the sound is recorded

with the assumption that the surround speakers are at

the 135° position.

Setting the speaker system for movie

sources

Note

1 When A ON is selected, the sound of B is not output from the PREOUT terminal. In the same way, when B ON is selected, the sound of A is not output

from the PREOUT terminal. The sound of both A and B is output from the PREOUT terminal when either A+B ON or OFF is selected.

Listening

position

60°

100°

120°

(SL A)

(SR A)

SL B

SR B

(SBL)

(SBR)

Surround

Surround Back

SBL

SBR

Surround

SL A

SR A

(SL B)

(SR B)

SB L

SB R

SC_09TX.book Page 69 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Other connections

Speaker configuration recommended by THX

Set the speakers with the surround back speakers

adjacent to each other and equidistant from the listening

position.

1 Switch the speaker system.

Select A ON. B is turned off and sound is only produced

from the surround A channel (dipole speaker).

2 Switch the surround back channel.

Select SBch ON. The above settings allow you to enjoy

movies with the speaker layout recommended by THX

(7.1 or 7.2 channels).

Bi-amping your speakers

Bi-amping is when you connect the high frequency driver

and low frequency driver of your speakers to different

amplifiers for better crossover performance. Your

speakers must be bi-ampable to do this (having separate

terminals for high and low) and the sound improvement

will depend on the kind of speakers you’re using.

• Connect your speakers as shown below.

This illustration below shows the connections for bi-

amping your front left speaker. Hook up your bi-amp

compatible speakers for other channels in the same way.

• Make sure that the + / – connections are properly

inserted.

Caution

• Most speakers with both High and Low terminals

have two metal plates that connect the High to the

Low terminals. These must be removed when you are

bi-amping the speakers or you could severely

damage the amplifier. See your speaker manual for

more information.

• If your speakers have a removable crossover network,

make sure you do not remove it for bi-amping. Doing

so may damage your speakers.

Bi-wiring your speakers

The reasons for bi-wiring are basically the same as bi-

amping, but additionally, interference effects within the

wire could be reduced, producing better sound. Again, to

do this your speakers must be bi-wireable (that is they

must have separate terminals for the high and low

frequencies).

• To bi-wire a speaker, connect two speaker cords to

the speaker terminal on the receiver.

Using a banana plug for the second connection is

recommended.

Caution

• Make sure you use a parallel (not series, which are

fairly uncommon) connection when bi-wiring your

speakers.

• Don’t connect different speakers from the same

terminal in this way.

FRONT

SUR-

ROUND-A

SUR-

ROUND-B

3 L2 L1

LOW

HIGH LOW

FRONT

High

Low

Bi-amp

compatible

speaker

SC_09TX.book Page 70 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Other connections

Connecting additional amplifiers

This receiver has more than enough power for any home

use, but it’s possible to add additional amplifiers to every

channel of your system using the pre-outs. Make the

connections shown below to add amplifiers to power

your speakers.

• Before making or changing the connections, switch

off the power and disconnect the power cord from the

AC outlet.

• The sound from the PREOUT SURROUND BACK and

PREOUT EXTRA terminals will depend on how you

configured the Speaker output setting on page 47.

Pay attention to this when connecting another power

amplifier, etc.

• You can use the additional amplifier on the surround

back channel pre-outs for a single speaker as well. In

this case plug the amplifier into the left (L (Single))

terminal only.

• To hear sound only from the pre-outs, switch the

speaker system to OFF, or simply disconnect any

speakers that are connected directly to the receiver.

• If you’re not using a subwoofer, change the front

speaker setting (see Speaker Setting on page 56) to

large.

MULTI-ZONE listening

This receiver can power up to three independent systems in separate rooms after you have made the proper MULTI-

ZONE connections. An example MULTI-ZONE setup is shown below, but the number of MULTI-ZONE connections (and

the way you choose to connect them) depends on how you want to set up your system.

CENTER

AUDI

AUDI O

ZONE2

OUT

ZONE3

OUT

SUB

WOOFER

FRONT

CENTER

EXTRA

SUR-

ROUND

(

Single

)

SUB W.

FRONT

CENTER

SUR-

ROUND

SUR-

ROUND

BACK

SURROUND

BACK

PRE OUT

MULTI CH

OUT1

(HDMI CTRL)

OUT2

R5 L5

SURROUND

BACK

(Single)

L4 L

LOW HIGH

CENTER

HIGH

SURROUN

SUB

WOOFER

FRONT

CENTER

SUR-

ROUND

SURROUND

BACK

(

Single

)

INPUT

L R

ANALOG

INPUT

L R

ANALOG

INPUT

L R

ANALOG

INPUT

ANALOG

INPUT

ANALOG

INPUT

ANALOG

Powered

subwoofer 2

Powered

subwoofer 1

Front channel

amplifier

Center channel

amplifier (mono)

Surround channel

amplifier

Surround back

channel amplifier

SC-09TX

Speaker

output setting

Sound output from

the PREOUT

SURROUND BACK

terminals

Sound output from

the PREOUT EXTRA

terminals

Normal Surround back channel

sound

Surround B channel

sound

All CH Bi-Amp None None

Front Bi-Amp Surround back channel

sound

None

7.2ch + ZONE 2 Surround back channel

sound

None

7.2ch +

Speaker B

Surround back channel

sound

Down-mixed 2-channel

sound

S400S400

(AUDIO)

(

For LD

)

ASSIGNABLE

FRONT FRONTCENTER

SUR-

ROUND-A

SUR-

ROUND-A

SUR-

ROUND-B

VIDEOAU DIO

AUDIO

LAN (10/100)

ZONE3

OUT

ZONE2

OUT

ZONE2

OUT

ZONE3

OUT

MONITOR

OUT

CONTROL

COMPONENT

VIDEO

ASSIGN-

ABLE

ASSIGN-

ABLE

VIDEO

OUT

SUB

WOOFER

FRONT

CENTER

EXTRA

SUR-

ROUND

(

Single

)

SUB W.

FRONT

CENTER

SUR-

ROUND

SUR-

ROUND

BACK

SURROUND

BACK

PRE OUT

MULTI CH

SIRIUS

iPod

LOOP

ANTENNA

OUT1

(HDMI CTRL)

OUT2

HDMI

RF IN

(TV)

(SAT)

(DVR/

VCR 1)

(DVR/

VCR 2)

(VIDEO/

GAME

(CD-R/

TAPE/

MD)

(

DVD/LD

)

(

)

(

)

(SA

)

COAXIAL

1 4

ASSIGNABLE

SELECTABLE

R1 R5

SEE

INSTRUCTION

MANUAL

VOIR LE MODE

EMPLOI

SURROUND

BACK

SUR-

ROUND-B

R3 R4 R5 L5

SURROUND

BACK

(Single)

L4 L3 L2 L1

AC IN

SPEAKERS

Normal

LOW HIGH

FRONT

All ch Bi-Amp.

OPTICAL

1 6

ZONE2

OUT

SOURCE

OUT

ZONE3

/SOURCE

OUT

LOW HIGH

SURROUND

LOW HIGH

CENTER

HIGH LOW

SURROUND

HIGH LOW

FRONT

1 2 34

12 V TRIGGER

(

DC OUT 12V TOTAL 250 mA MAX

)

RS-

232C

VIDEO/

GAME 1

SAT

AUX

CD-R/

TAPE /

REC

SEL

OUT

SACD

PHONO

DVD/LD

(DVD/LD)

(VIDEO/

GAME

(BD)

(DVR/VCR 1)

(DVR/VCR 2)

ZONE2

OUT

DVR/

VCR 2

DVR/

VCR 1

REC SEL

OUT

REC SEL

OUT

REC SEL

OUT

REC SEL

OUT

S-VIDEO

BPR

AUDIO

ZONE2

OUT

ZONE3

OUT

ZONE2

OUT

ZONE3

/SOURCE

OUT

ZONE3

OUT

VIDEO

ZONE2

OUT

DIGITAL IN

AUDIO L IN

DIGITAL IN

AUDIO L IN

ZONE3

OUT

ZONE2

OUT

MONITOR

OUT

VIDEO

12 V TRIGGER

(DVR/VCR 2)

ZONE2

OUT

ZONE3

OUT

VIDEO

ZONE2

OUT

VCR

(DVR/

VCR 2)

(VIDEO/

GAME

(CD-R/

TAPE/

MD)

ZONE2

OUT

SOURCE

OUT

ZONE3

/SOURCE

OUT

ZONE2

OUT

ZONE3

/SOURCE

OUT

AUDI O

ZONE2

OUT

ZONE3

OUT

AUDI O

ZONE2

OUT

ZONE3

OUT

Main zone

Sub zone (ZONE 2)

Sub zone (ZONE 3)

SC_09TX.book Page 71 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Other connections

Different sources can be playing in three zones at the

same time or, depending on your needs, the same source

can also be used.

The main and sub zones have

independent power (the main zone power can be off

while one (or both) of the sub zones is on) and the sub

zones can be controlled by the remote or front panel

controls. However, you may need to specify the volume

settings in ZONE Audio Setup on page 104.

Making MULTI-ZONE connections

It is possible to make these connections if you have a

separate TV and speakers for your primary (ZONE 2) sub

zone, and a separate amplifier

(and speakers) for your

secondary (ZONE 3) sub zone. You will also need a

separate amplifier if you selected an option other than

7.2ch+ZONE 2 in the speaker output in Speaker output

setting on page 47 for your primary sub zone. There are

two primary sub zone setups possible with this system.

Choose whichever works best for you.

MULTI-ZONE listening options

The following table shows the signals that can be output

to ZONE 2 and ZONE 3:

Basic MULTI-ZONE setup (

ZONE 2

)

1 Connect a separate amplifier to the

AUDIO ZONE2

OUT

jacks and a TV monitor to the

VIDEO ZONE2 OUT

jacks, both on the rear of this receiver.

You should have a pair of speakers attached to the sub

zone amplifier as shown in the following illustration.

2 Connect a separate amplifier to the

COAXIAL

ZONE2 OUT

digital output on the rear of this receiver.

The amplifier must have an optical digital input to make

this connection. This will allow you to hear the digital

output of a component in a second sub zone.

Note

1 Selecting the HOME MEDIA GALLERY input for Zone 2 or Zone 3 may decrease the quality of the HOME MEDIA GALLERY picture in the main zone.

2 You can’t use sound controls (such as the tone controls or Midnight listening) or any surround modes with a separate amplifier in the sub zone. You can,

however, use the features available with your sub zone amplifier.

Sub Zone Input sources available

ZONE2

Analog audio signals (AUDIO ZONE2 OUT)

and digital audio signal (COAXIAL ZONE2 OUT).

With video signals, the composite video (VIDEO

ZONE2 OUT) and component video

(COMPONENT VIDEO ZONE2 OUT) signals can

be output but the S-video signal cannot be

output.

a.Any analog signal including the iPod signal. (With the MULTI CH IN

input, sound is output only from the front L/R channels.)

ZONE3

Analog audio signals (AUDIO ZONE3 OUT)

and digital audio signal (OPTICAL ZONE3/

SOURCE OUT).

With video signals the composite video (VIDEO

ZONE3 OUT) signal can be output but the

component video and S-video signals cannot be

output.

S400S400

(AUDIO)

(

For LD

)

ASSIGNABLE

FRONT FRONTCENTER

SUR-

ROUND-A

SUR-

ROUND-A

SUR-

ROUND-B

VIDEOAUDIO

AUDIO

LAN (10/100)

ZONE3

OUT

ZONE2

OUT

ZONE2

OUT

ZONE3

OUT

MONITOR

OUT

CONTROL

COMPONENT

VIDEO

ASSIGN-

ABLE

ASSIGN-

ABLE

VIDEO

OUT

SUB

WOOFER

FRONT

CENTER

EXTRA

SUR-

ROUND

(

Single

)

SUB W.

FRONT

CENTER

SUR-

ROUND

SUR-

ROUND

BACK

SURROUND

BACK

PRE OUT

MULTI CH

SIRIUS

iPod

LOOP

ANTENNA

OUT1

(HDMI CTRL) OUT2

HDMI

RF IN

(TV)

(SAT)

(DVR/

VCR 1)

(DVR/

VCR 2)

(VIDEO/

GAME

(CD-R/

TAPE/

MD)

(

DVD/LD

)

(

)

(

)

(SA

)

COAXIAL

1 4

ASSIGNABLE

SELECTABLE

R1 R5

SEE

INSTRUCTION

MANUAL

VOIR LE MODE

EMPLOI

SURROUND

BACK

SUR-

ROUND-B

R3 R4 R5 L5

SURROUND

BACK

(Single)

L4 L3 L2 L1

AC IN

SPEAKERS

Normal

LOW HIGH

FRONT

All ch Bi-Amp.

OPTICAL

1 6

ZONE2

OUT

SOURCE

OUT

ZONE3

/SOURCE

OUT

LOW HIGH

SURROUND

LOW HIGH

CENTER

HIGH LOW

SURROUND

HIGH LOW

FRONT

1 2 34

12 V TRIGGER

(

DC OUT 12V TOTAL 250 mA MAX

)

RS-

232C

VIDEO/

GAME 1

SAT

AUX

CD-R/

TAPE /

REC

SEL

OUT

SACD

PHONO

DVD/LD

(DVD/LD)

(VIDEO/

GAME

(BD)

(DVR/VCR 1)

(DVR/VCR 2)

ZONE2

OUT

DVR/

VCR 2

DVR/

VCR 1

REC SEL

OUT

REC SEL

OUT

REC SEL

OUT

REC SEL

OUT

S-VIDEO

BPR

AUDIO

ZONE2

OUT

ZONE2

OUT

VIDEO

ZONE2

OUT

ZONE3

OUT

ZONE2

OUT

MONITOR

OUT

VIDEO

12 V TRIGGER

(DVR/VCR 2)

ZONE2

OUT

VIDEO

ZONE2

OUT

VCR

(DVR/

VCR 2)

(VIDEO/

GAME

(CD-R/

TAPE/

MD)

ZONE2

OUT

SOURCE

OUT

ZONE3

/SOURCE

OUT

ZONE2

OUT

AUDI O

ZONE2

OUT

ZONE3

OUT

AUDI O

ZONE2

OUT

DIGITAL IN

AUDIO L IN

Main zone

Sub zone

SC_09TX.book Page 72 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Other connections

MULTI-ZONE setup using speaker terminals (

ZONE 2

)

You must select 7.2ch+ZONE 2 in Speaker output setting

on page 47 to use this setup. Note that the sound in the

sub zone will be temporarily interrupted when controlling

the main zone (for example, changing the input source or

starting playback).

• Connect a TV monitor to the

VIDEO ZONE2 OUT

jacks on the rear of this receiver.

You should have a pair of speakers attached to the R5 and

L5 terminals as shown below.

Secondary MULTI-ZONE setup (

ZONE 3

)

1 Connect a separate amplifier to the

AUDIO ZONE3

OUT

jacks and a TV monitor to the

VIDEO ZONE3 OUT

jacks, both on the rear of this receiver.

2 Connect a separate amplifier to the

ZONE3/

SOURCE OUT

digital output on the rear of this receiver.

The amplifier must have an optical digital input to make

this connection. This will allow you to hear the digital

output of a component in a second sub zone.

S400S400

(AUDIO)

(

For LD

)

ASSIGNABLE

FRONT FRONTCENTER

SUR-

ROUND-A

SUR-

ROUND-A

SUR-

ROUND-B

VIDEOAUDIO

AUDIO

LAN (10/100)

ZONE3

OUT

ZONE2

OUT

ZONE2

OUT

ZONE3

OUT

MONITOR

OUT

CONTROL

COMPONENT

VIDEO

ASSIGN-

ABLE

ASSIGN-

ABLE

VIDEO

OUT

SUB

WOOFER

FRONT

CENTER

EXTRA

SUR-

ROUND

(

Single

)

SUB W.

FRONT

CENTER

SUR-

ROUND

SUR-

ROUND

BACK

SURROUND

BACK

PRE OUT

MULTI CH

SIRIUS

iPod

LOOP

ANTENNA

OUT1

(HDMI CTRL) OUT2

HDMI

RF IN

(TV)

(SAT)

(DVR/

VCR 1)

(DVR/

VCR 2)

(VIDEO/

GAME

(CD-R/

TAPE/

MD)

(

DVD/LD

)

(

)

(

)

(SA

)

COAXIAL

1 4

ASSIGNABLE

SELECTABLE

R1 R5

SEE

INSTRUCTION

MANUAL

VOIR LE MODE

EMPLOI

SURROUND

BACK

SUR-

ROUND-B

R3 R4 R5 L5

SURROUND

BACK

(Single)

L4 L3 L2 L1

AC IN

SPEAKERS

Normal

LOW HIGH

FRONT

All ch Bi-Amp.

OPTICAL

1 6

ZONE2

OUT

SOURCE

OUT

ZONE3

/SOURCE

OUT

LOW HIGH

SURROUND

LOW HIGH

CENTER

HIGH LOW

SURROUND

HIGH LOW

FRONT

1 2 34

12 V TRIGGER

(

DC OUT 12V TOTAL 250 mA MAX

)

RS-

232C

VIDEO/

GAME 1

SAT

AUX

CD-R/

TAPE /

REC

SEL

OUT

SACD

PHONO

DVD/LD

(DVD/LD)

(VIDEO/

GAME

(BD)

(DVR/VCR 1)

(DVR/VCR 2)

ZONE2

OUT

DVR/

VCR 2

DVR/

VCR 1

REC SEL

OUT

REC SEL

OUT

REC SEL

OUT

REC SEL

OUT

S-VIDEO

BPR

VIDEO

ZONE2

OUT

CENTER

R5 L5

LOW HIGH

CENTER

ZONE3

OUT

ZONE2

OUT

MONITOR

OUT

VIDEO

12 V TRIGGER

(DVR/VCR 2)

ZONE2

OUT

VIDEO

ZONE2

OUT

CENTER

OUND

BACK

SUR

BAC

(Sin

LOW HIGH

CENTER

Main zone

Sub zone

S400S400

(AUDIO)

(

For LD

)

ASSIGNABLE

FRONT FRONTCENTER

SUR-

ROUND-A

SUR-

ROUND-A

SUR-

ROUND-B

VIDEOAUDIO

AUDIO

LAN (10/100)

ZONE3

OUT

ZONE2

OUT

ZONE2

OUT

ZONE3

OUT

MONITOR

OUT

CONTROL

COMPONENT

VIDEO

ASSIGN-

ABLE

ASSIGN-

ABLE

VIDEO

OUT

SUB

WOOFER

FRONT

CENTER

EXTRA

SUR-

ROUND

(

Single

)

SUB W.

FRONT

CENTER

SUR-

ROUND

SUR-

ROUND

BACK

SURROUND

BACK

PRE OUT

MULTI CH

SIRIUS

iPod

LOOP

ANTENNA

OUT1

(HDMI CTRL) OUT2

HDMI

RF IN

(TV)

(SAT)

(DVR/

VCR 1)

(DVR/

VCR 2)

(VIDEO/

GAME

(CD-R/

TAPE/

MD)

(

DVD/LD

)

(

)

(

)

(SA

)

COAXIAL

1 4

ASSIGNABLE

SELECTABLE

R1 R5

SEE

INSTRUCTION

MANUAL

VOIR LE MODE

EMPLOI

4Ω 16Ω

6Ω 16Ω

SURROUND

BACK

SUR-

ROUND-B

6Ω 16Ω

SURROUND

BACK

(Single)

6Ω 16Ω

AC IN

4Ω 16Ω

SPEAKERS

Normal

LOW HIGH

FRONT

All ch Bi-Amp.

OPTICAL

1 6

ZONE2

OUT

SOURCE

OUT

ZONE3

/SOURCE

OUT

LOW HIGH

SURROUND

LOW HIGH

CENTER

HIGH LOW

SURROUND

HIGH LOW

FRONT

1 2 34

12 V TRIGGER

(

DC OUT 12V TOTAL 250 mA MAX

)

RS-

232C

VIDEO/

GAME 1

SAT

AUX

CD-R/

TAPE/

REC

SEL

OUT

SACD

PHONO

DVD/LD

(DVD/LD)

(VIDEO/

GAME

(BD)

(DVR/VCR 1)

(DVR/VCR 2)

ZONE2

OUT

DVR/

VCR 2

DVR/

VCR 1

REC SEL

OUT

REC SEL

OUT

REC SEL

OUT

REC SEL

OUT

S-VIDEO

BPR

AUDIO

VIDEO

ZONE3

/SOURCE

OUT

ZONE3

OUT

ZONE3

OUT

DIGITAL IN

AUDIO L IN

ZONE3

OUT

ZONE2

OUT

MONITOR

OUT

VIDEO

12 V TRIGGER

(DVR/VCR 2)

ZONE2

OUT

VIDEO

VCR

(DVR/

VCR 2)

(VIDEO/

GAME

(CD-R/

TAP E /

MD)

ZONE2

OUT

SOURCE

OUT

ZONE3

/SOURCE

OUT

AUDI O

ZONE2

OUT

ZONE3

OUT

AUDI O

Main zone

Sub zone (ZONE 3)

SC_09TX.book Page 73 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Other connections

Using the MULTI-ZONE controls

The following steps use the front panel controls to adjust

the sub zone volume and select sources.

See MULTI-

ZONE remote controls on page 74.

1 Press

ZONE2

ZONE3

to select the desired zone

(room).

The zone turns on and off each time the corresponding

button is pressed. It is possible to turn both on.

2 Press

CTRL

to select the sub zone(s) you want.

If you selected ZONE 2 ON and ZONE 3 ON above, you

can toggle among ZONE 2, ZONE 3 and ZONE 2&3.

• When the receiver is on,

make sure that any

operations for the sub zone are done while ZONE and

your selected sub zone(s) show in the display. If this

is not showing, the front panel controls affect the

main zone only.

3Use the

INPUT SELECTOR

dial to select the source

for the zone you have selected.

For example, ZONE 2 CD-R sends the source connected

to the CD-R inputs to the primary (ZONE 2) sub room.

•If you select TUNER, you can use the TUNER controls

to select a preset station (see Saving station presets

on page 43 if you’re unsure how to do this).

4Use the

MASTER VOLUME

dial to adjust the

volume.

This is only possible if you selected the VARIABLE

volume control in ZONE Audio Setup on page 104.

5 When you’re finished, press

CTRL

again to return to

the main zone controls.

You can also press the ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 button on the

front panel to switch off all output to the sub zone(s).

MULTI-ZONE remote controls

Set the MULTI-ZONE operation switch to ZONE 2 or

ZONE 3 to operate the corresponding zone.

The following table shows the possible MULTI-ZONE

remote controls:

Connecting an IR receiver

If you keep your stereo components in a closed cabinet or

shelving unit, or you wish to use the sub zone remote

control in another zone, you can use an optional IR

receiver (such as a Niles or Xantech unit) to control your

system instead of the remote sensor on the front panel of

this receiver.

Note

1 When you use ZONE 3, you must set ZONE 3 / RECSEL Setting in the ZONE Audio Setup menu to ZONE 3 (page 104).

2 Note that when recording, this also selects the RECOUT input source. See Making an audio or a video recording on page 109 for more on this.

3 If the receiver is in standby, the display is dimmed, and ZONE and your selected sub zone(s) continue to show in the display.

4 The tuner cannot be tuned to more than one station at a time. Therefore, changing the station in one zone also changes the station in the other zone.

Please be careful not to change stations when recording a radio broadcast.

PHONES

SPEAKERS AUTO SURROUND

/STREAM DIRECT

STATUS

LCD

VIEW

DIMMERTUNER EDITBAND

CTRL

ZONE2 ZONE3

VIDEO/GAME 2 INPUT

DIGITAL INS-VIDEO VIDEO L R

AUDIO

MULTI-ZONE CONTROL

MCACC

SETUP MIC

USB

(TUNE)

PARAMETER

SETUP

(ST) (ST)

AUDIO VIDEO

RETURN

ENTER

CTRL

ZONE2 ZONE3

MULTI-ZONE CONTROL



SC-09TX

MASTER

VOLUME

STANDBY/ON

INPUT

SELECTOR

R1R2R3R4R5

ACTIVE MONITOR

L5L4L3L2L1

MASTER

VOLUME

INPUT

SELECTOR

5 The volume levels of the main and sub zones are independent.

6 • You won’t be able to switch the main zone off completely unless you’ve switched off the MULTI-ZONE control first.

• If you don’t plan to use the MULTI-ZONE feature for awhile, turn off the power in both the sub and main rooms so that this receiver is in standby.

Button What it does

 Switches on/off power in the currently selected sub

zone.

INPUT

SELECT

Use to select the input source in the currently

selected sub zone.

Input

source

buttons

Use to select the input source directly (this may not

work for some functions) in the currently selected sub

zone.

VOL +/– Use to set the listening volume in the currently

selected sub zone.

7 • Remote operation may not be possible if direct light from a strong fluorescent lamp is shining on the IR receiver remote sensor window.

• Note that other manufacturers may not use the IR terminology. Refer to the manual that came with your component to check for IR compatibility.

• If using two remote controls (at the same time), the IR receiver’s remote sensor takes priority over the remote sensor on the front panel.

• Connections using up to four devices and IR receivers can be made with this receiver.

SC_09TX.book Page 74 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Other connections

1 Connect the IR receiver sensor to the

IR IN

jack on

the rear of this receiver.

2 Connect the

IR IN

jack of another component to the

IR OUT

jack on the rear of this receiver to link it to the

IR receiver.

Please see the manual supplied with your IR receiver for

the type of cable necessary for the connection.

• If you want to link a Pioneer component to the IR

receiver, see Operating other Pioneer components

with this unit’s sensor on page 118 to connect to the

CONTROL jacks instead of the IR OUT jack.

Switching components on and off using

the 12 volt trigger

You can connect components in your system (such as a

screen or projector) to this receiver so that they switch on

or off using 12 volt triggers when you select an input

function. However, you must specify which input

functions switch on the trigger using the The Input Setup

menu on page 101. Note that this will only work with

components that have a standby mode.

• Connect the

12 V TRIGGER

jack of this receiver to

the 12 V trigger of another component.

Use a cable with a mono mini-plug on each end for the

connection.

• The trigger maximum power is DC OUT 12 V/50 mA.

After you’ve specified the input functions that will switch

on the trigger, you’ll be able to switch the component on

or off just by pressing the input function(s) you’ve set on

page 101.

Using this receiver with a Pioneer

plasma display

If you have a Pioneer plasma display, you can use an

SR+ cable

to connect it to this unit and take advantage

of various convenient features, such as automatic video

input switching of the plasma display when the input is

changed.

Note

1 Triggered connections with up to 4 devices compatible with 12-volt triggers can be made with this receiver.

FRONT

SUR-

ROUND-A

VIDEOAUDIO

AUDIO

DIO

ZONE3

OUT

ZONE2

OUT

ZONE2

OUT

ZONE3

OUT

MONITOR

OUT

CONTROL

COMPONENT

VIDEO

ASSIGN-

ABLE

ASSIGN-

ABLE

VIDEO

OUT

FRONT

CENTER

SUR-

ROUND

SUR-

ROUND

BACK

MULTI CH

OUT1

(HDMI CTRL)

OUT2

SUR-

ROUND-B

SURROUND

BACK

(Single)

L4 L3 L2 L1

AC IN

HIGH LOW

SURROUND

HIGH LOW

FRONT

1 2 34

12 V TRIGGER

(

DC OUT 12V TOTAL 250 mA MAX

)

RS-

232C

VIDEO/

GAME 1

SAT

AUX

CD-R/

TAPE/

REC

SEL

OUT

SACD

PHONO

DVD/LD

(DVD/LD)

(VIDEO/

GAME

(BD)

(DVR/VCR 1)

(DVR/VCR 2)

ZONE2

OUT

DVR/

VCR 2

DVR/

VCR 1

REC SEL

OUT

REC SEL

OUT

REC SEL

OUT

REC SEL

OUT

S-VIDEO

BPR

OUT

IN OUT

CONTROL

OUT

CONTROL

COMPONENT

VIDEO

OUT

IR receiver

Closete or shelving unit

Non-Pioneer

component

Pioneer

component

2 The 3-ringed SR+ cable from Pioneer is commercially available under the part number ADE7095. Contact the Pioneer Customer Support division for

more information on obtaining an SR+ cable (you can also use a commercially available 3-ringed mini phone plug for the connection).

3 This receiver is compatible with all SR+ equipped Pioneer plasma displays from 2003 onward.

VIDEO

ZONE3

OUT

ZONE2

OUT

MONITOR

OUT

CONTROL

COMPONENT

VIDEO

ABLE

VIDEO

OUT

1 2 34

12 V TRIGGER

(

DC OUT 12V TOTAL 250 mA MAX

)

VIDEO/

GAME 1

SAT

(DVR/VCR 2)

ZONE2

OUT

1234

12 V TRIGGER

(

DC OUT 12V TOTAL 250 mA MAX

)

12V

TRIGGER

VIDEOO

ZONE3

OUT

ZONE2

OUT

MONITOR

OUT

CONTROL

COMPONENT

VIDEO

ASSIGN-

ABLE

ASSIGN-

ABLE

VIDEO

OUT

1 2 34

12 V TRIGGER

(

DC OUT 12V TOTAL 250 mA MAX

)

RS-

232C

VIDEO/

GAME 1

SAT

DVD/LD

(DVD/LD)

(VIDEO/

GAME

(BD)

(DVR/VCR 1)

(DVR/VCR 2)

ZONE2

OUT

DVR/

VCR 2

DVR/

VCR 1

REC SEL

OUT

REC SEL

OUT

REC SEL

OUT

REC SEL

OUT

S-VIDEO

BPR

CONTROL

OUT

CONTROL

Pioneer plasma display

SC_09TX.book Page 75 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Other connections

Important

• You can’t use the SR+ features when HDMI Control

is set to ON. Make sure to set HDMI Control to OFF

when you use the SR+ features (page 99).

• If you connect to a Pioneer plasma display using an

SR+ cable, you will need to point the remote control

at the plasma display remote sensor to control the

receiver. In this case, you won’t be able to control the

receiver using the remote control if you switch the

plasma display off.

• Before you can use the extra SR+ features, you need

to make a few settings in the receiver. See The Input

Setup menu on page 101 and SR+ Setup for Pioneer

plasma displays on page 104 for detailed

instructions.

• Use a 3-ringed miniplug SR+ cable to connect the

CONTROL IN

jack of this receiver with the

CONTROL

OUT

jack of your plasma display.

To make the most of the SR+ features, you should

connect your source components (DVD player, etc.) in a

slightly different way to that described in this chapter. For

each component, connect the video output directly to the

plasma display, and just connect the audio (analog and/

or digital) to this receiver.

Using the SR+ mode with a Pioneer

plasma display

When connected using an SR+ cable, a number of

features become available to make using this receiver

with your Pioneer plasma display even easier. These

features include:

• On-screen displays when making receiver settings,

such as speaker setup, MCACC setup, and so on.

• On-screen volume display.

• On-screen display of listening mode.

• Automatic video input switching on the plasma

display.

• Automatic volume muting on the plasma display.

See also SR+ Setup for Pioneer plasma displays on

page 104 for more on setting up the receiver.

Important

• The SR+ features do not work when any of the iPod,

HOME MEDIA GALLERY, XM, or SIRIUS Radio

function is selected.

1 Make sure that the plasma display and this receiver

are switched on and that they are connected with the

SR+ cable.

See Using this receiver with a Pioneer plasma display

above for more on connecting these components.

• Make sure you have also selected the display input to

which you’ve connected the receiver in The Input

Setup menu on page 101.

2 To switch SR+ mode on/off, set the operation

selector switch to

RCV

, then press the SR+ button.

The front LCD display shows SR+ ON or SR+ OFF.

• The automatic video input switching and the

automatic volume muting features are enabled

separately; see SR+ Setup for Pioneer plasma displays

on page 104.



SC-09TX

MASTER

VOLUME

STANDBY/ON

INPUT

SELECTOR

R1R2R3R4R5

ACTIVE MONITOR

L5L4L3L2L1

VIDEO

INPUT 1

VIDEO

INPUT 2

SAT

AUDIO IN

DVD/LD

AUDIO IN

Pioneer plasma display

This receiver

DVD player

Satellite receiver, etc.

SOURCE

TV RCV

VOL

VOLCH

SOURCE

TV RCV

SIGNAL SEL SLEEP AUDIO

iPod CTRL

DIMMER

SR+ SBch PHASE

A.ATT GENRE

HDMI OUT

D.ACCESS

ENTER

MCACC CLASS

DISP

SR+

SC_09TX.book Page 76 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Other connections

Connecting a PC for Advanced MCACC

output

When using the Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional

(see page 51) to calibrate the reverb characteristics of

your listening room, you can graphically check the

results on your computer connected to this receiver.

Also, when the Full Band Phase Control function is

activated, you can visually check the calibrated

characteristics of group delay of the speakers and the

corrected characteristics of group delay processed by the

exclusive correction filter by installing the corresponding

PC application on your computer.

Use a commercially-available RS-232C cable to connect

the RS-232C jack on your computer to the 9-pin RS-232C

jack on the back panel of this receiver (the cable must be

cross type, female–female).

The software to output the results is available from the

support area of the Pioneer website (http://

www.pioneerelectronics.com/pna/ci/codes/

0,,2076_262707270,00.html). Instructions for using the

software are also available here. If you have any

questions regarding, please contact the Customer

Support Division of Pioneer.

Please make sure your system meets the following

requirements:

• Operating system must be Microsoft Windows

(Service Pack 2) or Windows

2000.

• CPU must be at least Pentium 3 / 300 MHz or AMD

K6 / 300 MHz (or equivalent) with at least 128 MB of

memory, and your monitor must be able to display a

minimum resolution of 800x600.

• An RS-232C port connector is necessary for graphical

output. Refer to the operating instructions and/or the

PC manufacturer for more information on making

the proper port settings.

• System must have internet access.

• Connect your computer to the RS-232C jack on the

rear panel of the receiver.

Make sure that the receiver and all connected

components are switched off and disconnected from the

power outlet when you do this.

Use a commercially-available cable to connect the

RS-232C jack on your computer to the 9-pin RS-232C jack

on this receiver. See the documentation provided with

the Advanced MCACC application for more information.

Advanced MCACC output using your PC

Before continuing, make sure you have completed step 1

in Data Management on page 54. Note that transmission

data is erased when the receiver is turned off.

1Select ‘

Output PC

’ and press

ENTER

When the receiver is ready for transmission, Start the

MCACC application on your PC shows on the OSD.

2 Start the MCACC application on your computer.

Follow the instructions provided with the application. It

will take about ten seconds for the transmission to

complete, then you will be able to analyze the output on

your computer. Since the data will be cleared from the

receiver when you restart reverb measurement or turn off

the receiver, you might want to save the information on

your PC after measurement.

3 When you’re finished, press

RETURN

You will return to the Data Management menu. Continue

with other settings in the Data Management menu if

necessary. Press RETURN again to exit the Data

Management menu.

Note

1 Make sure that you do this before continuing to the Reverb Measurement jacks option in Using Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional on page 52

(measurement data is cleared if you switch off the power).

RS-232C

Personal computer

:Return

5. Data Management

DVD/LD

55.0

a. MCACC Data Check

b. Memory Rename

c. MCACC Memory Copy

d. MCACC Memory Clear

e. Output PC

Start the MCACC

application on your PC.

:Cancel

5e. Output PC

DVD/LD

55.0

SC_09TX.book Page 77 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs

Chapter 9

Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY

inputs

Enjoying the Home Media Gallery

With Home Media Gallery, you can enjoy digital content

such as movies, music and photo files. Playable content

is files stored on one or more media servers connected by

a home network (LAN) or those stored on a USB flash

drive. After connecting via a broadband router or an

Ethernet hub to a media server with network software*,

you can navigate through the digital content on the

Home Media Gallery. For USB interface, this receiver

supports Mass Storage Class devices.

* Referred to as a “media server” that contains digital

content such as movies, music and photo files. PCs

that have pre-installed media server software and

recorders with a media server function are considered

the media server. There are some media servers that

you can choose from; for example, Windows Media

Connect, Windows Media Player that has a media

sharing function, and DLNA compliant servers.

Usable free media servers

Free media servers available from Microsoft include:

1. Windows Media Connect 2.0

Windows Media Connect runs on a 32-bit PC with

Windows XP Service Pack 2 (SP2) installed. When it

is already installed, you can enjoy Home Media

Gallery using your PC.

2. Windows Media Player 11 for Windows XP

Windows Media Player 11 features Media Sharing

that runs on a 32-bit PC with Windows XP Service

Pack 2 (SP2) installed. If Windows Media Connect 2.0

is not installed in your PC, you can download

Windows Media Player 11 from Microsoft’s website.

3. Windows Media Player 11 for Windows Vista

Windows Media Player 11 will be featured in 32-bit

Windows Vista PCs.

When selecting the most suitable media server, please

visit Microsoft’s website for system requirements, known

issues, installation procedures and other updated

information.

PlaysForSure

PlaysForSure is a marketing certification given by

Microsoft. The PlaysForSure logo makes it easy to find

digital media stores and devices that work together.

Digital media purchased from online stores carrying the

PlaysForSure logo is available for use on this unit.

This unit complies with PlaysForSure Requirements

Specification for Network Devices Version 1.21.

The PlaysForSure logo, Windows Media and the Windows

logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft

Corporation in the USA and other countries.

DLNA CERTIFIED™ Audio/Video/Image Player

The Digital Living Network Alliance (DLNA) is a cross-

industry organization of consumer electronics,

computing industry and mobile device companies.

Digital Living provides consumers with easy sharing of

digital media through a wired or wireless network in the

home.

The DLNA certification logo makes it easy to find

products that comply with the DLNA Interoperability

Guidelines. This unit complies with the DLNA Home

Networked Device Interoperability Guidelines v1.0.

When a PC running DLNA server software or other

DLNA-compatible device is connected to this receiver,

some setting changes of software or other devices may

be required. Please refer to the operating instructions for

the software or device for more information.

DLNA and DLNA CERTIFIED are trademarks and/or service

marks of Digital Living Network Alliance.

Supported file formats

The table below shows supported file formats that can be

played back or displayed on this receiver. These formats

are applicable to network sources. Most of them are also

applicable to USB sources. However, media server

content protected by digital rights management, such as

WMDRM10 (Windows Media Digital Rights

Management 10), may not play on this receiver. For

detailed information about file formats, see Details of

compatible formats on page 96.

SC_09TX.book Page 78 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs

• Some formats may not be supported nor displayed on

Home Media Gallery as formats that individual media

servers support vary. Refer to the manufacturer’s or

other relevant website for supported formats on your

media server.

• Even with the format included in the above table,

some functions may not operate properly depending

on the content.

• Even with the format included in the above table,

some files may not be played properly through a USB

device.

Note

• Content may not play or display properly depending

on the conditions of use.

• Sources for this panel include media servers running

on the LAN network, or SD Card, MS, MMC, xD

Picture and CF that comply with the Mass Storage

File System through a USB interface.

• Home Media Gallery complies with DLNA version 1.0

and PlaysForSure version 1.21. If your media server

supports different DLNA and/or PlaysForSure

version(s), some Home Media Gallery function(s) and

content format(s) may not be supported.

• Supported formats and contents are subject to

change. Visit the Pioneer website for updated

information: http://www.pioneerelectronics.com

• The Home Media Gallery functions as a

WMDRM10-ND (Microsoft Windows Media DRM for

networked devices). Content can only be navigated

from the media servers that support WMDRM10-ND.

• The system may not be able to display content from

incompatible memory cards.

• You cannot use the Home Media Gallery until

dimmed elements on the menu screen turn white.

• Some Home Media Gallery functions, such as trick

play during Fast Forward and Rewind, Time Search

and Search, may not work depending on the media

server’s capability and functionality.

Connecting to the network through

LAN interface

Caution

• Before making or changing the connections, switch

off the power and disconnect the power cord from the

power outlet. Plugging in should be the final step.

By connecting this receiver to the network via the LAN

terminal, you can play back files stored on components

on the network, including your PC.

Connect the LAN terminal on this receiver to the LAN

terminal on your router (with or without the built-in DHCP

server function) with a straight LAN cable (CAT 5 or

higher).

Turn on the DHCP server function of your router. In case

your router does not have the built-in DHCP server

function, it is necessary set up the network manually. For

details, see Network Setup on page 92.

The specifications of a LAN terminal

LAN terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Ethernet jack

10BASE-T/100BASE-TX

Type of files Format

Movie MPEG PS (mpg, mpeg, mpe, m2p), MPEG-2 TS,

WMV (asf, wmv), MPEG4 (mp4)

Music MP3 (mp3), LPCM, WAV (wav), WMA (wma),

MPEG-4 AAC (m4a)

Photo JPEG (jpg, jpeg), BMP (bmp), PNG (png), TIFF (tif,

tiff), GIF (gif)

Note

1 With Windows Media Connect or Windows Media Player 11, you can even play back copyrighted audio files on this receiver.

S400S400

(AUDIO)

(

For LD

)

ASSIGNABLE

LAN (10/100)

SUB

WOOFER

FRONT

CENTER

EXTRA

SUR-

ROUND

(

Single

)

SURROUND

BACK

PRE OUT

SIRIUS

iPod

LOOP

ANTENNA

HDMI

RF IN

(TV)

(SAT)

(DVR/

VCR 1)

(DVR/

VCR 2)

(VIDEO/

GAME

(CD-R/

TAPE/

MD)

(

DVD/LD

)

(

)

(

)

(SA

)

COAXIAL

1 4

ASSIGNABLE

OPTICAL

1 6

ZONE2

OUT

SOURCE

OUT

ZONE3

/SOURCE

OUT

LAN (10/100)

WAN

321

LAN

SC-09TX

LAN cable

(Sold separately)

Router

LAN cable

(sold separately)

to LAN port

PC2

PC1

SC_09TX.book Page 79 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs

Using the USB interface

It is possible to play back files

using the USB interface

on the front of this receiver.

Confirming the IP Address

After making the network connection, follow the

instructions below to confirm the panel’s IP Address

before accessing the network. (The setup is effective for

Auto only. To perform the procedure, DHCP on your

server or router must be valid.)

1 Press

HOME MEDIA GALLERY

The Home Media Gallery screen is displayed.

2 Select ‘

Setup

’ (

/

then

ENTER

3 Select ‘

Network Setup

’ (

/

then

ENTER

4 Select ‘

Automatically acquire IP

’ (



then

ENTER

The screen turns from Select mode to Input mode.

5 Select ‘

Yes

’ (

/

then

ENTER

The IP Address is automatically assigned.

The Home Media Gallery supports Auto IP and DHCP

(Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol). If the system

failed to acquire the IP Address or if you want to obtain

different addresses, select No then enter IP Address and

Subnet mask. Use the 0 to 9 and /// buttons to

enter an address, then press ENTER. You do not need to

enter Default Gateway and DNS Server.

6 Select ‘

’ (



then

ENTER

The Reset dialog appears on screen.

7 Select ‘

’ and press

ENTER

The home network module restarts.

A message Setting up Home Media Gallery. Please

wait until initialized. appears on screen.

When the initialization is finished, setting values become

effective and the top menu of the Home Media Gallery

returns.

Note

• For information on DHCP, refer to network device’s

operating instructions.

• You may need to contact your service provider or

network administrator when manually entering an IP

Address.

• Some media servers block or are programmed to

block access to client servers. When connecting this

receiver, check the media server for client server

access rights.

Connecting a USB device

You can also enjoy content stored on memory cards by

connecting a USB device to this receiver. When you

insert a USB flash drive or multi-card reader into the USB

port, the root directory or the Device List screen appears.

In addition, you can connect your digital camera directly

to this receiver using a USB connector cable.

1 Press

HOME MEDIA GALLERY

The Home Media Gallery screen is displayed.

2 Select ‘

USB

’ (

/

then

ENTER

The Device List is displayed on screen with the selected

device highlighted if you have not checked in the Single

Server/USB box after selecting Setup and then Auto

Connection Setup. If you have checked in the box, the

list is skipped.

3 Select the desired device (

/

then

ENTER

You can select a device only when the Device List is

displayed.

4 Press

ENTER

to navigate to a folder or play a file/

content.

To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.

Note

• If the Home Media Gallery is launched and the Single

Server/USB box is checked after selecting Setup

and then Auto Connection Setup, the system

displays the root directory immediately after inserting

a USB device. In this case, you can start from step 4.

When a multi-card reader is inserted, the Device List

appears with the selected device highlighted. In this

case, you can start from step 3.

Readable USB devices

This system reads FAT16, FAT32 and NTFS.

Note

1 • Compatible USB devices include external magnetic hard drives, portable flash memory (particularly keydrives) and digital audio players (MP3 players)

of format FAT16/32. It is not possible to connect this unit to a personal computer for USB playback.

• Pioneer cannot guarantee compatibility (operation and/or bus power) with all USB mass storage devices and assumes no responsibility for any loss of

data that may occur when connected to this receiver.

PHONES

SPEAKERS AUTO SURROUND

/STREAM DIRECT

STATUS

LCD

VIEW

DIMMERTUNER EDITBAND

CTRL

ZONE2 ZONE3

VIDEO/GAME 2 INPUT

DIGITAL INS-VIDEO VIDEO L R

AUDIO

MULTI-ZONE CONTROL

MCACC

SETUP MIC

USB

(TUNE)

PARAMETER

SETUP

(ST) (ST)

AUDIO VIDEO

RETURN

ENTER

USB

This receiver

USB mass

storage device

SC_09TX.book Page 80 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs

Readable data files

Movie, music and photo files can also be played with the

exception of Digital Rights Management (WMDRM10)

protected files.

Note

• A single USB device can be connected at a time and

no USB hub connected.

• This system may not be able to display modified or

edited content from a PC or other equipment.

• This system supports the USB Mass Storage Class.

• Some digital cameras may require a setup procedure

for Mass Storage Class data transfer. The setup is

done on the camera. See the operating instructions

supplied with the digital camera.

• This system may not be able to display images,

depending on the type of your memory card, or

camera.

Removing a USB device

To remove a USB device, exit the Home Media Gallery

first and then disconnect the device.

Note

• Be sure to exit the Home Media Gallery screen before

removing the USB device. If you remove the USB

device while the Home Media Gallery screen is

displayed, data inside the memory may be damaged.

• Do not insert or remove the USB device immediately

after this receiver is switched on or off. This action

may cause data inside the memory to be damaged.

• Pioneer is not liable for any loss or damage to the

data inside the USB flash drive.

Starting the Home Media Gallery

function

1 Press HOME MEDIA GALLERY.

The Home Media Gallery screen is displayed.

2 Select ‘Media Navigator’, ‘USB’, ‘My Playlist’

or ‘Setup’ (/ then ENTER).

• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.

• To exit Home Media Gallery, select other input

source.

Navigating the files and folders

By selecting Media Navigator, the previously selected

server menu is automatically displayed on the screen by

default (page 92). When only one server is found, the

system automatically connects the server. You can also

use the Tool Menu to switch to another server or

manually select a server from the Server List. The display

is automatically changed to a server list if there are no

previously navigated servers.

1 Press HOME MEDIA GALLERY.

The Home Media Gallery screen is displayed.

2Select ‘

Media Navigator

’ (

/

then

ENTER

A server menu appears. The file/folder configuration may

vary depending on the server selected.

After selecting a category, folder or container and

navigating on subsequent screens, you can find a file and

start the appropriate Player depending on the selected

file.

3 Select the desired folder to navigate or file/content

to play (

/

/

then

ENTER

4Press

ENTER

to display a subsequent screen.

Subsequent screen appears.

To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.

To exit Home Media Gallery, select other input source.

Media Navigator

USB

My Playlist

Setup

Server

XXXXXX

Home Media Gallery

SC_09TX.book Page 81 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs

Selectable screen display

Menu display options are: List, Thumbnail or

Thumbnail List. Press ADV SURR (Yellow) then

select Change view from the Tool Menu to choose

from the screen display options.

Using the Tool Menu

Press ADV SURR (Yellow) on the remote control to

access the pop-up Tool Menu. Various play and display

modes can be selected from the Tool Menu. The

selectable menu items differ depending on the submenu

(see the table below).

Menu items Function Screen on which Tool

Menu is available

Update to

Latest

Information

Updates the server

connection status

Server List (connected/not

connected)

Delete Server Deletes the server

that are dimmed on

the list

Server List (server not

connected)

USB Devices

List

Moves to the USB

Devices List screen

Folder Contents List (USB)/

Contents List (USB)

Consecutive

Playback

Continuously plays

video content starting

from the selected

item

Folder Contents List/

Contents List

Detailed

Display

Displays the detailed

information on the

selected content

Folder Contents List/

Contents List

Sort Sorts items in Folder

or Contents List

Folder Contents List/

Contents List

Search Searches the desired

items in Folder or

Contents List by word

Media Navigator/Folder

Contents List/Contents List

Til

All

XXXX

All Photos

Add to My Playlist

Change view

Sort

Slide Show Settings

Detailed Display

Select Searver

Stop Music

1/27

Tool

List

Thumbnail

Thunbnail List

XXXX

All Photos

1/27

Tool

Title

XXXX

Album

XXXX

Date

2006/11/19

Server

XXXXXX

Title

XXXX

Album

XXXX

Date

2006/11/19

Server

XXXXXX

All Photos

1/27

Too l

XXXX

All Photos

1/27

Tool

Title

XXXX

Album

XXXX

Date

2006/11/19

Server

XXXXXX

List screen

Thumbnail screen

Thumbnail List screen

Slide Show

Setup

Used to set up a slide-

show on the Photo

Player

Server List/Media

Navigator/USB/My Playlist/

Playlist List (Movie/Music/

Photo)/ Folder Contents

List/Contents List/Photo

Player

Add to My

Playlist

Adds the selected

files to My Playlist

Folder Contents List/

Contents List/Movie Player/

Music Player/Photo Player

Select Server Moves to the Server

List screen

Media Navigator/Folder

Contents List/Contents List

Stop Music

Stops playback of a

music file

Server List/Media

Navigator/ Playlist List

(Movie/ Music/Photo)/

Folder Contents List/

Contents List/Music

Player/Photo Player

Change Name Used to change

content names in My

Playlist

Playlist List (Movie/Music/

Photo)

Change view Switches the screen

display to List,

Thumbnail, or

Thumbnail List

Folder Contents List/

Contents List

Time Search Starts playback at the

preset time on the

Movie or Music Player

screen

Movie Player/Music Player

Slow Playback Plays back in the slow

mode on the Movie or

Music screen

Movie Player

BGM Setup Used to set up the

slideshow BGM on

the Photo Player

Photo Player

Move Moves the order of

content in My Playlist

Contents List (Playlist)

Delete from

My Playlist

Deletes the selected

content from My

Playlist

Contents List (Playlist)

a.When a file is selected

b.While music is played

Menu items Function Screen on which Tool

Menu is available

SC_09TX.book Page 82 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs

Media Navigator

While navigating through the folders a media server

provides, you can select the desired file to start the

corresponding player by pressing ENTER.

Screen Components

1 Thumbnail of the file selected (if obtained)

2 Name of the server currently selected

3 Current menu level

4 Item being selected (highlighted in yellow)

5 File number/total number of files

6 Number of servers connected

7 Key guide

Note

• The Media Navigator is not launched depending on

the option selected in Auto Connection Setup on

page 92. The screen displays after selecting a server

in the server list.

USB

Like navigating through the media servers, you can select

the desired file contained in the device selected on the

USB Devices List screen to start the corresponding

player by pressing ENTER. You can also select the menu

displayed on either List, Thumbnail or Thumbnail List

screen. Press ADV SURR (Yellow) and select Change

view from the Tool Menu.

Note

• The USB Devices List screen may not be displayed

depending on the option selected in Auto

Connection Setup. Single Server/USB is selected

for Auto Connection Setup by default. You don’t

need to select a device in the USB Devices List when

you use a single directory device (USB flash drive).

My Playlist

Each category (Movie, Music and Photo) has five

different Playlists in which you can register up to 100 files

each. The My Playlist option can contain sound and

image files selected in the Media Navigator. To edit a

Playlist, use the Tool Menu (page 82).

1Press

HOME MEDIA GALLERY

The Home Media Gallery screen is displayed.

2Select ‘

My Playlist

’ (

/

then ENTER).

3 Select a Playlist list from ‘

Movie Playlist

’, ‘

Music

Playlist

’ or ‘

Photo Playlist

’ (

/

then

ENTER

4 Select the desired content (

/

/

then

ENTER

The menu can be displayed as a List, Thumbnail or

Thumbnail List screen. Press ADV SURR (Yellow) then

select Change view from the Tool Menu (/ then

ENTER).

5Press

ENTER

to play or display.

To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.

To exit Home Media Gallery, select other input source.

Enjoying movie files

You can display the menu as a List, Thumbnail or

Thumbnail List screen. Press ADV SURR (Yellow) then

select an option under Change view on the Tool Menu.

You can also navigate through the subsequent or

preceding menu levels in the server or USB device by

pressing /// or ENTER. When you select movie

content from the server menu on the Media Navigator

screen, the Movie Player automatically launches. Select

a category, folder, or device to access the submenu

containing the required file or content.

The Movie Player screen appears when you select a

movie file from My Playlist, just like selecting a file in the

server.

Movie

Music

Photos

User Files

Media Navigator

1/4

Tool

Title

Movie

Server

XXXXXX

SC_09TX.book Page 83 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs

Screen Components

1 Movie icon

2 Title (File name, etc.)

3 Date

4 Album name

5 Play time

6 Play status

7 Key guide

8 Progress bar

9 Audio mode icon

10 A-B repeat mode icon

11 Repeat mode icon

12 Random mode icon (appears when the mode is valid)

Movie Player key guide

Button(s) Function

ENTER Pauses while playback or plays back while in

PAUSE

 Fast reverse during playback or when in PAUSE.

Each press toggles the reverse speed among x 2,

x 4, x 8, x 20, x 50, and x 100 or the slow mode speed

among x 1/2, x 1/4, x 1/8, and x 1/16. When the

beginning of the content is reached, it pauses.

 Fast forward while playback or PAUSE. Each press

toggles the forward speed among x 2, x 4, x 8, x 20,

x 50, and x 100 or the slow mode speed among

x 1/16, x 1/8, x 1/4, and x 1/2. When the end of the

content is reached, it pauses.

 Skips 15 seconds backward and plays back or

pauses while in PAUSE

 Skips 15 seconds forward and plays back or pauses

while in PAUSE

 Plays back the content

 Pauses the playback

 Stops the Player and returns to the previous screen

(List/Thumbnail/Thumbnail List)

 Same as  (only fast forward function while in the

slow mode)

ToolRandomRepeatA-B

XXXX

2006/11/30 00:00:59

Playback

R A-B

RDM

9 117 6

 Same as  (only fast reverse function while in the

slow mode)

AUTO/DIRECT

(Blue)

Sets A-B repeat mode. Sets the desired point A to

start and B to end during playback. To cancel the

mode, press AUTO/DIRECT (Blue) on the remote

control.

STEREO/

F.S.SURR (Red)

Every press toggles the repeat mode among No

Repeat and Repeat Once or among No Repeat,

Repeat Once and Repeat All while in Playlist

STANDARD

(Green)

Available only in Playlist or Consecutive Playback

mode. Every press toggles the random mode

between Random Off and Random On.

ADV SURR

(Yellow)

Switches the Tool Menu display on and off. Even if

the Tool Menu is displayed while content is played

back, a movie is kept playing but the time counter

and progress bar do not function.

DISP Displays the Player status at the bottom of the

screen while a movie is played back. Another press

of the key displays a key guide, as well. Pressing the

key once more cancels all the information display.

AUDIO Every press of the key toggles the audio mode

among L + R, L and R

RETURN Same function as 

VOL+, VOL– Adjusts the sound volume

MUTE Mutes the sound

Play modes

Time Search (Tool Menu) Plays back the selected content from

the time preset on the Movie Player

Slow

Playback

(Tool Menu) Plays back the content in slow mode on

the Movie Player

Add to My

Playlist

(Tool Menu) Adds the selected content to My Playlist

List

Stop Movie

Player

, RETURN Stops the Movie Player

Fast

Forward/

Fast Reverse

/,





See the key guide table

Forward/

Reverse

(15 sec.)

/ See the key guide table

Play ENTER,



See the key guide table

A-B Repeat

Mode

AUTO/

DIRECT

(Blue)

See the key guide table

Repeat

Mode

STEREO/

F.S.SURR

(Red)

See the key guide table

Random

Mode

STANDARD

(Green)

See the key guide table

(Tool Menu) ADV SURR

(Yellow)

See the key guide table

Button(s) Function

SC_09TX.book Page 84 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs

Note

• Some functions may not be supported depending on

the server type or version used.

• During playback, an error may arise in time-related

information depending on the content or server

software.

• Some functions may not be supported depending on

the content.

Time Search

1 In playback mode or PAUSE, press

ADV SURR

(Yellow),

then select ‘

Time Search

’ from the Tool Menu

(

/

then

ENTER

A Time Search dialog screen appears.

2 Select ‘

Hour

’ and/or ‘

Minute

’ for ‘

Input Time

’ (

/

/

then

ENTER

Enter the desired time using buttons 0 to 9.

3Press

ENTER

after the entry is complete.

4 Select ‘

’ (



then

ENTER

The movie begins playing from the time you set.

To cancel the Time Search, select ‘Cancel’ and press

ENTER.

Note

• This function may not be supported depending on the

content or server software.

• An error may arise in time-related information

depending on the content or server software.

•Only Cancel can be selected when you have entered

a time exceeding the content’s time range.

Slow Playback

1 In playback mode or PAUSE, press

ADV SURR

(Yellow)

then select ‘

Slow Playback

’ from the Tool

Menu (

/

then

ENTER

2Press

ENTER

Slow playback begins. You can change the playback

speed by pressing / while in the slow mode.

To discontinue slow playback, press ENTER or . The

system returns to the normal playback mode.

Note

• This function may not be supported depending on the

content.

Add to My Playlist

1 While navigating or playing, select the file to be

added to My Playlist (

///

then

ENTER

2Press

ADV SURR (Yellow)

then select ‘

Add to My

Playlist

’ from the Tool Menu (

/

then

ENTER

A Playlist Selection dialog screen appears.

3 Select a Playlist (

/

then

ENTER

A check mark is provided beside the selected Playlist.

When you select a different Playlist and press ENTER, the

mark jumps to the new Playlist from the previously

selected one.

4Select ‘

’ (



then

ENTER

The file is added to the selected Playlist.

To cancel the operation, select ‘Cancel’ then press

ENTER.

Fast Forward/Fast Reverse

• While playing content, press and hold



for Fast

Reverse or press and hold



for Fast Forward.

Forward/Reverse (15 sec.)

• While playing content, press and hold





jump backward or forward in 15-second increments.

A-B Repeat Mode

1 While playing content, press

AUTO

DIRECT

(Blue)

where you want repeat to start.

2Press

AUTO

DIRECT

(Blue) again where you want

repeat to end.

The Player status appears on the screen and the A-B

mode icon changes.

The selected movie scenes are repeatedly played back.

To return to normal mode, press AUTO/DIRECT (Blue)

again while in the A-B repeat mode.

Time Search

OK Cancel

Input Time

Min

Playlist1 20

Playlist2 0

Playlist3 0

Playlist4 0

Playlist5 0

Playlist Selection

OK Cancel

Select a Playlist to register

SC_09TX.book Page 85 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs

Note

• The A-B repeat function is only available during

playback in normal mode.

• If the screen display doesn’t match the player status,

a malfunction may have occurred. Stop playback,

then try the operation again.

Repeat Mode

1 While playing content in the Media Navigator or

USB device, press

STEREO/F.S.SURR (Red)

to select

‘

Repeat Once

’.

The title being played is repeated.

2 Press

STEREO/F.S.SURR (Red)

again to cancel the

repeat mode (‘

Repeat Off

’ is selected).

After playing the currently selected title, the Player stops.

Note

• When playing content in the Playlist, you can select

from Repeat Off, Repeat All (plays all items in the

Playlist repeatedly) or Repeat Once (plays the

content being watched repeatedly).

Random Mode

1 While playing content in the Playlist, press

STANDARD (Green)

to select ‘

Random On

’.

Random Repeat playback starts.

2 Press

STANDARD (Green)

again to cancel the

random mode (‘

Random Off

’ is selected).

Note

• The Random Repeat mode is only available for

content in the Playlist, or in Consecutive Playback

mode.

Enjoying music files

You can display the menu as a List, Thumbnail or

Thumbnail List screen. Press ADV SURR (Yellow)

then select an option under Change view on the Tool

Menu. You can also navigate through the subsequent

or preceding menu levels in the server or USB device

by pressing /// or ENTER.

When you select music content from the server menu

on the Media Navigator screen, the Music Player

automatically launches. Select a category, folder, or

device to access the submenu containing the

required file or content. The Music Player screen

appears when you select a music file from My Playlist,

just like selecting a file in the server.

Note

• The Music Player only displays a List screen.

Screen Components

1 Category or Folder name

2 Jacket image (Music icon)

3 Playing Music icon

4 Contents list

5 Number of items

6 Detailed display

7 Play status

8 Time counter

9 Key guide

10 Progress bar

11 A-B repeat mode icon

12 Repeat mode icon

13 Random mode icon

Music Player key guide

Button(s) Function

 Moves up a cursor to a title above

 Moves down a cursor to a title below

ENTER Plays back the selected music content. Pauses the

music content being played if it is highlighted in

the Playlist screen or plays the selected music

content if different content is highlighted by

pressing /.

 Fast reverse during playback or when in PAUSE.

Each press toggles the reverse speed among x 2,

x 4, x 8, x 20, x 50, and x 100. When the beginning

of the content is reached, it pauses.

 Fast forward during playback or when in PAUSE.

Each press toggles the forward speed among x 2,

x 4, x 8, x 20, x 50, and x 100. When the end of the

content is reached, it pauses.

RETURN Returns to the previous screen (List/Thumbnail/

Thumbnail List). Content being played does not

stop.

RDM

XXXX

All Music

2/20

XXXX

00:01:00

Other

ToolRandomRepeatA-B

Playback

A-B

8 11 129 7

SC_09TX.book Page 86 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs

Note

• Files may not be played back properly depending on

the content.

• Setup procedures for the above play modes are the

same as for the Movie Player.

• Refer to page 82 for the color button ADV SURR

(Yellow) (Tool Menu).

Note

• Some functions may not be supported depending on

the server type or version used.

• Playback continues even when you move from the

Player screen to the previously selected screen by

pressing RETURN.

A-B Repeat Mode

1 While playing content, press

AUTO/DIRECT (Blue)

where you want repeat to start.

2Press

AUTO/DIRECT (Blue)

again where you want

repeat to end.

The Player status appears on the screen and the A-B

repeat mode icon changes.

The selected part of the title is repeatedly played back.

To return to normal mode, press AUTO/DIRECT (Blue)

again while in the A-B repeat mode.

Note

• The A-B repeat function is only available during

playback in normal mode.

Repeat Mode

1 While playing content in the Media Navigator, USB

device or Playlist, press

STEREO/F.S.SURR

(Red) to

select ‘

Repeat All

’.

All titles in the folder or Playlist are played repeatedly.

2Press

STEREO/F.S.SURR

(Red) again to cancel the

repeat mode (‘

Repeat Once

’ is selected).

The title being played is repeated.

3Press

STEREO/F.S.SURR

(Red) once more to cancel

the repeat mode (‘

Repeat Off

’ is selected).

After playing the currently selected title, the Player stops.

Random Mode

1 While playing content in the Playlist, press

STANDARD (Green)

to select ‘

Random On

’.

Random Repeat playback starts.

2Press

STANDARD (Green)

again to cancel the

random mode (‘

Random Off

’ is selected).

 Plays back the selected content. Pauses while in

playback and plays while in PAUSE.

 Pauses the playback

 Stops the Player and does not return to the

previous screen (Selecting the Stop Music from

the Tool Menu also stops the Player.)

 Same as .

 Same as .

AUTO/DIRECT

(Blue)

Sets A-B repeat mode. Sets the desired point A to

start and B to end during playback. To cancel the

mode, press AUTO/DIRECT (Blue) on the remote

control.

STEREO/

F.S.SURR (Red)

Every press toggles the repeat mode among No

Repeat, Repeat Once and Repeat All

STANDARD

(Green)

Every press toggles the random mode among

Random Off and Random On

ADV SURR

(Yellow)

Displays the Tool Menu. Even if the Tool Menu is

displayed while content is played back, music is

kept playing but the time counter and progress bar

do not function.

VOL+, VOL– Adjusts the sound volume

MUTE Mutes the sound

Play modes

Add to My

Playlist

(Tool Menu) Adds the selected content to My Playlist

List

Time Search (Tool Menu) Plays back the selected content from

the time preset on the Music Player

Stop Music (Tool Menu),



Stops the Music Player

Fast

Forward/

Fast Reverse

/,





See the key guide table

Moves Up/

Down

a cursor

/ See the key guide table

Play ENTER,  See the key guide table

A-B Repeat

Mode

AUTO/

DIRECT

(Blue)

See the key guide table

Repeat

Mode

STEREO/

F.S.SURR

(Red)

See the key guide table

Random

Mode

STANDARD

(Green)

See the key guide table

(Tool Menu) ADV SURR

(Yellow)

See the key guide table

Button(s) Function

SC_09TX.book Page 87 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs

Enjoying photo files

You can display the menu as a List, Thumbnail or

Thumbnail List screen. Press ADV SURR (Yellow) then

select an option under Change view on the Tool Menu.

You can also navigate through the subsequent or

preceding menu levels in the server or USB device by

pressing /// or ENTER.

When you select photo content from the server menu on

the Media Navigator screen, the Photo Player

automatically launches. The selected content is

displayed in full screen by pressing ENTER. Select a

category, folder or device to access the submenu

containing the required file or content.

Pressing ENTER again allows a slideshow to begin. After

a slideshow launches, pressing ENTER toggles between

PLAY and PAUSE. Instead of pressing ENTER twice, you

can press  to start the slideshow immediately.

The Photo Player screen appears when you select a photo

file from My Playlist, just like selecting a file in the server.

Screen Components

1 Photo icon

2 File name

3 Folder name, etc.

4 Date

5 Number of items*

6 Play status*

7 Key guide

8 Progress bar*

9 Repeat mode icon

10 Random mode icon

* Displays only when playing the slideshow.

Photo Player key guide

ToolRandomRepeat

XXXX

2006/11/30

Playback

6 / 27

RDM

7 56

Button(s) Function

ENTER Starts displaying a photo or playing a slideshow.

Pauses while playback or plays back while in

PAUSE.

RETURN Stops the Player and returns to the previous screen

(List/Thumbnail/Thumbnail List)

,  Displays the previous image content

,  Display the next image content

 Plays a slideshow

 Pauses the slideshow

 Stops the Player and returns to the previous screen

(List/Thumbnail/Thumbnail List)

 Rotates the image 90º clockwise. Each press

toggles the rotation angle by 90º among 90º, 180º,

270º and 0º.

 Rotates the image 90º counter-clockwise. Each

press toggles the rotation angle by 90º among

270º, 180º, 90º, and 0º.

AUTO/DIRECT

(Blue)

Rotates the image 90º clockwise. Each press

toggles the rotation angle by 90º among 90º, 180º,

270º and 0º.

STEREO/

F.S.SURR (Red)

Available only when playing the slideshow. Every

press toggles the repeat mode between No Repeat

and Repeat All

STANDARD

(Green)

Available only when playing the slideshow. Every

press toggles the random mode between Random

Off and Random On

ADV SURR

(Yellow)

Displays the Tool Menu. If the Tool Menu is

displayed while a slideshow is played, the

slideshow and BGM are paused.

DISP Displays the Player status at the bottom of the

screen while image content is played. Another

press of the key displays a key guide

, as well. No

Player information is displayed when an image is

shown in full screen (no slideshow has been

started). Other information may display. Pressing

the key once more cancels all the information

display.

VOL+, VOL– Adjusts the sound volume

MUTE Mutes the sound

Play modes

BGM Setup (Tool Menu) Sets up BGM

Slide Show

Setup

(Tool Menu) Allows various slideshow setups on the

Photo player

Add to My

Playlist

(Tool Menu) Adds the selected content to My Playlist

List

Stop Photo

Player

, RETURN Stops the Photo Player

Move File

Forward/

Backward

(///

)

See the key guide table

Slideshow ENTER,  See the key guide table

SC_09TX.book Page 88 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs

• Setup procedures for the above play modes are the

same as for the Movie Player.

• Refer to page 82 for the color button ADV SURR

(Yellow) (Tool Menu).

Note

• Some functions may not be supported depending on

the server type or version used.

• In rare cases, the image on the screen may appear

jagged when photo content is selected directly from

a USB device. If this is the case, the problem may be

solved by viewing the photo content through the

network after having transferred it to the server PC.

• Even with the supported format, files may not be

played properly depending on the content.

Setting up the slideshow

You can enjoy a slideshow with music in the background.

To activate this feature, you must register music content

in My Playlist List beforehand (see My Playlist on page 83

and Setting up BGM for the slideshow).

1Press

HOME MEDIA GALLERY

The Home Media Gallery screen is displayed.

2 Select ‘

Media Navigator

’ (

/

then

ENTER

3Press

ADV SURR (Yellow)

A pop-up screen of the Tool Menu appears.

4 Select ‘

Slide Show Setup

’ (

/

then

ENTER

5 Select the desired setup item (

/

then

ENTER

6 Enter the setting in the ‘

Effect

’ or ‘

Interval

’ box (

/



then

ENTER

Repeat steps 5 and 6 to enter another setup.

7Select ‘

’ (



then

ENTER

The slideshow setup finishes.

Note

• After setting the Interval time, it may take longer

than the preset time as the Interval time means the

time up until the Home Media Gallery starts

obtaining the next image. Key operations may not

work while obtaining the next image.

Setting up BGM for the slideshow

1Press

HOME MEDIA GALLERY

The Home Media Gallery screen is displayed.

2 Select photo content in the Media Navigator, USB

device or My Playlist (

///

then

ENTER

The Photo Player launches and photo content is

displayed in full screen.

3Press

ADV SURR

(Yellow) then select ‘

BGM Setup

’

from the Tool Menu (

/

then

ENTER

A BGM Setup dialog screen appears.

4 Select a Playlist from the list as BGM (

/

then

ENTER

A check mark is provided beside the selected Playlist.

When you select a different Playlist and press ENTER, the

mark jumps to the new Playlist from the previously

selected one.

5Select ‘

BGM ON

’, ‘

BGM ON (Random)

’ or ‘

BGM

OFF

’ from the BGM status box (

/

then

ENTER

6Select ‘

’ (



then

ENTER

Note

• When a slideshow is started while a music file is

playing, playback of the music file continues.

Rotate AUTO/

DIRECT

(Blue),

/

See the key guide table

Repeat

Mode

STEREO/

F.S.SURR

(Red)

See the key guide table

Random

Mode

STANDARD

(Green)

See the key guide table

(Tool Menu) ADV SURR

(Yellow)

See the key guide table

Play modes

Slide Show Setup

Effect

OK Cancel

Interval 3 seconds

Auto

Playlist1 20

Playlist2 0

Playlist3 0

Playlist4 0

Playlist5 0

BGM Setup

BGM ON

OK Cancel

SC_09TX.book Page 89 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs

Starting the slideshow

1 Press

HOME MEDIA GALLERY

The Home Media Gallery screen is displayed.

2 Select a folder containing photo content (

/

then

ENTER

The Thumbnail screen is displayed (Thumbnail List or List

screen is displayed depending on the setting).

3 Select the desired photo file from the Thumbnail

screen (

///

then

ENTER

The photo content is displayed in full screen.

You can start a slideshow by pressing  on the

Thumbnail screen.

4 Press

ENTER



to start a slideshow.

The slideshow starts and photo images in the folder

automatically display one by one. See Setting up the

slideshow on page 89 for setting up the interval time.

To display a key guide, press DISP.

To display the next image content manually, press  or

.

To display the previous image content manually, press 

or .

5Press

ENTER



to stop the slideshow.

The Photo Player goes into PAUSE.

6 Press

ENTER

again to resume the slideshow.

To cancel the slideshow and stop the Photo Player, press

RETURN or  during the playback. The previous screen

returns.

Note

• When you press ///, / while photo

content is displayed, the Photo Player goes into

PAUSE.

Rotating the image

1 Press

HOME MEDIA GALLERY

The Home Media Gallery screen is displayed.

2 Select photo content in the Media Navigator, USB

device or My Playlist (

///

then

ENTER

The photo content is displayed in full screen. To stop the

slideshow, press ENTER again.

3 Press

ENTER



to start a slideshow.

The slideshow starts and photo images in the folder

automatically display one by one.

To display a key guide, press DISP.

4 While using Photo Player, press

AUTO/DIRECT

(Blue)

to rotate a photo.

The displayed image rotates by one quarter clockwise.

Each time AUTO/DIRECT (Blue) is pressed, the image

rotates; 90º, 180º, 270º and Rotate Off.

The Photo Player goes into PAUSE (the slideshow is in

Stop mode).

5 Press

ENTER

again to resume the slideshow.

The selected rotation mode is only effective for the image

being displayed. The default setting (Rotate Off) returns

when you move and display content on a different screen.

Repeating the slideshow

1 While playing a slideshow, press

STEREO/F.S.SURR

(Red)

to select ‘

Repeat All

’.

The slideshow being played is repeated.

2 Press

STEREO/F.S.SURR (Red)

again to cancel the

repeat mode (‘

Repeat Off

’ is selected).

After playing the currently selected slideshow, the Player

stops.

Playing the slideshow at random

1 While playing a slideshow, press

STANDARD

(Green)

to select ‘

Random On

’.

Random playback starts.

2 Press

STANDARD (Green)

again to cancel the

random mode (‘

Random Off

’ is selected).

Other useful functions

You can search the desired items contained in the Folder

or Contents List by word. Searched results are displayed

on the screen.

1 Press

HOME MEDIA GALLERY

The Home Media Gallery screen is displayed.

2 Select the desired folder and/or content in the

Media Navigator (

///

then

ENTER

3 Press

ADV SURR (Yellow)

then select ‘

’ from

the Tool Menu (

/

then

ENTER

A Search dialog screen appears.

Title

XXXX

Album

XXXX

Date

2006/11/19

Server

XXXXXX

All Photos

1/27

Tool

SC_09TX.book Page 90 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs

4 Select the ‘

Contains the following

’ box in ‘

Set the

search condition:

’ (



then

ENTER

The software keyboard appears on the screen.

5 Enter the word for search on the software

keyboard (

///

then

ENTER

6 Select ‘

’ on the software keyboard (

/

then

ENTER

The software keyboard disappears.

To cancel the search, select ‘Cancel’ then press ENTER.

7 Select ‘

’ on the ‘

’ dialog screen (



then

ENTER

The searching starts based on the word entered and

search results are displayed.

Even while searching, you can select content to play. To

return to the search screen, press RETURN during

playback.

8Press

RETURN

to cancel the search mode.

Note

• Search may not be available depending on the server

used.

Sort

You can sort the items contained in the Folder or

Contents List.

1Press

HOME MEDIA GALLERY

The Home Media Gallery screen is displayed.

2 Select the desired folder and/or content in the

Media Navigator (

///

then

ENTER

3Press

ADV SURR (Yellow)

then select ‘

Sort

’ from

the Tool Menu (

/

then

ENTER

A Sort dialog screen appears.

4Select ‘

Bottom-Up

’ or ‘

Top-Down

’ in the ‘

Sort

Order

’ box (



then

ENTER

5Select ‘

’ on the ‘

Sort

’ dialog screen (



then

ENTER

The sorting starts based on your selection and sort

results are displayed.

Even while sorting, you can select content to play. To

return to the sort screen, press RETURN during playback.

6Press

RETURN

to cancel the sort mode.

Note

•The Select a sorting order. screen can be displayed

while navigating through the music categories.

Adding files to My Playlist

The Home Media Gallery function provides My Playlist -

a self-contained play list that allows you to bookmark your

favorite movie, music and photo files from the network.

You can register, edit, and sort up to 100 files in each

Playlist List.

1Press

HOME MEDIA GALLERY

The Home Media Gallery screen is displayed.

2Select ‘

Media Navigator

’ (

/

then

ENTER

3 Select the desired music content to add to ‘

Playlist

’ (

/

then

ENTER

4Press

ADV SURR

(Yellow), then select ‘

Add to My

Playlist

’ from the Tool Menu (

/

then

ENTER

A dialog screen appears.

5 Select the Playlist to which you want to add the

contents (

/

then

ENTER

A check mark is provided in the box at the selected

Playlist List.

XXXX

1/24

Tool

Title

XXXX

Album

XXXX

Date

2006/11/30

Play Time

00:00:59

Server

XXXXXX

Contains the following:

Title

Set the search condition.

OK Cancel

XXXX

1/24

Tool

Title

XXXX

Album

XXXX

Date

2006/11/30

Play Time

00:00:59

Server

XXXXXX

Sort

Bottom-Up

Sort Order

Title

Select a sorting order.

OK Cancel

Playlist1 20

Playlist2 0

Playlist3 0

Playlist4 0

Playlist5 0

Playlist Selection

Select a Playlist to register

OK Cancel

SC_09TX.book Page 91 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs

6 Select ‘

’ on the ‘

Playlist Selection

’ dialog screen.

The selected content is added to the Playlist.

Note

• When giving a slideshow of photo content, you can

use Music Playlist as for background music.

Setup

The Setup is used for Network Setup, Auto

Connection Setup, Default Settings, Software

Update and Home Media Gallery Version.

1 Press

HOME MEDIA GALLERY

The Home Media Gallery screen is displayed.

2 Select ‘

Setup

’ (

/

then

ENTER

3 Select ‘

Network Setup

’, ‘

Auto Connection Setup

’,

‘

Default Settings

’, ‘

Software Update

’ and ‘

Home

Media Gallery Version

’ (

/

then

ENTER

Network Setup

When you select Network Setup from the Setup menu,

a submenu is displayed to select Auto or Manual for

network connections.

To automatically set:

The following setup is effective for Auto only. To perform

the procedure, DHCP on your server or router must be

valid.

1 Select ‘

Automatically acquire IP

’ then press

ENTER

(



then

ENTER

2 Select ‘

Yes

’ (

/

then

ENTER

3 Select ‘

’ (



then

ENTER

A restart dialog screen appears.

4 Press

ENTER

again on the dialog screen.

The setup finishes.

The system restarts then the Home Media Gallery screen

returns.

To manually set:

Before setting up, check your media server for IP Address

and Subnet mask.

1 Select ‘

Automatically acquire IP

’ then press

ENTER

(



then

ENTER

2 Select ‘

’ (

/

then

ENTER

3 Select the setup item’s box (

///

then

ENTER

The screen turns to entry mode for IP Address and

Subnet mask.

No need to enter Default Gateway and DNS Server.

4 Enter the figures using buttons

Subnet mask (such as 255.255.255.0)

Enter the same figures as you checked.

IP Address (such as 192.168.201.***)

Enter the same figures as used in the media server (PC,

etc.) you use. For ***, enter 3-digit figures (0 – 254) that

have not been used for network connections yet.

5 Press

ENTER

on the setup item’s box after the entry

is complete.

The screen turns to setup selection mode.

Repeat steps 2 to 4 to complete the necessary setup.

6 Select ‘

’ (



then

ENTER

A restart dialog screen appears.

7 Press

ENTER

again on the dialog screen.

The setup finishes.

The system restarts then the Home Media Gallery screen

returns.

Auto Connection Setup

When you enjoy content on the network, you can select

from the following options: Last Connected Server and

Single Server/USB. See Auto Connection Setup on

page 95.

For USB content, the Device List is displayed on the

screen if you have not checked in the Single Server/USB

box after selecting Setup and then Auto Connection

Setup. You can select the desired device and then

content in it. If you have checked in the box, the list is

skipped (default setting) and you can see the folder(s) or

file(s) in the USB device that has a single directory.

Default Settings

Setups you have entered within the Home Media Gallery

function return to default. When you select ‘Reset’, a

confirmation screen To activate the default settings,

restart Home Media Gallery. will appear. Press ENTER

to reset to default. When you select ‘Cancel’, the previous

screen displays ( then ENTER).

Software Update

Information on software updates may be posted on the

Pioneer website.

http://www.pioneerelectronics.com

Network Setup

Auto Connection Setup

Default Settings

Software Update

Home Media Gallery Version

Setup

1/5

SC_09TX.book Page 92 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs

Home Media Gallery Version

You can confirm the version and copyright information

on the Home Media Gallery software. Select ‘OK’ to

return to the previous screen (ENTER).

Editing files in My Playlist

1Press

HOME MEDIA GALLERY

The Home Media Gallery screen is displayed.

2 Select ‘

My Playlist

’ (

/

then

ENTER

3 Select ‘

Movie Playlist

’, ‘

Music Playlist

’ or ‘

Photo

Playlist

’ from the Playlist category (

/

then

ENTER

Five playlists are displayed.

Playlist names can be changed with the Change Name

command. The order of files in a playlist can be changed

using the Move command. Files can be deleted from

playlists using the Delete from My Playlist command.

For details, refer to the descriptions of the individual

commands.

Change Name

1 Choose the playlist whose name you want to

change, then press

ADV SURR

(Yellow) (

/

2 Select ‘

Change Name

’ from the Tool Menu (

/

then

ENTER

A dialog screen appears.

3 Select ‘

Playlist Name

’ (



then

ENTER

The software keyboard appears.

4 Select ‘

’ on the software keyboard (

///

then

ENTER

The software keyboard disappears and Playlist Name in

the Change Name dialog screen returns.

5 Select ‘

’ when the new name is entered (



then

ENTER

The editing finishes and Change Name dialog screen

disappears.

The new Playlist displays.

The on-screen keyboard (Software Keyboard) is

displayed only when you select ‘Search’ or ‘Change

Name’.

Move

You can change the listing order of the content registered

in My Playlist.

1 Choose the playlist for which you want to change

the order of the contents (

/

then

ENTER

2Press

ADV SURR

(Yellow).

3Select ‘

Move

’ from the Tool Menu (

/

then

ENTER

The content selected is placed in a yellow box (Source

Selection mode).

4 Select the desired content (

/

then

ENTER

The selected content is highlighted in the yellow box. A

specific icon appears on the left (Destination Selection

mode).

5Press

/

to move the content up or down, then

ENTER

The highlight in the yellow box disappears and the

specific icon returns to the original one.

Repeat steps 2 and 3 to move another content.

6Press

RETURN

A Playlist dialog screen appears.

7Select ‘

’ (



then

ENTER

The dialog screen disappears and moving content

finishes.

To cancel, select ‘Cancel’ then ENTER.

Delete from My Playlist

1 Choose the playlist from which you want to delete

contents (

/

then

ENTER

2 Choose the contents you want to delete, then press

ADV SURR

(Yellow) (

/

3Select ‘

Delete from My Playlist

’ from the Tool

Menu (

/

then

ENTER

A dialog screen appears.

4Select ‘

’ (



then

ENTER

The dialog screen disappears and the selected content is

deleted from My Playlist.

To cancel, select ‘Cancel’ then ENTER.

1/5

Title

Playlist1

Tool

Movie Playlist

Soft Keyboard

OK Cancel

Playlist1

Playlist Name

a bcdef gh

ijklmnop

stuvwx

1,2,3...

a,b,c...

A,B,C...

@,$,=...

Delete

Clear

Space

SC_09TX.book Page 93 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs

Playing/displaying files from My Playlist

1 Press

HOME MEDIA GALLERY

The Home Media Gallery screen is displayed.

2 Select ‘

My Playlist

’ (

/

then

ENTER

3 Select the desired Playlist from ‘

Movie Playlist

’,

‘

Music Playlist

’ or ‘

Photo Playlist

’.

4 Select the desired Playlist List (

/

then

ENTER

5 Select the desired content (

///

then

ENTER

The selected content is played or displayed.

To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.

Switching the server

When one or more servers are connected within the

network, you can switch between servers.

1 Press HOME MEDIA GALLERY.

The Home Media Gallery screen is displayed.

2 Select ‘

Media Navigator

’ (

/

then

ENTER

The previous server is selected.

3 Press

ADV SURR (Yellow)

to open the Tool Menu.

4 Choose ‘

Select Server

’ (

/

then

ENTER

The Server List is displayed.

Pressing RETURN changes the screen to the Home

Media Gallery.

5 Select the desired server (

/

then

ENTER

The screen changes to Media Navigator on the selected

server.

Note

• The Home Media Gallery can memorize previously

connected servers. When the Media Navigator is

launched, available servers are automatically

searched and connected. To switch between

connected servers, choose server to another one,

select ‘Select Server’ from the Tool Menu.

• If a previously connected server can not be found or

if the server is in the sleep mode, the server name is

dimmed (grayed out).

• You cannot select a server unless that media server

has been set up.

Resetting to default

You can reset the setups you have entered within the

Home Media Gallery function to default (see Default

Settings on page 92).

1 Press

HOME MEDIA GALLERY

The Home Media Gallery screen is displayed.

2 Select ‘

Setup

’ (

/

then

ENTER

3 Select ‘

Default Settings

’ (

/

then

ENTER

4 Select ‘

Reset

’ (



then

ENTER

A restart dialog screen appears.

5 Press

ENTER

on the dialog screen.

The setup finishes.

The system restarts then the Home Media Gallery screen

returns.

Other convenient features

Screen saver

During navigation, the screen saver launches

automatically if no activity is sensed within five minutes.

• No screen saver is available while a movie or

slideshow is played.

• Pressing any key cancels screen saver. When

canceled with a USB device being connected,

connecting operation resumes.

Software Update

Information on software updates may be posted on the

Pioneer website.

http://www.pioneerelectronics.com

Confirming the existing Home Media Gallery

version

Be sure to check the version of the software you are using

before updating the software. You can check it with the

following procedure.

1 Press

HOME MEDIA GALLERY

The Home Media Gallery screen is displayed.

2 Select ‘

Setup

’ (

/

then

ENTER

3 Select ‘

Home Media Gallery Version

’ (

/

then

ENTER

Jot down the Home Media Gallery Version displayed in

the screen.

Ex.) software Version: 1.0.xxxAVR

4 Select ‘

’ to return to the previous screen (ENTER).

SC_09TX.book Page 94 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs

Glossary

Default Gateway

Default gateway is a node on a computer network that

serves as an access point to another network. A default

gateway (such as a computer and router) is used to

forward all traffic that is not addressed to a station within

the local subnet.

DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol)

Server

Provides a mechanism to allocate IP addresses to client

hosts. In most cases, a broadband router serves as a

DHCP server in a home network.

DLNA (Digital Living Network Alliance)

The DLNA authorized logo makes it easy for consumers

to recognize products that meet the new standard for

home network PCs and other digital devices, as set down

in the DLNA Guidelines for interoperability. This allows

music, video, etc. to be enjoyed from various devices over

a home network. This unit is compatible with music,

photo and video content, and is based on the DLNA

Home Networked Device Interoperability Guidelines v1.0.

This unit can be used to playback music, photos and

video stored on a DLNA-compatible server connected

through a LAN cable.

Digital Living Network Alliance (DLNA) is dedicated to

the simplified sharing of digital content, such as digital

music, photos and video among networked consumer

electronics (CE) and PCs. By establishing a platform of

interoperability based on open industry standards, DLNA

delivers technical design guidelines that companies can

use to develop digital home products that share content

through wired or wireless networks in the home.

DNS (Domain Name Service) Server

DNS Server is a server that determines the name of

network-computer within the Internet. The server

functions to exchange IP address to the hostname,

hostname to the IP address.

Ethernet

A frame-based computer networking technology for local

area networks (LANs). This receiver supports 100BASE-

TX.

IP (Internet Protocol) Address

A unique number that devices use in order to identify and

communicate with each other on a network utilizing the

Internet Protocol standard, such as “192.168.1.xxx”. No

duplicate numbers are allowed within the network.

Auto Connection Setup

For extra convenience, you can toggle between the following

features:

Last Connected

Server

This function stores the server last accessed in

the memory, allowing direct server access the

next time without displaying the Server List

screen.

Single Server/

USB

This function is used only when a USB flash drive

or a single server is connected. You do not need

this function when a multi-card reader, or two or

more servers are connected.

USB:

When USB flash drive is connected, the Devices

List is skipped as long as you have checked in the

Single Server/USB box. If not, the list may be

displayed at any time.

Media Navigator (Server):

When a single server is connected, the Server

List is skipped as long as you have checked in the

Single Server/USB box. If not, the list may be

displayed at any time. When the Last Connected

Server box is checked, the other server setup

option – Single Server/USB – becomes invalid.

Setup

Auto Connection Setup

OK Cancel

Last Connected Server

Single Server/USB

SC_09TX.book Page 95 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs

LAN Cable

A cable that has an eight-pin modular plug on each end

and is different from a telephone plug which has four

pins. A straight cable is used when connecting this

receiver to a home network via a hub. A cross-over cable

is used when connecting directly to a PC. Use category 5

(CAT-5) LAN cables.

MAC (Media Access Control) Address

An address attached to the port of any network device

with an IP address. The MAC address is expressed as

“00:e0:36:xx:xx:xx” and cannot be changed.

Mass Storage Class devices

The standard provides an interface to a variety of storage

devices, such as USB flash drive and digital cameras.

PlaysForSure

This unit incorporates PlaysForSure. “PlaysForSure” is a

new logo program from Microsoft Corporation. You can

check for the PlaysForSure logo at various online stores.

Where you see the PlaysForSure logo, you can be sure

that the digital media you are purchasing (music, video,

pictures) will play on this unit.

Subnet mask

Used when IP addresses are broken into several parts. It

is expressed as “255.255.255.0”. In most cases, the

Subnet mask is automatically assigned by the DHCP

server.

UPnP (Universal Plug and Play)

Architecture for pervasive peer-to-peer network

connectivity of devices of all form factors. It is designed

to bring easy-to-use, flexible, standardsbased

connectivity to ad-hoc or unmanaged networks whether

in the home, in a small business, public spaces, or

attached to the Internet.

USB (Universal Serial Bus)

USB provides a serial bus standard for connecting

devices, usually to computers such as PCs. This receiver

supports the Mass Storage Class.

Windows Media Connect

Microsoft Windows Media Connect is a new technology

to distribute music, photos and video stored on a PC with

Windows XP installed to a stereo system of TV. Using this

technology you can playback files stored on the PC from

various devices wherever you like in your home.

Windows Media DRM

Windows Media DRM is copyright protection technology

developed by Microsoft Corporation. It enables content

providers to distribute over the Internet music, video and

other digital media content in a protected, encrypted file

format.

Windows Media Player

A free digital media player application provided by

Microsoft that is used for playing audio, video and

images on PCs.

Windows Media Player 11

The functionality of Windows Media Connect has been

integrated into this version of Windows Media Player.

After installing Windows Media Player 11 Windows

Media Connect will not function. See Microsoft’s website

for details.

Details of compatible formats

See Supported file formats on page 78 for a list of the file

extensions with which this receiver is compatible.

Compatible movie file formats

• MPEG-1/2 PS

MP@HL

• MPEG-2 TS/TTS

MP@HL

• WMV (not copyright protected)

MP@HL

• WMV (copyright protected)

MP@ML

• MPEG-4

ASP

Compatible audio file formats

• MPEG-1 Audio Layer 3 (MP3)

Sampling frequency: Up to 48 kHz

Bit rate: Up to 320 kbps

No. channels: Up to 2

• MPEG-4 AAC (AAC LC)

Sampling frequency: Up to 48 kHz

Bit rate: Up to 320 kbps

No. channels: Up to 2

• Linear PCM (LPCM)

Sampling frequency: 8 kHz to 64 kHz

Quantization bits: 16

No. channels: Up to 2

Note

1 • Files stored on USB memory devices and protected by digital copyright management (DRM/WMDRM) cannot be played.

• Files protected by digital copyright management (DRM/WMDRM) can only be played when connected to a DRM/WMDRM-compatible media server.

SC_09TX.book Page 96 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs

• WAV

Sampling frequency: 8 kHz to 64 kHz

Quantization bits: 16

No. channels: Up to 2

• Windows Media Audio 9 (WMA9)

Sampling frequency: Up to 48 kHz

Bit rate: Up to 768 kbps

No. channels: Up to 2

• Windows Media Audio 9 Professional (WMA9

Pro)

Sampling frequency: Up to 48 kHz

Bit rate: Up to 768 kbps

No. channels: Up to 6*

* Multi-channel audio signals are down-mixed to 2

channels.

Compatible image file formats

• JPEG

Resolution:

– Up to 8192 x 8192 pixels (YUV444, YUV422, YUV420)

– 1280 x 768 pixels (RGB and grayscale)

(This receiver is not compatible with progressive

JPEG images.)

• BMP

Resolution: No restrictions

• PNG

Resolution: Up to 2048 x 1024 pixels

• TIFF

Resolution: Up to 2048 x 1024 pixels

Compression format: Uncompressed, ZIP, LZW,

Packbits, Huffman RLE, CCITT Fax 3/4

• GIF

Resolution: Up to 2048 x 1024 pixels

(This receiver is not compatible with animated GIF

images.)

SC_09TX.book Page 97 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

HDMI Control

Chapter 10

HDMI Control

By connecting this receiver to an HDMI Control-

compatible Pioneer plasma display or the HDD/DVD

recorder with an HDMI cable, you can control this

receiver from the remote control of a connected plasma

display, as well as have the connected plasma display

automatically change inputs in response to operations

carried out on this unit.

Refer to the operating manual for your plasma display for

more information about which operations can be carried

out by connecting via HDMI cable.

• You cannot use this function with components that

do not support HDMI Control.

• We cannot guarantee this unit will work with HDMI

Control-compatible components other than those

made by Pioneer.

Making the HDMI Control connections

You can use synchronized operation for a connected

plasma display and up to six other components.

Be sure to connect the plasma display’s audio cable to

the audio input of this unit.

Important

• When connecting this system or changing

connections, be sure to switch the power off and

disconnect the power cord from the wall socket.

After completing all connections, connect the power

cords to the wall socket.

• After connecting this receiver to an AC outlet, a 15

second initialization process begins. You cannot

carry out any operations during initialization. The

HDMI indicator on the display unit blinks during

initialization, and you can turn this receiver on once

it has stopped blinking.

• To get the most out of this function, we recommend

that you connect your HDMI component not to a

plasma display but rather directly to the HDMI

terminal on this receiver.

• To use the HDMI control function, connect this

receiver and plasma TV using the HDMI OUT 1

terminal. Connecting the HDMI control compatible

component using the HDMI OUT 2 terminal may

result in malfunction. If this happens, turn off the

HDMI control compatible component’s HDMI control

setting.

• HDMI Control is compatible with up to six units, 3

DVD or Blu-ray disc players and 3 DVD or Blu-ray disc

recorders. (The maximum number of units may differ

depending on the connected plasma display.)

S400S400

(AUDIO)

(

For LD

)

ASSIGNABLE

VIDEOAUDIO

AUDIO

LAN (10/100)

ZONE3

OUT

ZONE2

OUT

ZONE2

OUT

ZONE3

OUT

MONITOR

OUT

CONTROL

COMPONENT

VIDEO

ASSIGN-

ABLE

ASSIGN-

ABLE

VIDEO

OUT

SUB

WOOFER

FRONT

CENTER

EXTRA

SUR-

ROUND

(

Single

)

SUB W.

FRONT

CENTER

SUR-

ROUND

SUR-

ROUND

BACK

SURROUND

BACK

PRE OUT

MULTI CH

SIRIUS

iPod

LOOP

ANTENNA

OUT1

(HDMI CTRL) OUT2

HDMI

RF IN

(TV)

(SAT)

(DVR/

VCR 1)

(DVR/

VCR 2)

(VIDEO/

GAME

(CD-R/

TAPE/

MD)

(

DVD/LD

)

(

)

(

)

(SA

)

COAXIAL

1 4

ASSIGNABLE

OPTICAL

1 6

ZONE2

OUT

SOURCE

OUT

ZONE3

/SOURCE

OUT

1 2 34

12 V TRIGGER

(

DC OUT 12V TOTAL 250 mA MAX

)

RS-

232C

VIDEO/

GAME 1

SAT

AUX

CD-R/

TAP E/

REC

SEL

OUT

SACD

PHONO

DVD/ LD

(DVD/LD)

(VIDEO/

GAME

(BD)

(DVR/VCR 1)

(DVR/VCR 2)

ZONE2

OUT

DVR/

VCR 2

DVR/

VCR 1

REC SEL

OUT

REC SEL

OUT

REC SEL

OUT

REC SEL

OUT

S-VIDEO

AUDIO

ASSIGNABLE

OPTICAL

1 6

(TV)

ASSIGNABLE

OUT1

(HDMI CTRL)

HDMI

AV OUT

AUDIORL

DIGITAL OUT

HDMI IN

HDMI OUT

SC-09TX

HDMI/DVI-equipped component

HDMI/DVI-compatible monitor

or plasma display

SC_09TX.book Page 98 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

HDMI Control

Setting the HDMI options

You must adjust the settings of this receiver as well as

HDMI Control-compatible connected components in

order to make use of the HDMI Control function. For

more information see the operating instructions for each

component.

Setting the HDMI Control mode

Choose whether to set this unit’s HDMI Control function

ON or OFF. You will need to set it to ON to use the HDMI

Control function.

• When using a TV not manufactured by Pioneer, put

this setting to OFF.

1 Set the operation selector switch to

RCV

, then press

the

SETUP

button.

2 Select ‘

Other Setup

’, then press

ENTER

3 Select ‘

HDMI Control Setup

’ from the Other Setup

menu.

4 Select the ‘

HDMI Control

’ setting you want.

• ON – Enables the HDMI Control function. When this

unit’s power is turned off and you have a supported

source begin playback while using the HDMI Control

function, the audio and video output from the HDMI

connection are output from the plasma display.

• OFF – The HDMI Control is disabled. Synchronized

operations cannot be used. When this unit’s power is

turned off, audio and video of sources connected via

HDMI are not output.

5 When you’re finished, press

SETUP

You will finish to System Setup menu.

Before using synchronization

Once you have finished all connections and settings, you

must:

1 Put all components into standby mode.

2 Turn the power on for all components, with the

power for the plasma display being turned on last.

3 Choose the HDMI input to which the TV is

connected to this receiver, and see if video output from

connected components displays properly on the screen

on not.

4 Check whether the components connected to all

HDMI inputs are properly displayed.

Synchronized amp mode

Synchronized amp mode begins once you carry out an

operation for the plasma display. For more information,

see the operating manual of your plasma display.

Synchronized amp mode operations

By connecting a component to this receiver with an

HDMI cable you can use synchronized amp mode, which

allows you to synchronize the following operations

• Displays on the plasma display when you mute or

adjust the volume of this receiver.

• The input of this receiver is automatically changed

when playback occurs on a connected component.

• Even if you change this receiver’s input to a device

that is not connected by HDMI, the synchronized

amp mode remains in effect.

• This receiver’s input switches automatically when the

channel is switched on an HDMI control-compatible

plasma TV.

• This receiver’s OSD language switches automatically

when the menu language is switched on an HDMI

control-compatible plasma TV.

• By pressing GENRE when listening to a source from

a HDD/DVD recorder, the most appropriate listening

mode is automatically selected (see Using the genre

synchronizing function on page 41 for more on this).

Canceling synchronized amp mode

Operate the plasma TV to cancel the synchronized amp

mode.

If you cancel synchronized amp mode while connected

via HDMI to a plasma display or while you are watching a

TV programme, the power for this unit is turned off.

Note

1• When HDMI Control is set to ON, the audio/video signals input at the HDMI IN terminals are output at the HDMI OUT terminal even when this receiver

is switched off.

• With HDMI Control set to ON, Input Setup and HDMI Input are automatically set to OFF.

:Return

a. Multi Ch In Setup

b. ZONE Video Setup

c. ZONE Audio Setup

d. SR+ Setup

e. HDMI Control Setup

f. i.LINK Check

g. Display Image

9. Other Setup

DVD/LD

55.0

HDMI Control OFF

9e. HDMI Control Setup

DVD/LD

55.0

:Finish

2 The linked mode remains in effect even when this receiver’s input is switched to something other than HDMI.

SC_09TX.book Page 99 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

HDMI Control

100

About HDMI Control

• Connect the plasma display directly to this receiver.

Interrupting a direct connection with other amps or

an AV converter (such as an HDMI switch) can cause

operational errors.

• Only connect components you intend to use as a

source to the HDMI input of this receiver.

Interrupting a direct connection with other amps or

an AV converter (such as an HDMI switch) can cause

operational errors.

SC_09TX.book Page 100 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Other Settings

101

Chapter 11:

Other Settings

The Input Setup menu

You only need to make settings in the Input Setup menu

if you didn’t hook up your digital equipment according to

the default settings (see Input function default and

possible settings below). In this case, you need to tell the

receiver what equipment is hooked up to which terminal

so the buttons on the remote control correspond to the

components you’ve connected.

1 Switch on the receiver and your TV.

Use the RECEIVER button to switch on.

2 Set the operation selector switch to

RCV

, then press

the

SETUP

button.

An on-screen display (OSD) appears on your TV. Use the

/// buttons and ENTER to navigate through the

screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to

confirm and exit the current menu.

3 Select ‘

Input Setup

’ from the System Setup menu.

4 Select the input function that you want to set up.

The default names correspond with the names next to the

terminals on the rear panel (such as DVD/LD or VIDEO/

GAME 1) which, in turn, correspond with the names on

the remote control.

5 Select the input(s) to which you’ve connected your

component.

For example, if your DVD player only has an optical

output, you will need to change the DVD/LD input

function’s Digital In setting from COAX 1 (default) to the

optical input you’ve connected it to.The numbering

(OPT1 to 6) corresponds with the numbers beside the

inputs on the back of the receiver.

• If you change the setting to an input that has been

previously assigned to another function (for example,

TV), then the setting for that function will

automatically be switched off.

• If your component is connected via a component

video cable to an input terminal other than the

default, you must tell the receiver which input

terminal your component is connected to, or else you

may see the S-Video or composite video signals

instead of the component video signals.

• If you have more than one iLINK component

connected, you can assign each one to a different

input function in the same way (to check your

settings after doing so, see Checking the i.LINK inputs

on page 66).

6 When you’re finished, select ‘

’ to continue to

the next screen.

The second screen of the Input setup has three optional

settings:

• Input Name – You can choose to rename the input

function for easier identification. Select Rename to

do so, or Default to return to the system default.

• 12V Trigger 1 to 4 – After connecting a component

to one of the 12 volt triggers (see Switching

components on and off using the 12 volt trigger on

page 75), select MAIN, ZONE 2, ZONE 3 or OFF for

the corresponding trigger setting to switch it on

automatically along with the (main or sub) zone

specified.

DVD

RECEIVER SOURCE

MAIN

MULTI

OPERATION

ZONE2 3

DVR1

GALLERY

HOME MEDIA

TUNER

iP od HDMI

PHONO

CD-R

DVR2

VIDEO1 VIDEO2

BD TV SAT

SACD

RECEIVER

SOURCE

TV RCV

VOL

TV CONTROL

SOURCE

TV RCV

AUDIO

PARAMETER

TOP MENU

BAND

CATEGORY

STATUS CH LEVEL

T.EDIT

VIDEO

PARAMETER

SETUP

INPUT MUTE

TUNE

ST ST

MUTE

Enter

SETUP

RETURN

SETUP

ENTER

1. Auto MCACC

2. Output Setup

3. Manual MCACC

4. FULL BAND PHASE CTRL

5. Data Management

6. Manual SP Setup

7. Input Setup

8. OSD Language

9. Other Setup

:Exit

System Setup MENU

DVD/LD

55.0

Input DVD

Digital In [ COAX-1 ]

HDMI Input [ Input-1 ]

Component In [ Comp-3 ]

S-Video In [ Input-1 ]

i.LINK In

[ DV-S969AVI ]

RF Input [ OFF ]

( Next )

:Finish

7. Input Setup (1/2)

DVD/LD

55.0

Input DVD

Digital In [ COAX-1 ]

HDMI Input [ Input-1 ]

Component In [ Comp-3 ]

S-Video In [ Input-1 ]

i.LINK In

[ DV-S969AVI ]

RF Input [ OFF ]

( Next )

:Finish

7. Input Setup (1/2)

DVD/LD

55.0

( Back )

DVD/LD

Input Name

Remane

12V Trigger1 [ OFF ]

12V Trigger2 [ OFF ]

12V Trigger3 [ OFF ]

12V Trigger4 [ OFF ]

PDP In (SR+) [ Input-1 ]

:Finish

ENTER : Next

7. Input Setup (2/2)

DVD/LD

55.0

Note

1 For high-definition video (using component video connections), or when digital video conversion is switched off (in Setting the Video options on page 108),

you must connect your TV to this receiver using the same type of video cable as you used to connect your video component.

2 • If you assign i.LINK-equipped components to an input (for example DVD/LD), you will be able to select both audio and video signals from i.LINK-

equipped components using the corresponding input source button (or the INPUT SEL button / INPUT SELECTOR dial). Assigning i.LINK sources also

allows you to keeps the sound settings you’ve made for other input functions.

• An i.LINK-equipped video component should be assigned to the input function to which you have connected the video signal from the component.

• If you assign an i.LINK input to a certain function (for example DVD/LD), then any digital inputs previously assigned to that function will automatically

be set to i.LINK (not assigned).

SC_09TX.book Page 101 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Other Settings

102

• PDP In (SR+) – To control certain functions on this

receiver from a plasma display, select the display

input to which you’ve connected the receiver.

7 When you’re finished, press

RETURN

You will return to the System Setup menu.

Input function default and possible settings

The terminals on the rear of the receiver generally

correspond to the name of one of the input source

functions. If you have connected components to this

receiver differently from (or in addition to) the defaults

below, see The Input Setup menu above to tell the receiver

how you’ve connected up. The dots () indicate possible

assignments.

Changing the OSD display language

(OSD Language)

The language used on the on-screen display can be

changed.

1 Set the operation selector switch to

RCV

, then press

the

SETUP

button.

An on-screen display (OSD) appears on your TV. Use the

/// buttons and ENTER to navigate through the

screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to

confirm and exit the current menu.

2 Select ‘

OSD Language

’ from the System Setup

menu.

3 Select the desired language.

• English (default)

•French

•German

• Spanish

• Russian

• Chinese

4 Select ‘

’ to change the language.

5 When you’re finished, press

RETURN

You will return to the System Setup menu.

Note

1 You will have to make an SR+ cable connection from a CONTROL OUT jack on the display to the CONTROL IN jack on this receiver (opposite from the

setup in Using this receiver with a Pioneer plasma display on page 75). Note that to control this receiver using the remote, you will have to point it at the

plasma display’s remote sensor after making this connection.

Input

source

Input Terminals

Digital i.LINK HDMI

Component

S-Video

DVD/LD COAX 1 



IN 1 IN 1

BD COAX 2 



IN 2 

TV OPT 1 





SAT OPT 2 





DVR/VCR 1 OPT 3 



IN 4 (Fixed)

DVR/VCR 2 OPT 4 



IN 5 (Fixed)

VIDEO/

GAME 1

OPT 5 



IN 3 

VIDEO/

GAME 2

(Fixed)



(Fixed)

HDMI 1

(HDMI-1)

HDMI 2 (HDMI-2)

HDMI 3

(HDMI-3)

HDMI 4 (HDMI-4)

HDMI 5 (HDMI-5)

HDMI 6 (HDMI-6)

MULTI CH



HOME

MEDIA

GALLERY

SIRIUS 

CD COAX 3 

CD-R/

TAPE/MD

OPT 6 

SACD COAX 4 

TUNER

PHONO

iPod

a.With HDMI Control set to ON, assignments cannot be made (see HDMI

Control on page 98).

2 When German, Russian or Chinese is selected, the HOME MEDIA GALLERY input OSD screen is in English.

Input

source

Input Terminals

Digital i.LINK HDMI

Component

S-Video

1. Auto MCACC

2. Output Setup

3. Manual MCACC

4. FULL BAND PHASE CTRL

5. Data Management

6. Manual SP Setup

7. Input Setup

8. OSD Language

9. Other Setup

:Exit

System Setup MENU

DVD/LD

55.0

:Return

8. OSD Language

DVD/LD

55.0

Language English

Setting Change? [ OK ]

:Return

8. OSD Language

DVD/LD

55.0

Language [ English ]

Setting Change? [ OK ]

ENTER:Enter

SC_09TX.book Page 102 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Other Settings

103

The Other Setup menu

The Other Setup menu is where you can make

customized settings to reflect how you are using the

receiver.

1 Switch on the receiver and your TV.

Use the RECEIVER button to switch on.

2 Set the operation selector switch to

RCV

, then press

the

SETUP

button.

An on-screen display (OSD) appears on your TV. Use the

/// buttons and ENTER to navigate through the

screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to

confirm and exit the current menu.

3 Select ‘

Other Setup

’, then press

ENTER

4 Select the setting you want to adjust.

If you are doing this for the first time, you may want to

adjust these settings in order:

• Multi Ch In Setup – Specifies the optional settings

for a multi-channel input.

• ZONE Video Setup – Set the MULTI-ZONE video

conversion function (see ZONE Video Setup on

page 103).

• ZONE Audio Setup – Specify your volume setting for

a MULTI-ZONE setup (see ZONE Audio Setup on

page 104).

• SR+ Setup – Specify how you want to control your

Pioneer plasma display (see SR+ Setup for Pioneer

plasma displays on page 104).

• HDMI Control Setup – Synchronizes this receiver

with your Pioneer component supporting HDMI

Control (see Setting the HDMI Control mode on

page 99).

• iLINK Check – Check which i.LINK-equipped

components you have connected, and which input

function they are assigned to (see Checking the i.LINK

inputs on page 66).

• Display Image – Select the OSD display’s

background pattern (see Select the OSD display’s

background pattern (Display Image) on page 105).

5 Make the adjustments necessary for each setting,

pressing

RETURN

to confirm after each screen.

Multi Channel Input Setup

You can adjust the level of the subwoofer for a multi-

channel input. Also, when the multi-channel input is

selected as an input source, you can display the video

images of other input sources. In the Multi Channel Input

Setup, you can assign a video input to the multi-channel

input.

1Select ‘

Multi Ch In Setup

’ from the Other Setup

menu.

2 Select the ‘

SW Input Gain

’ setting you want.

• 0dB – Outputs sound of the subwoofer at the level

originally recorded on the source.

• +10dB – Outputs sound of the subwoofer at the level

increased by 10 dB.

3 Select the ‘

Video Input

’ setting you want.

When the multi-channel input is selected as an input

source, you can display the video images of other input

sources. The video input can be selected from the

following: DVD/LD, BD, TV, SAT, DVR/VCR 1, DVR/VCR

2, VIDEO/GAME 1, VIDEO/GAME 2, OFF.

4 When you’re finished, press

RETURN

You will return to the Other Setup menu.

ZONE Video Setup

1Select ‘

ZONE Video Setup

’ from the Other Setup

menu.

DVD

RECEIVER SOURCE

MAIN

MULTI

OPERATION

ZONE2 3

DVR1

GALLERY

HOME MEDIA

TUNER

iP od HDMI

PHONO

CD-R

DVR2

VIDEO1 VIDEO2

BD TV SAT

SACD

RECEIVER

SOURCE

TV RCV

VOL

TV CONTROL

SOURCE

TV RCV

AUDIO

PARAMETER

TOP MENU

BAND

CATEGORY

STATUS CH LEVEL

T.EDIT

VIDEO

PARAMETER

SETUP

INPUT MUTE

TUNE

ST ST

MUTE

Enter

SETUP

RETURN

SETUP

ENTER

1. Auto MCACC

2. Output Setup

3. Manual MCACC

4. FULL BAND PHASE CTRL

5. Data Management

6. Manual SP Setup

7. Input Setup

8. OSD Language

9. Other Setup

:Exit

System Setup MENU

DVD/LD

55.0

:Return

a. Multi Ch In Setup

b. ZONE Video Setup

c. ZONE Audio Setup

d. SR+ Setup

e. HDMI Control Setup

f. i.LINK Check

g. Display Image

9. Other Setup

DVD/LD

55.0

:Return

a. Multi Ch In Setup

b. ZONE Video Setup

c. ZONE Audio Setup

d. SR+ Setup

e. HDMI Control Setup

f. i.LINK Check

g. Display Image

9. Other Setup

DVD/LD

55.0

:Finish

SW Input Gain 0dB

Video Input [ DVD ]

9a. Multi Ch In Setup

DVD/LD

55.0

:Finish

SW Input Gain [ +10dB ]

Video Input BD

9a. Multi Ch In Setup

DVD/LD

55.0

:Return

9. Other Setup

DVD/LD

55.0

a. Multi Ch In Setup

b. ZONE Video Setup

c. ZONE Audio Setup

d. SR+ Setup

e. HDMI Control Setup

f. i.LINK Check

g. Display Image

:Return

9b. ZONE Video Setup

DVD/LD

55.0

ZONE 2 VIDEO CONV.

SC_09TX.book Page 103 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Other Settings

104

2 Select whether to set ‘

ZONE 2 VIDEO CONV.

’ to

OFF

• ON – The composite video or S-Video input signals

other than HDMI are converted with respect to

COMPONENT VIDEO ZONE2 OUT or VIDEO ZONE2

OUT.

This way, video signals can be output even if

the input device and the ZONE2 TV monitor are

connected with different types of cables.

• OFF – The ZONE2 video output is not converted. In

this case, connect the input device and ZONE2 TV

monitor with the same type of cable (composite or

component).

3 When you’re finished, press

RETURN

You will return to the Other Setup menu.

ZONE Audio Setup

If you’ve made MULTI-ZONE connections (see MULTI-

ZONE listening on page 71), you may need to specify your

volume setting.

1 Select ‘

ZONE Audio Setup

’ from the Other Setup

menu.

2 Select the ‘

ZONE 3 / RECSEL Setting

’ you want.

You can select the ZONE 3 or RECSEL setting.

• ZONE 3 – Sound is output from AUDIO ZONE3 OUT

jack.

• RECSEL – Sound is output from the CD-R/TAPE/MD

OUT, DVR/VCR 1 OUT or DVR/VCR 2 OUT jack. For

details, see Playing a different source when recording

on page 109.

3 Select the volume level setting of

ZONE 2

and

ZONE 3

• Variable – Use this setting if you’ve connected a

power amplifier in the sub room (this receiver is

simply being used as a pre-amp) and you will be

using this receiver’s controls to adjust the volume.

• Fixed – Use this setting if you’ve connected a fully

integrated amplifier (such as another Pioneer VSX

receiver) in the sub room and want to use that

receiver’s volume controls.

With the Fixed setting, the source is sent from this

receiver at maximum volume, so make sure the volume is

quite low in the sub zone at first, and then experiment to

find the correct level.

4 When you’re finished, press

RETURN

You will return to the Other Setup menu.

SR+ Setup for Pioneer plasma displays

Make the following settings if you have connected a

Pioneer plasma display to this receiver using an SR+

cable. Note that the number of function settings available

will depend on the plasma display you’ve connected.

See also Using this receiver with a Pioneer plasma display

on page 75 and Using the SR+ mode with a Pioneer

plasma display on page 76.

1 Select ‘

SR+ Setup

’ from the Other Setup menu.

2 Select the ‘

PDP Volume Control

’ setting you want.

• OFF – The receiver does not control the volume of the

plasma display.

• ON – When the receiver is switched to one of the

inputs that use the plasma display (DVD/LD, for

example), the volume on the plasma display is muted

so only sound from the receiver is heard.

3 Assign any input source connected to the plasma

display to the corresponding input number.

This matches the receiver’s input source with a

numbered video input on the plasma display. For

example, assign DVD/LD to input-2 if you have

connected the your DVD video output to video input 2 on

the plasma display.

•The Monitor Out Connect should be set to the input

that you’ve used to connect this receiver to your

plasma display.

4 When you’re finished, press

RETURN

You will return to the Other Setup menu.

Note

1 The component video input signal is only output from COMPONENT VIDEO ZONE2 OUT.

2 If you selected 7.2ch+ZONE 2 in the Speaker output setting on page 47, you won’t be able to change the volume level.

:Return

a. Multi Ch In Setup

b. ZONE Video Setup

c. ZONE Audio Setup

d. SR+ Setup

e. HDMI Control Setup

f. i.LINK Check

g. Display Image

9. Other Setup

DVD/LD

55.0

:Finsh

9c. ZONE Audio Setup

DVD/LD

55.0

ZONE 3 / RECSEL Setting

ZONE 3

ZONE 2 Volume Level

[ Variable ]

ZONE 3 Volume Level

[ Variable ]

:Return

a. Multi Ch In Setup

b. ZONE Video Setup

c. ZONE Audio Setup

d. SR+ Setup

e. HDMI Control Setup

f. i.LINK Check

g. Display Image

9. Other Setup

DVD/LD

55.0

:Finish

PDP Volume Control

OFF

Monitor Out Connect

[ OFF ]

9d. SR+ Setup

DVD/LD

55.0

PDP Volume Control

[ OFF ]

Monitor Out Connect

OFF

9d. SR+ Setup

DVD/LD

55.0

:Finish

SC_09TX.book Page 104 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Other Settings

105

Select the OSD display’s background pattern

(Display Image)

The OSD display’s background color can be selected.

One of the two patterns below can be selected.

1 Select ‘

Display image

’ from the Other Setup menu.

The OSD background color selection mode is set.

2Use

/

to select the background color pattern

type.

The type switches between Type 1 and Type 2.

• Type 1: Blue background color.

• Type 2: Black background color.

3 When you’re finished, press

RETURN

You will return to the Other Setup menu.

:Return

a. Multi Ch In Setup

b. ZONE Video Setup

c. ZONE Audio Setup

d. SR+ Setup

e. HDMI Control Setup

f. i.LINK Check

g. Display Image

9. Other Setup

DVD/LD

55.0

:Finish

Display Image Type 1

9g. Display Image

DVD/LD

55.0

SC_09TX.book Page 105 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Using other functions

106

Chapter 12:

Using other functions

Setting the Audio options

There are a number of additional sound settings you can

make using the Audio Parameter menu. The defaults, if

not stated, are listed in bold.

Important

• Note that if a setting doesn’t appear in the Audio

Parameter menu, it is unavailable due to the current

source, settings and status of the receiver.

1 Press

AUDIO PARAMETER

2Use

/

to select the setting you want to adjust.

Depending on the current status/mode of the receiver,

certain options may not be able to be selected. Check the

table below for notes on this.

3Use

/

to set it as necessary.

See the table below for the options available for each

setting.

4 Press

RETURN

to confirm and exit the menu.

Setting What it does Option(s)

MCACC

(MCACC

preset)

Selects your favorite MCACC preset

memory when multiple preset

memories are saved. When a

MCACC preset memory has been

renamed, the name given is

displayed.

M1. MEMORY 1

M6. MEMORY 6

Default:

M1. MEMORY 1

MCACC OFF

(Acoustic

Calibration

EQ)

Switches on/off the effects of EQ

Pro. only for the MCACC preset

memory selected. This setting is

available for each MCACC preset

memory.

OFF

STAND.WAVE

(Standing

Wave)

Switches on/off the effects of

Standing Wave Control only for the

MCACC preset memory selected.

This setting is available for each

MCACC preset memory.

OFF

SOUND

DELAY

Some monitors have a slight delay

when showing video, so the

soundtrack will be slightly out of

sync with the picture. By adding a

bit of delay, you can adjust the

sound to match the presentation of

the video.

0.0 to 6.0

(frames)

1 second = 30

frames (NTSC)

Default: 0.0

MIDNIGHT Allows you to hear effective

surround sound of movies at low

volumes.

MID/LOUD

OFF

MIDNIGHT ON

LOUDNESS Used to get good bass and treble

from music sources at low volumes.

LOUDNESS ON

TONE

(Tone

Control)

Applies the treble and bass tone

controls to a source, or bypasses

them completely.

BYPASS

BASS

Adjusts the amount of bass. –6 to +6 (dB)

Default: 0 (dB)

TREBLE

Adjusts the amount of treble. –6 to +6 (dB)

Default: 0 (dB)

S.RETRIEVER

(Sound

Retriever)

When audio data is removed during

the WMA/MP3/MPEG-4 AAC

compression process, sound quality

often suffers from an uneven sound

image. The Sound Retriever feature

employs new DSP technology that

helps bring CD quality sound back

to compressed 2-channel audio by

restoring sound pressure and

smoothing jagged artifacts left over

after compression.

OFF

DNR

(Digital

Noise

Reduction)

May improve the quality of sound in

a noisy source (for example,

cassette or video tape with lots of

background noise) when switched

on.

OFF

DIALOG E

(Dialog

Enhance-

ment)

Localizes dialog in the center

channel to make it stand out from

other background sounds in a TV or

movie soundtrack.

OFF

SRC

(Sampling

Rate

Conversion)

Creates a wider dynamic range with

digital sources like CDs or DVDs.

OFF

DUAL

MONO

Specifies how dual mono encoded

Dolby Digital soundtracks should be

played. Dual mono is not widely

used, but is sometimes necessary

when two languages need to be sent

to separate channels.

CH1 –

Channel 1 is

heard only

CH2 –

Channel 2 is

heard only

CH1 CH2

–

Both channels

heard from front

speakers

DRC

(Dynamic

Range

Control)

Adjusts the level of dynamic range

for movie soundtracks optimized for

Dolby Digital, DTS, Dolby Digital

Plus, Dolby TrueHD, DTS-HD and

DTS-HD Master Audio (you may

need to use this feature when

listening to surround sound at low

volumes).

AUTO

MAX

MID

OFF

Setting What it does Option(s)

SC_09TX.book Page 106 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Using other functions

107

LFE

(LFE

Attenuate)

Some Dolby Digital and DTS audio

sources include ultra-low bass

tones. Set the LFE attenuator as

necessary to prevent the ultra-low

bass tones from distorting the

sound from the speakers.

The LFE is not limited when set to

0 dB, which is the recommended

value. When set to –5 dB, –10 dB,

–15 dB or –20 dB, the LFE is limited

by the respective degree. When OFF

is selected, no sound is output from

the LFE channel.

0dB

–5dB/ –10dB/

–15dB/ –20dB/

OFF

Surr B

DELAY

(Adjusting

the

surround B

speaker

delay)

When the surround speaker is set to

the array mode, delay processing is

applied to the surround B channel.

This delay can be adjusted to

achieve a sound field with a more

natural surround sound. For details,

see Adjusting the surround B speaker

delay (Surr B DELAY) on page 108.

0 msec to

20 msec

Default: 0 msec

SACD GAIN

Brings out detail in SACDs by

maximizing the dynamic range

(during digital processing).

0dB

+6 dB

HDMI

AUDIO

(HDMI

Audio)

Specifies the routing of the HDMI

audio signal out of this receiver

(amp) or through to a TV or plasma

display. When THROUGH is

selected, no sound is output from

this receiver.

AMP

THROUGH

AUTO

DELAY

(Auto delay)

This feature automatically corrects

the audio-to-video delay between

components connected with an

HDMI cable. The audio delay time is

set depending on the operational

status of the display connected with

an HDMI cable. The video delay time

is automatically adjusted according

to the audio delay time.

OFF

CENTER

WIDTH

(Center

Width)

(Applicable

only when

using a

center

speaker)

Provides a better blend of the front

speakers by spreading the center

channel between the front right and

left speakers, making it sound wider

(higher settings) or narrower (lower

settings).

0 to 7

Default: 3

DIMENSION

Adjusts the depth of the surround

sound balance from front to back,

making the sound more distant

(minus settings), or more forward

(positive settings).

–3 to +3

Default: 0

PANORAMA

Extends the front stereo image to

include the surround speakers for a

‘wraparound’ effect.

OFF

Setting What it does Option(s)

CENTER

IMAGE

(Center

Image)

(Applicable

only when

using a

center

speaker)

Adjusts the center image to create a

wider stereo effect with vocals.

Adjust the effect from 0 (all center

channel sent to front right and left

speakers) to 10 (center channel sent

to the center speaker only).

0 to 10

Defaults:

Neo:6 MUSIC:

Neo:6 CINEMA:

EFFECT Sets the effect level for the currently

selected Advanced Surround mode

(each mode can be set separately).

10 to 90

a.When MCACC OFF is selected, all MCACC preset memories become

deactivated.

b.When EQ OFF is selected, the MCACC indicator does not light even

when a MCACC preset memory is selected.

c.The adjustment can be made only when TONE is set to ON.

d.The initially set AUTO is only available for Dolby TrueHD signals. Select

MAX or MID for signals other than Dolby TrueHD.

e.In the cases described below, Surr B DELAY cannot be selected (and the

effect is turned off even if a value is set).

– When the Output Setup is set to anything other than Normal

– When surround B (Surr. B) is set to NO at the speaker settings

– When the speaker system A/B is set to anything other than A+B ON

– When using headphones

– When in the pure direct mode

– When the audio adjustment function’s HDMI audio output is set to

THROUGH

f. You shouldn’t have any problems using this with most SACD discs, but

if the sound distorts, it is best to switch the gain setting back to 0 dB.

g.This feature is only available when the connected display supports the

automatic audio/video synchronizing capability (‘lip-sync’) for HDMI. If you

find the automatically set delay time unsuitable, set A. DELAY to OFF and

adjust the delay time manually. For more details about the lip-sync feature

of your display, contact the manufacturer directly.

h.Only when listening to 2-channel sources in Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music/

Dolby Pro Logic II Music mode.

i. Only when listening to 2-channel sources in Neo:6 MUSIC/CINEMA

mode.

Setting What it does Option(s)

SC_09TX.book Page 107 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Using other functions

108

Adjusting the surround B speaker delay (Surr

B DELAY)

The listening area can be expanded by setting the

surround B speaker to the array mode. This results in a

sound field with good front/rear and left/right sound

connectivity. Depending on the position of the speakers

and the listening position, however, in some cases

adding a delay to the speakers set to the array mode can

result in a more natural surround effect. In such cases, it

is possible to set the surround B channel to the array

mode using the “Surr B DELAY” audio adjustment

function, add delay processing to the surround B

channel and fine-adjust. The delay can be set between 0

and 20 ms with a high precision of 1 ms. Adjust the delay

value while playing movies or music and set it to the

desired position to achieve a more natural surround

sound.

Setting the Video options

There are a number of additional picture settings you can

make using the Video Parameter menu. The defaults, if

not stated, are listed in bold.

Important

• Note that if an option cannot be selected on the Video

Parameter menu, it is unavailable due to the current

source, setting and status of the receiver.

1 Press

VIDEO PARAMETER

2Use

/

to select the setting you want to adjust.

Depending on the current status/mode of the receiver,

certain options may not be able to be selected. Check the

table below for notes on this.

3Use

/

to set it as necessary.

See the table below for the options available for each

setting.

4 Press

RETURN

to confirm and exit the menu.

Note

1 In the cases described below, Surr B DELAY cannot be selected (and the effect is turned off even if a value is set).

– When the Output Setup is set to anything other than Normal

– When surround B (Surr B) is set to NO at the speaker settings

– When the speaker system A/B is set to anything other than A+B ON or OFF

– When using headphones

– When in the pure direct mode

– When the audio adjustment function’s HDMI audio output is set to THROUGH

2 Adjustments can be performed while watching the actual screen by pressing ENTER after selecting the setting item. (This may not be possible for some

video signals.)

3 • All of the setting items can be set for each input source.

• Setting items other than VIDEO CONV. can only be selected when VIDEO CONV. is set to ON.

Setting What it does Option(s)

VIDEO

CONV.

(Digital

Video

Conversion)

Converts video signals for output

from the MONITOR OUT jacks for

all video types.

OFF

BRIGHTNESS

Adjusts the overall brightness. –10 to +10

Default: 0

CONTRAST Adjusts the contrast between light

and dark.

–10 to +10

Default: 0

HUE Adjusts the red/green balance. –10 to +10

Default: 0

CHROMA

LEVEL

Adjusts saturation from dull to

bright.

–10 to +10

Default: 0

NR Setting for reducing roughness of

the picture.

–10 / –5 /

+5 / +10

RESOLUTION

a.• When set to a resolution with which the TV (monitor) is not compatible,

no picture is output. Also, in some cases no picture will be output due to

• When AUTO is selected, the resolution is selected automatically

according to the capacity of the TV (monitor) connected by HDMI. When

PURE is selected, the signals are output with the same resolution as when

input.

• This setting is valid for HDMI and component outputs.

Specifies the output resolution of

the video signal (when analog video

input signals are output at the HDMI

OUT connector and/or component

video out terminal, select this

according to the resolution of your

monitor and the images you wish to

watch). When AUTO is selected, the

resolution is automatically selected

depending on the capability of the

display connected to this receiver.

AUTO

PURE

480i/576i

480p/576p

720p

1080i

1080p

ASPECT Specifies the aspect ratio when

analog video input signals are

output from all of the MONITOR OUT

terminals. Make your desired

settings while checking each setting

on your display (if the image doesn’t

match your monitor type, cropping

or black bands appear).

THROUGH

(none)

NORMAL

ZOOM

SC_09TX.book Page 108 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Using other functions

109

Making an audio or a video recording

You can make an audio or a video recording from the

built-in tuner, or from an audio or video source

connected to the receiver (such as a CD player or TV).

To use this feature, you must set ZONE 3 / RECSEL

Setting to RECSEL and MULTI-ZONE CONTROL to

RECOUT SOURCE in the ZONE Audio Setup. For details,

see ZONE Audio Setup on page 104.

Keep in mind you can’t make a digital recording from an

analog source or vice-versa, so make sure the

components you are recording to/from are hooked up in

the same way (see Connecting your equipment on

page 17 for more on connections).

Since the video converter is not available when making

recordings (from the video OUT jacks) make sure to use

the same type of video cable for connecting your recorder

as you used to connect your video source (the one you

want to record) to this receiver. For example, you must

connect your recorder using S-Video if your source has

also been connected using S-Video.

For more information about video connections, see

Connecting a DVD/HDD recorder, VCR and other video

sources on page 24.

1 Select the source you want to record.

Use the input source buttons (or INPUT SELECT).

• If necessary, set the operation selector switch to RCV,

then press SIGNAL SEL to select the input signal

corresponding to the source component (see

Choosing the input signal on page 39 for more on

this).

2 Prepare the source you want to record.

Tune to the radio station, load the CD, video, DVD etc.

3 Prepare the recorder.

Insert a blank tape, MD, video etc. into the recording

device and set the recording levels.

Refer to the instructions that came with the recorder if

you are unsure how to do this. Most video recorders set

the audio recording level automatically—check the

component’s instruction manual if you’re unsure.

4 Start recording, then start playback of the source

component.

Tip

• If you have a digital recorder connected to the

ZONE3/SOURCE OUT digital output and ZONE 3 is

switched on (see Using the MULTI-ZONE controls on

page 74), you can also select a different input source

for this output while ZONE 3 shows in the display.

Playing a different source when recording

Using this receiver, it’s possible to listen to a different

analog source than the one you’re recording.

1 During recording, press the

REC SELECT

CONTROL

button on the front panel until

RECOUT

shows in the

display.

While RECOUT shows in the display, use the

INPUT SELECTOR

dial to select the source you want to

record.

The default, RECOUT SOURCE, records the source you’re

currently listening to (as in Making an audio or a video

recording on page 109).

• Note that the setting you make here is stored in

memory, even if you switch off the receiver, so if you

want to record a different input source later, you

must do so with REC SELECT, or by selecting

RECOUT SOURCE.

3After

RECOUT

disappears from the display, select

the input source you want to listen to.

This will be heard from the main system without affecting

your recording.

Note

1 • The receiver’s volume, Audio parameters (the tone controls, for example), and surround effects have no effect on the recorded signal.

• Some digital sources are copy-protected, and can only be recorded in analog.

• Some video sources are copy-protected. These cannot be recorded.

DVD

MULTI

OPERATION

SOURCE

TV RCV

DVR1

GALLERY

HOME MEDIA

INPUT SELECT

TUNER

VOL

VOLCH

iP od HDMI

PHONO

CD-R

DVR2

VIDEO1 VIDEO2

BD TV SAT

SACD

XM SIRIUS

SOURCE

TV RCV

DVD

DVR1

GALLERY

HOME MEDIA

INPUT SELECT

TUNER

iP od HDMI

PHONO

CD-R

DVR2

VIDEO1 VIDEO2

BD TV SAT

SACD

XM SIRIUS

AUDIO

PARAMETER

TOP MENU

BAND

CATEGORY

STATUS

THX MPX MEMORY

CH LEVEL

T.EDIT

VIDEO

PARAMETER

RETURN

SETUP

TUNE

ST ST

STEREO

SIGNAL SEL SLEEP AUDIO

iPod CTRL

DIMMER

SR+ SBch PHASE

AUTO/

DIRECT

STANDARD ADV.SURR

Enter

ENTER

RETURN

SETUP

2If RECOUT does not appear in the display, you may have to switch ZONE 2 off by pressing MULTI-ZONE CONTROL ZONE 2 and selecting either

ZONE 3 or off. See Using the MULTI-ZONE controls on page 74 for more on this.

3If RECOUT SOURCE is selected, changing the input source likewise changes the input source used for your recording.

PHONES

SPEAKERS AUTO SURROUND

/STREAM DIRECT

STATUS

LCD

VIEW

DIMMERTUNER EDITBAND

CTRL

ZONE2 ZONE3

VIDEO/GAME 2 INPUT

DIGITAL INS-VIDEO VIDEO L R

AUDIO

MULTI-ZONE CONTROL

MCACC

SETUP MIC

USB

(TUNE)

PARAMETER

SETUP

(ST) (ST)

AUDIO VIDEO

RETURN

ENTER

CTRL

MULTI-ZONE CONTROL

SC_09TX.book Page 109 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Using other functions

110

Reducing the level of an analog signal

The input attenuator lowers the input level of an analog

signal when it’s too strong. You can use this if ANALOG

INPUT OVER is displayed on the LCD or if you can hear

distortion in the sound.

• Set the operation selector switch to

RCV

, then press

A.ATT

to switch the input attenuator on or off.

Using the sleep timer

The sleep timer switches the receiver into standby after a

specified amount of time so you can fall asleep without

worrying about the receiver being left on all night. Use

the remote control to set the sleep timer.

• Set the operation selector switch to

RCV

, then press

SLEEP

repeatedly to set the sleep time.

• You can check the remaining sleep time at any time

by pressing SLEEP once. Pressing repeatedly will

cycle through the sleep options again.

Switching the contents displayed on

the LCD

One of three patterns of information to be displayed on

the LCD can be selected. By default this is set to ‘OSD’.

• Press

LCD VIEW

on the front panel to change the

pattern of information.

This can be set separately for different inputs. Note,

however, that only inputs with a video terminal (DVD/LD,

BD, TV, SAT, DVR/VCR1, DVR/VCR2, VIDEO/GAME1 and

VIDEO/GAME2), inputs from an iPod on which video is

playing and inputs from MULTI CH IN for which VIDEO

INPUT is set to something other than OFF can be set.

With HDMI inputs, it is not possible to display external

images on the LCD screen. To do so, connect to this

receiver’s video input using an analog video cable.

Dimming the display

You can choose between four brightness levels for the

front LCD display. Note that when selecting sources, the

display automatically brightens for a few seconds.

• Set the operation selector switch to

RCV

, then press

DIMMER

repeatedly to change the brightness of the

front LCD display.

Switching the HDMI output

Set which terminal to use when outputting video and

audio signals from the HDMI output terminals (HDMI

OUT1 or HDMI OUT2).

The HDMI OUT1 terminal is compatible with the HDMI

control function.

• Set the operation selector switch to

RCV

, then press

HDMI OUT

Please wait a while when Please wait ... is displayed. No

operations other than switching the power between

standby or on can be performed at this time.

The output switches between HDMI OUT1 and HDMI

OUT2 each time the button is pressed.

Note

1 The attenuator isn’t available with digital sources, or when using the Stream Direct modes.

2 You can also switch off the sleep timer simply by switching off the receiver.

3 Depending on the settings of the video adjustment function (page 108), the external image may not appear on the LCD.

SOURCE

TV RCV

VOL

VOLCH

SOURCE

TV RCV

iPod CTRL

SR+

CLR

SBch PHASE

A.ATT GENRE

HDMI OUT

D.ACCESS

ENTER

MCACC CLASS

DISP

A.ATT

SOURCE

TV RCV

VOL

VOLCH

SOURCE

TV RCV

SIGNAL SEL SLEEP AUDIO

iPod CTRL

DIMMER

SR+ SBch PHASE

A ATT GENRE

HDMI OUT

DISP

SLEEP

30 min

60 min

90 minOff

OSD

External

Image &

OSD

External

Image

Only

4• Synchronized amp mode on page 99 is canceled when the HDMI output is switched. If you wish to use the synchronized amp mode, switch to HDMI

OUT1, then select the synchronized amp mode using the plasma TV’s remote control.

• When the power is turned off then back on after switching the HDMI output, the input is set to a setting between HDMI1 and HDMI6.

SOURCE

TV RCV

VOL

VOLCH

SOURCE

TV RCV

SIGNAL SEL SLEEP AUDIO

iPod CTRL

DIMMER

SR+ SBch PHASE

DISP

DIMMER

SC_09TX.book Page 110 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Using other functions

111

Checking the settings of the sound

currently playing, etc.

The audio input/output information, the video input/

output information, the MULTI-ZONE status and this

receiver’s setting information can be checked by

pressing the status check button on the remote control

unit. The different sets of information are divided

between four screens and displayed on the receiver’s

LCD. The information shown below can be checked for

the different inputs.

1 Set the operation selector switch to

RCV

, then press

STATUS

to check the system settings.

These appear on the front LCD display. The screen

switches between the five screens below each time the

button is pressed.

• Audio input information

• Audio output information

• Video input/output information

• MULTI-ZONE status

• This receiver’s settings information

•OFF

2 When you’re finished, press

STATUS

again to

switch off the display.

Resetting the system

Use this procedure to reset all the receiver’s settings to

the factory default. Use the front panel controls to do this.

1 Switch the receiver into standby.

2 While holding down the

SETUP

button on the front

panel, press

 STANDBY/ON

The display shows RESET NO.

3 Press the

ENTER

button on the front panel.

4Select

RESET

using

/

, then press the

ENTER

button on the front panel.

The display shows RESET? OK.

5Press

ENTER

to confirm.

OK appears in the display to indicate that the receiver

has been reset to the factory default settings.

• Note that all settings will be saved, even if the

receiver is unplugged.

SOURCE

TV RCV

VOL

VOLCH

SOURCE

TV RCV

CATEGORY

STATUS

THX MPX MEMORY

CH LEVEL

RETURN

SETUP

TUNE

AUTO/

STATUS

STATUS AUDIO INPUT

AUDIO INPUT

DOLBY DIGITAL

DN31

Emphasiss

(( ))

SIGSEL : AUTO [DIGITAL]

44 . 1 kHz

448 kbps

DVD/LD

55.0

LFE

SBR

SBL

Input seletion

setting and input

singal

Input signal

Input channel

STATUS AUDIO OUTPUT

Normal

DVD/LD

55.0

L R1234554321

L R

SLA SLB SBL SBR SRB SRA

VSB

Output format

Output channel

STATUS VIDEO

VIDEO INFORMATION

INPUT : 720p / 60Hz

OUTPUT :1080i / 60Hz

ASPECT : 4 : 3

SIGNAL IN :COMPONENT

DVD/LD

55.0

Aspect ratio

setting

Input signal

Output signal

Terminal to which

video signal is

being input

STATUS ZONE

ZONE INFORMATION

ZONE 2 ON : BD

ZONE 3 OFF : iPod

RECOUT : – – –

DVD/LD

55.0

Zone 2 setting and

input

RECOUT setting

Zone 3 setting and

input

Note

1 The tuner status is displayed when the input is set to TUNER.

STATUS SYSTEM

SYSTEM INFORMATION

MCACC M1 : MEMORY 1

ANALOG ATT : OFF

SLEEP : 28min

: OFF

DVD/LD

55.0

MCACC memory

Sleep timer

Analog ATT

SR+ setting

STATUS OFF

DVD/LD

55.0

SC_09TX.book Page 111 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Using other functions

112

Default system settings

Setting Default

HDMI Audio Amp

Digital Video Conversion On

Speakers SP: A+B ON

Output Setup Normal

Speaker System Front SMALL

Center SMALL

Surr.A SMALL

Surr.B SMALL

SB SMALLx2

SW YESx2

Crossover 80 Hz

X-Curve OFF

THX Audio Setting 0–1ft.

LCD VIEW OSD

DIMMER brightest

Inputs

See Input function default and possible settings on page 102.

MULTI-ZONE

Zone 2 Volume Level Variable

Zone 2/3 Volume –60

HDMI

HDMI output HDMI OUT1

HDMI Control ON

SR+

SR+ Control On/Off OFF

SR+ Volume Control On/Off OFF

Monitor Out OFF

DSP

MCACC Position Memory M1: MEMORY 1

Surround back channel Processing ON

Phase Control ON

Full Band Phase Control OFF

Sound Retriever OFF

Sound Delay 0 frame

Dual Mono CH1

DRC AUTO

SACD Gain 0 dB

Surr B Delay 0 msec

LFE Attenuate 0 dB

Auto delay OFF

Digital Safety OFF

Effect Level ExtendedStereo 90

Other modes 50

2 PL II Music Options Center Width 3

Dimension 0

Panorama OFF

Neo:6 Options Center Image Neo:6 MUSIC: 3

Neo:6 CINEMA: 10

All Inputs Listening Mode (2 ch) AUTO SURROUND

Listening Mode (x ch) AUTO SURROUND

Listening Mode (HP) STEREO

See also Setting the Audio options on page 106 for other default DSP

settings.

MCACC

Channel level (M1 to M6) 0 dB

Speaker Distance (M1 to M6) 10 ft

Standing Wave

(M1 to M6)

Standing Wave On/

Off

ATT 0 dB

SWch Wide Trim 0.0

EQ Data (M1 to M6) All channels/bands 0 dB

EQ Wide Trim (M1 to M6) 0.0 dB

Setting Default

SC_09TX.book Page 112 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Controlling the rest of your system

113

Chapter 13:

Controlling the rest of your system

Setting the remote to control other

components

Most components can be assigned to one of the input

source buttons (such as DVD or CD) using the

component’s manufacturer preset code stored in the

remote.

However, there are cases where only certain functions

may be controllable after assigning the proper preset

code, or the codes for the manufacturer in the remote

control will not work for the model that you are using.

If you can’t find a preset code that matches the

component you want to control, you can still teach the

remote individual commands from another remote

control (see Programming signals from other remote

controls below).

Note

• You can cancel or exit any of the steps by pressing

MULTI OPERATION. To go back a step, press

RETURN.

• After one minute of inactivity, the remote

automatically exits the operation.

Selecting preset codes directly

1 While pressing the

MULTI OPERATION

button,

press

SETUP

The remote LCD display shows SETUP.

2Use

/

to select

PRESET

, then press

ENTER

3 Press the input source button for the component

you want to control, then press

ENTER

The LCD on the remote displays the component you want

to control (for example DVD or TV).

4Use

/

to select the first letter of the brand name

of your component, then press

ENTER

This should be the manufacturer’s name (for example, P

for Pioneer).

5Use

/

to select the manufacturer’s name from

the list, then press

ENTER

6Use

/

to select the proper code from the list,

then try using this remote with your component.

The code should start with the component type (for

example, DVD 020). If there is more than one, start with

the first one.

To try out the remote control, switch the component on or

off (into standby) by pressing SOURCE. If it doesn’t

seem to work, select the next code from the list (if there

is one).

• If you can’t find or properly enter a preset code, you

can still teach the remote individual commands from

another remote control (see Programming signals

from other remote controls below).

7 If your component is controlled successfully, press

ENTER

to confirm.

The remote LCD display shows OK.

Programming signals from other

remote controls

If the preset code for your component is not available, or

the available preset codes do not operate correctly, you

can program signals from the remote control of another

component. This can also be used to program additional

operations (buttons not covered in the presets) after

assigning a preset code.

1 While pressing the

MULTI OPERATION

button,

press

SETUP

The remote LCD display shows SETUP.

2Use

/

to select

LEARNING

, then press

ENTER

The LCD on the remote prompts you for the component

you want to control (for example DVD or TV).

Note

1 You can’t assign the TUNER, iPod, HOME MEDIA GALLERY, XM or SIRIUS buttons.

DVD

RECEIVER SOURCE

MAIN

MULTI

OPERATION

ZONE2 3

DVR1

GALLERY

HOME MEDIA

INPUT SELECT

TUNER

iP od HDMI

PHONO

CD-R

DVR2

VIDEO1 VIDEO2

BD TV SAT

SACD

XM SIRIUS

DVD

DVR1

GALLERY

HOME MEDIA

INPUT SELECT

TUNER

iP od HDMI

PHONO

CD-R

DVR2

VIDEO1 VIDEO2

BD TV SAT

SACD

XM SIRIUS

MULTI

OPERATION

AUDIO

PARAMETER

TOP MENU

BAND

CATEGORY

STATUS

THX MPX MEMORY

CH LEVEL

T.EDIT

VIDEO

PARAMETER

RETURN

SETUP

INPUT MUTE

TUNE

ST ST

MUTE

TV CONTROL

Enter

ENTER

SETUP

2 • When using a Pioneer HDD recorder, please select PIONEER DVR 487, 488, 489 or 493.

• When using a Pioneer plasma display released prior to summer 2005, please select preset codes 637 or 660.

3 The remote can store about 200 preset codes (this has been tested with codes of Pioneer format only).

SC_09TX.book Page 113 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Controlling the rest of your system

114

3 Press the input source button for the component

you want to control, then press

ENTER

PRES KEY shows in the LCD display.

4 Point the two remote controls towards each other,

then press the button that will be doing the learning on

this receiver’s remote control.

PRES KEY starts flashing to indicate the remote is ready

to accept a signal.

• The remote controls should be 3 cm to 5 cm (1 to 2

inches) apart.

5 Press the corresponding button on the other

remote control that is sending (teaching) the signal to

this receiver’s remote control.

For example, if you want to learn the playback control

signal, press and hold  briefly. The LCD display will

show OK if the operation has been learned.

If for some reasons the operation hasn’t been learned the

LCD will display ERROR briefly, and then display PRES

KEY again. If this happens, keep pressing the (teaching)

button as you vary the distance between the two remotes,

until the LCD display shows OK.

Certain buttons represent operations that cannot be

learned from other remote controls. The buttons

available are shown below:

6 To program additional signals for the current

component repeat steps 4 and 5.

To program signals for another component, exit and

repeat steps 1 through 5.

7 Press and hold the

MULTI OPERATION

button for a

couple of seconds to exit and store the operation(s).

Erasing one of the remote control

button settings

This erases one of the buttons you have programmed and

restores the button to the factory default.

1 While pressing the

MULTI OPERATION

button,

press

SETUP

The remote LCD display shows SETUP.

2Use

/

to select

ERASE

, then press

ENTER

The LCD on the remote prompts you for the component

corresponding to the button setting to be erased.

3 Press the input source button corresponding to the

command to be erased, then press

ENTER

The LCD display flashes PRES KEY.

4 Press and hold the button to be erased for two

seconds.

The LCD display shows OK or NO CODE to confirm the

button has been erased.

5 Repeat step 4 to erase other buttons.

6 Press and hold the

MULTI OPERATION

button for a

couple of seconds when you’re done.

Resetting the remote control presets

This will erase all preset remote control preset codes and

programmed buttons.

1 While pressing the

MULTI OPERATION

button,

press

SETUP

The remote LCD display shows SETUP.

2Use

/

to select

RESET

, then press

ENTER

RESET flashes in the LCD display.

3 Press and hold

ENTER for about two seconds

The LCD shows OK to confirm the remote presets have

been erased.

Note

1 • You can’t assign the TUNER, iPod, HOME MEDIA GALLERY, XM or SIRIUS buttons.

• The TV CONTROL buttons (TV, TV VOL +/–, TV CH +/–, MUTE and INPUT) can only be learned after the operation selection switch is set to TV.

2 Note that interference from TVs or other devices will sometimes result in the remote control learning the wrong signal.

3 • Some commands from other remote controls cannot be learned, but in most cases the remotes just need to be moved closer together or farther apart.

• If the remote LCD shows FULL, it means the memory is full. See Erasing one of the remote control button settings below to erase a programmed button

you’re not using to free up more memory (note that some signals may take more memory than others).

DVD

RECEIVER SOURCE

MAIN

MULTI

OPERATION

AUDIO

PARAMETER

VIDEO

PARAMETER

ZONE2

SOURCE

TV RCV

DVR1

GALLERY

HOME MEDIA

INPUT SELECT

TUNER

INPUT MUTE

TUNE

MUTE

VOL

TV CONTROL

iPod HDMI

PHONO

CD-R

DVR2

VIDEO1 VIDEO2

BD TV SAT

SACD

XM SIRIUS

3 cm to 5 cm

(1 to 2 inches)

DVD

RECEIVER SOURCE

MAIN

MULTI

OPERATION

AUDIO VIDEO

ZONE2

SOURCE

TV RCV

DVR1

GALLERY

HOME MEDIA

INPUT SELECT

TUNER

INPUT MUTE MUTE

VOL

TV CONTROL

iP od HDMI

PHONO

CD-R

DVR2

VIDEO1 VIDEO2

BD TV SAT

SACD

XM SIRIUS

AUDIO

PARAMETER

TOP MENU

BAND

CATEGORY

STATUS

THX MPX MEMORY

CH LEVEL

T.EDIT

VIDEO

PARAMETER

RETURN

SETUP

TUNE

ST ST

STEREO/

F.S.SURR

SIGNAL SEL SLEEP AUDIO

iPod CTRL

DIMMER

SR+

CLR

SBch PHASE

A.ATT GENRE

HDMI OUT

D.ACCESS

ENTER

MCACC CLASS

DISP

AUTO/

DIRECT

STANDARD ADV SURR

ENTER

4 When Selecting preset codes directly on page 113 are set, all the signals learned in the input source buttons are cleared. This function is convenient when

you want to reset some but not all of input source buttons.

SC_09TX.book Page 114 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Controlling the rest of your system

115

Confirming preset codes

Use this feature to check which preset code is assigned

to an input source button.

1 While pressing the

MULTI OPERATION

button,

press

SETUP

The remote LCD display shows SETUP.

2Use

/

to select

READ ID

, then press

ENTER

The LCD on the remote prompts you for the input source

button you want to check.

3 Press the button of the component for which you

want to check the preset code, then press

ENTER

The brand name and preset code appears in the display

for three seconds.

Renaming input source names

You can customize the names that appear on the remote

LCD when you select an input source (for example, you

could change the name of DVR 1 to HDD/DVR).

1 While pressing the

MULTI OPERATION

button,

press

SETUP

The remote LCD display shows SETUP.

2Use

/

to select

RENAME,

then press

ENTER

The LCD on the remote prompts you for the button of the

input source you want to rename.

3 Press the input source button you want to rename

then press

ENTER

4Use

/

to select

NAME EDT

, then press

ENTER

To reset the button to its original (default) name, select

NAME RST above.

5 Edit the name of the input source in the remote

control LCD, pressing

ENTER

when you’re finished.

Use / to change the character and / to move

forward/back a position. The name can be up to eight

characters (the possible characters are listed below).

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ

0123456789 \ / * + – [space]

Direct function

• Default setting: ON

You can use the direct function feature to control one

component using the remote control while at the same

time, using your receiver to playback a different

component. This could let you, for example, use the

remote control to set up and listen to a CD on the

receiver, and then use the remote control to rewind a

tape in your VCR while you continue to listen to your CD

player.

When direct function is on, any component you select

(using the input source buttons) will be selected by both

the receiver and the remote control. When you turn direct

function off, you can operate the remote control without

affecting the receiver.

1 While pressing the

MULTI OPERATION

button,

press

SETUP

The remote LCD display shows SETUP.

2Use

/

to select

DIRECT F,

then press

ENTER

The LCD on the remote prompts you for the button of the

input source you want to control.

3 Press the input source button for the component

you want to control, then press

ENTER

4Use

/

to switch direct function

OFF

, then

press

ENTER

The LCD shows OK to confirm the setting.

Multi Operation and System Off

The Multi Operation feature allows you to program a

series of up to 5 commands for the components in your

system. For example, you could turn on your TV, turn on

your DVD player and start playing the loaded DVD using

only two buttons on the remote control.

Similar to multi operations, System Off allows you to use

one button to stop and switch off a series of components

in your system at the same time.

Note

1 • Before Multi Operation and System Off will work correctly, you must setup the remote to work with your TV and other components (see Setting the

remote to control other components on page 113 for more on this).

• Some units may take some time to power up, in which case multiple operations may not be possible.

• Power on and off commands only work with components that have a standby mode.

SC_09TX.book Page 115 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Controlling the rest of your system

116

Programming a multi-operation or a

shutdown sequence

Set the remote control operation mode selector switch to

RCV when you want to program this receiver’s

operations, to SOURCE when you want to program

operations of other components.

1 While pressing the

MULTI OPERATION

button,

press

SETUP

The remote LCD display shows SETUP.

2Use

/

to select

MULTI OP

SYS OFF

from the

menu and press

ENTER

If you selected Multi Operation (MULTI OP), the LCD on

the remote prompts you for an input source button.

If you selected System Off (SYS OFF), go to step 4.

3 Press the input source button for the component

that will start the multi-operation, then press

ENTER

For example, if you want to start the sequence by

switching on your DVD player, press DVD.

4Use

/

to select

CODE EDT

, then press

ENTER

To erase any previously stored multi-operations (or

shutdown sequences) select CODE ERS above.

5Use

/

to select a command in the sequence, then

press

ENTER

If this is the first command in the sequence, select 1ST

CODE. Otherwise, simply choose the next command in

the sequence. PRES KEY flashes after you press ENTER.

6 If necessary, press the input source button for the

component whose command you want to input.

This is only necessary if the command is for a new

component (input source).

7 Select the button for the command you want to

input.

The following remote control commands can be selected:

• You don’t need to program the receiver to switch on

or off. This is done automatically.

With Pioneer components, you don’t need to:

• program the power to switch off in a shutdown

sequence (except DVD recorders);

• program the power to switch on if it’s the source

component selected in step 3;

• program a Pioneer TV or monitor to switch on if the

input function (selected in step 2) has video input

terminals;

These take priority in multi operations (not shutdown).

8 Repeat steps 5 to 7 to program a sequence of up to

five commands.

9 When you’re finished, use

/

to select

EXIT

from

the menu and press

ENTER

You will return to the remote control Setup menu. Select

* EXIT * again to exit.

Using multi operations

You can start multi operations with the receiver switched

on, or in standby.

1 Press

MULTI OPERATION

MULTI OP flashes in the display.

Press

an input source button that has been set up

with a multi operation.

The receiver switches on (if it was in standby) and the

programmed multi operation is performed automatically.

DVD

RECEIVER SOURCE

MAIN

MULTI

OPERATION

ZONE2 3

DVR1

GALLERY

HOME MEDIA

INPUT SELECT

TUNER

iP od HDMI

PHONO

CD-R

DVR2

VIDEO1 VIDEO2

BD TV SAT

SACD

XM SIRIUS

DVD

DVR1

GALLERY

HOME MEDIA

INPUT SELECT

TUNER

iP od HDMI

PHONO

CD-R

DVR2

VIDEO1 VIDEO2

BD TV SAT

SACD

XM SIRIUS

MULTI

OPERATION

AUDIO

PARAMETER

TOP MENU

BAND

CATEGORY

STATUS

THX MPX MEMORY

CH LEVEL

T.EDIT

VIDEO

PARAMETER

RETURN

SETUP

INPUT MUTE

TUNE

ST ST

MUTE

TV CONTROL

Enter

ENTER

SETUP

DVD

RECEIVER SOURCE

MAIN

MULTI

OPERATION

AUDIO VIDEO

ZONE2

SOURCE

TV RCV

DVR1

GALLERY

HOME MEDIA

INPUT SELECT

TUNER

INPUT MUTE MUTE

VOL

TV CONTROL

iP od HDMI

PHONO

CD-R

DVR2

VIDEO1 VIDEO2

BD TV SAT

SACD

XM SIRIUS

AUDIO

PARAMETER

TOP MENU

BAND

CATEGORY

STATUS

THX MPX MEMORY

CH LEVEL

T.EDIT

VIDEO

PARAMETER

RETURN

SETUP

TUNE

ST ST

STEREO/

F.S.SURR

SIGNAL SEL SLEEP AUDIO

iPod CTRL

DIMMER

SR+

CLR

SBch PHASE

A.ATT GENRE

HDMI OUT

D.ACCESS

ENTER

MCACC CLASS

DISP

AUTO/

DIRECT

STANDARD ADV SURR

ENTER

DVD

RECEIVER SOURCE

MAIN

MULTI

OPERATION

ZONE2 3

DVR1

GALLERY

HOME MEDIA

CD CD-R

DVR2

VIDEO1 VIDEO2

BD TV SAT

SACD

MULTI

OPERATION

SC_09TX.book Page 116 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Controlling the rest of your system

117

Using System off

1Press

MULTI OPERATION

MULTI OP flashes in the display.

2Press

SOURCE

The command sequence you programmed will run, then

all Pioneer components will switch off

, followed by this

receiver.

Controls for TVs

This remote control can control components after

entering the proper codes or teaching the receiver the

commands (see Setting the remote to control other

components on page 113 for more on this). Set the

operation selector switch to SOURCE, then press the

other device operation button of the device you want to

operate.

•The TV CONTROL buttons on the remote control are

dedicated to control the TV assigned to the TV button.

Controls for other components

This remote control can control these components after

entering the proper codes or teaching the receiver the

commands (see Setting the remote to control other

components on page 113 for more on this). Set the

operation selector switch to SOURCE, then press the

other device operation button of the device you want to

operate.

Note

1 In order to avoid accidently switching off a DVD recorder that is currently recording, no DVD recorder power off codes are sent.

Button(s) Function Components

TV Press to switch the component

assigned to the TV button on or

off.

Cable TV/Satellite

TV/TV/DTV

INPUT Switches the TV input. (Not

possible with all models.)

Cable TV/Satellite

TV/TV/DTV

TV CH +/– Selects channels. Cable TV/Satellite

TV/TV/DTV

TV VOL +/– Adjust the TV volume. Cable TV/Satellite

TV/TV/DTV

MUTE Mute the volume. Cable TV/Satellite

TV/TV/DTV

SOURCE Switches the DTV on or off. DTV

Switches the TV or CATV between

standby and on.

Cable TV/Satellite

TV/TV

 Switches the DTV on or off. DTV

 Press to get information on DTV

programs.

DTV

 Use to choose the BLUE

commands on a DTV menu.

DTV

 Use to choose the YELLOW

commands on a DTV menu.

DTV

 Use to choose the RED

commands on a DTV menu.

DTV

 Use to choose the GREEN

commands on a DTV menu.

DTV

AUDIO Use to switch DTV audio tracks. DTV

DVD

RECEIVER SOURCE

MAIN

MULTI

OPERATION

ZONE2 3

DVR1

HOME MEDIA

DVR2

VIDEO1 VIDEO2

BD TV SAT

MULTI

OPERATION

SOURCE

DISP Use to display the channel

information.

Cable TV/TV/DTV

RETURN Use to select RETURN or EXIT.DTV

Number

buttons

Use to select a specific TV

channel.

Cable TV/Satellite

TV/TV/DTV

+10 button Use to add a decimal point when

selecting a specific TV channel.

DTV

ENTER Use to enter a channel. Cable TV/Satellite

TV/TV/DTV

MENU Select different menus from the

DTV functions.

DTV

Select the menu screen. Cable TV/Satellite

TV/TV

///

& ENTER

Press to select or adjust and

navigate items on the menu

screen.

Cable TV/Satellite

TV/TV/DTV

Button(s) Function Components

SOURCE Press to switch the component

between standby and on.

CD/MD/CD-R/

DVD/LD/BD/DVR

player/VCR/

Cassette deck

 Press to return to the start of the

current track or chapter.

Repeated presses skips to the start

of previous tracks or chapters.

CD/MD/CD-R/

DVD/LD/BD

player

 Press to advance to the start of the

next track or chapter.

Repeated presses skips to the start

of following tracks or chapters.

CD/MD/CD-R/

DVD/LD/BD

player

 Pause playback or recording. CD/MD/CD-R/

DVD/LD/BD/DVR

player/VCR/

Cassette deck

 Start playback. CD/MD/CD-R/

DVD/LD/BD/DVR

player/VCR/

Cassette deck

 Hold down for fast forward

playback.

CD/MD/CD-R/

DVD/LD/BD/DVR

player/VCR/

Cassette deck

Button(s) Function Components

SC_09TX.book Page 117 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Controlling the rest of your system

118

Operating other Pioneer components

with this unit’s sensor

Many Pioneer components have SR CONTROL jacks

which can be used to link components together so that

you can use just the remote sensor of one component.

When you use a remote control, the control signal is

passed along the chain to the appropriate component.

Important

• Note that if you use this feature, make sure that you

also have at least one set of analog audio, video or

HDMI jacks connected to another component for

grounding purposes.

1 Decide which component you want to use the

remote sensor of.

When you want to control any component in the chain,

this is the remote sensor at which you’ll point the

corresponding remote control.

2 Connect the

CONTROL OUT

jack of that component

to the

CONTROL IN

jack of another Pioneer component.

Use a cable with a mono mini-plug on each end for the

connection.

3 Continue the chain in the same way for as many

components as you have.

 Hold down for fast reverse

playback.

CD/MD/CD-R/

DVD/LD/BD/DVR

player/VCR/

Cassette deck

 Stops playback. CD/MD/CD-R/

DVD/LD/BD/DVR

player/VCR/

Cassette deck

Number

buttons

Directly access tracks on a

program source.

CD/MD/CD-R/

LD/BD player/

VCR

Use the number buttons to

navigate the on-screen display.

DVD player

Selects channels. DVR/VCR

ENTER Use as the ENTER button. VCR/DVD/BD

player

Displays the setup screen for DVR

players.

DVR player

Changes sides of the LD. LD player

TOP MENU Displays the disc ‘top’ menu of a

DVD player.

DVD/BD/DVR

player

MENU Displays menus concerning the

current DVD or DVR you are using.

DVD/BD/DVR

player

 Pauses the tape. Cassette deck

 Stops the tape. Cassette deck

ENTER Starts playback. Cassette deck

/ Fast rewinds/fast forwards the

tape.

Cassette deck

///

& ENTER

Navigates DVD menu/options. DVD/BD/DVR

player

CH +/– Selects channels. VCR/DVD/DVR

player

AUDIO Changes the audio language or

channel.

DVD/BD/DVR

player

STANDARD

Switches to the VCR controls when

using a VCR/DVD/HDD recorder.

VCR/DVD/DVR

player

DISP Press to display information. DVD/BD/DVR

player

AUTO/

DIRECT

Switches to the hard disk controls

when using a DVD/HDD recorder.

DVR player

STEREO Switches to the DVD controls

when using a DVD/HDD recorder.

DVR player

SETUP Displays the HOME MENU. DVD/BD/DVR

player

CLR Use as the CLEAR button. DVD/BD player

Select chapters higher than 10. LD/DVR player

Button(s) Function Components

Note

1 • If you want to control all your components using this receiver’s remote control, see Setting the remote to control other components on page 113.

If you have connected a remote control to the CONTROL IN jack (using a mini-plug cable), you won’t be able to control this unit using the remote sensor.

• See Using this receiver with a Pioneer plasma display on page 75 if you are connecting a Pioneer plasma display.

NE2

OUT

CONTROL

COMPONENT

VIDEO

ASSIGN-

ABLE

OUT

A MAX

)

RS-

232C

VD/LD)

IDEO/

VR/VCR 1)

VR/VCR 2)

YPBPR

CONTROL

OUT

IN OUT

CONTROL

IN OUT

CONTROL

ARA

MET

TOP

ENU

BAN

ORY

TUS

ORY

EL P

RES

T.E

DEO

ARA

RET

NE2

TV R

LLER

NPUT

LEC

T M

TUN

Pod

HDMI

TEREO

GNAL

LEEP AUD

CLR

ch P

HAS

.ACC

MCACC

CLASS

IRECT

ARD

ADV

.SU

PHO

CD-

VID

M S

IRIUS

SC_09TX.book Page 118 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Additional information

119

Chapter 14:

Additional information

Speaker Setting Guide

In order to achieve an even better surround effect, it is

important to accurately position the speakers and make

their volume and tone characteristics uniform so as to

finely focus the multi-channel sound.

The three major elements in positioning the speakers are

distance, angle and orientation (the direction in which

the speakers are pointing).

Distance: The distance of all the speakers should be

equal.

Angle: The speakers should be placed at the angles

shown in Fig. 1 and be horizontally symmetrical.

Orientation: The orientation should be horizontally

symmetrical.

In most homes, however, it is not possible to achieve this

environment. For the distance, on this receiver it is

possible to automatically correct the speaker distance

electrically to a precision of 1 cm (

/2 inch) using the Auto

MCACC Setup function (page 12) and to adjust precisely

using the procedure described at Precision Distance

(page 49). For the volume and sound quality as well,

accurate sound field correction using the equalizer and

speaker phase characteristic correction using the Full

Band Phase Control function (page 15) together make it

possible to achieve the ideal listening environment.

Here we consider mainly the two elements of angle and

orientation, based on the ITU-R recommended 5.1-

channel layout shown in Fig. 1.

Step 1: Speaker layout and distance adjustment

Adjust the main speakers to the angles shown in Fig. 1.

Use speaker stands or the like to make sure the speakers

are steady, and leave at least 10 cm (4 inches) from the

surrounding walls. Position the speakers attentively so

that the speakers on the left and right are at equal angles

from the listening position (center of the adjustments).

(We recommend using cords, etc., when adjusting the

layout.) Ideally all the speakers should be equidistant

from the listening position.

Tip

• If the speakers cannot be set at equal distances (on a

circle), use the Auto MCACC Setup speaker distance

correction and Fine Speaker Distance functions to

make them equalize the distance artificially.

Step 2: Adjusting the speaker height

Adjust the heights (angles) of the different speakers.

Adjust so that the front speaker units reproducing mid-

and high frequencies is roughly at the height of the ears.

If the center speaker cannot be set at the same height as

the front speakers, adjust its angle of elevation to point it

to the listening position.

Set surround speaker 1 so that it is not under the height

of the ears.

Step 3: Adjusting the speaker orientation

If the left and right speakers are not pointing in the same

direction, the tone will not be the same on the right and

left, and as a result the sound field will not be reproduced

properly. However, if all the speakers are pointed towards

the listening position, the sound field will seem cramped.

Testing by the Pioneer Multi-channel Research Group

has shown that a good sense of sound positioning can be

achieved by pointing all the speakers towards an area 30

cm (12 inches) to 80 cm (31 inches) behind the listening

position (between the surround speakers and the

listening position).

However, the sense of sound positioning can differ

according to the conditions in the room and the speakers

being used. In smaller environments in particular (when

the front speakers are close to the listening position),

with this method the speakers will be pointed too inward.

We suggest you use this example of installation as

reference when trying out different installation methods.

Fig. 1

5.1-channel speaker layout recommended

by the ITU-R (ITU-R BS.775-1)

This type of setup is based on the recommendations

of the ITU-R (International Telecommunication Union

– Radiocommunication Sector), an international

organization specialized in the field of electric

communications.

Listening

position

60°

100°

120°

SC_09TX.book Page 119 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Additional information

120

Tip

• When adjusting the orientation of the speakers, turn

the speakers with the center of the speakers’ baffle

surfaces as the axis so that the speakers’ center

positions do not change.

Examples of recommended speaker layouts based on the

ITU-R (Fig.1) for systems with more than 5.1 channels

• For 7.1-channel (or 7.2-channel) systems

• For 9.1-channel (or 9.2-channel) systems

Step 4: Positioning and adjusting the subwoofer

Placing the subwoofer between the center and front

speakers makes even music sources sound more

natural. (If there is only one subwoofer, it doesn’t matter

if it is placed on the left or right side). The low bass sound

output from the subwoofer is not directional and there is

no need to adjust the height. Normally the subwoofer is

placed on the floor. Put it in a position at which it will not

cancel out the bass sound output from the other

speakers. Also note that placing it near a wall may result

in sympathetic vibrations with the building that could

excessively amplify the bass sound.

If the subwoofer must be installed near a wall, place it at

an angle so that it is not parallel to the wall surface. This

can help reduce any sympathetic vibrations, but

depending on the shape of the room this could result in

standing waves. However, even if standing waves are

generated, their influence on the sound quality can be

prevented using the Auto MCACC’s standing wave

control function (page 50).

Tip

• Setting the subwoofer with the line connecting the

woofer (middle and low frequency reproduction

units) sections of the center and front speakers

parallel to the subwoofer’s front surface achieves a

more natural, powerful bass sound.

The central axes converge 30 cm (12 inches) to

80 cm (31 inches) behind the listening position.

Fig. 2

Fig. 3

Center of rotation

Rotation

The central axes converge 30 cm (12 inches) to

80 cm (31 inches) behind the listening position.

SBL

SBR

The central axes converge 30 cm (12 inches) to

80 cm (31 inches) behind the listening position.

SL B

SR B

SBL

SBR

SL A

SR A

Fig. 4

(SW 2)

Set the subwoofer parallel to the

connecting line.

(Note that it will be too close if it is

placed directly on the line.)

SC_09TX.book Page 120 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Additional information

121

Step 5: Default settings with the Auto MCACC

Setup (auto sound field correction) function

It is more effective to perform the Auto MCACC Setup

(page 12) and Precision Distance (page 49) procedure

once the adjustments described above have been

completed.

Tip

• The distance to the subwoofer may be slightly larger

than the distance actually measured with a tape

measure, etc. This is because this distance is

corrected for electric delay, and is not a problem.

Positional relationship between speakers

and monitor

Position of front speakers and monitor

The front speakers should be as equidistant as possible

to the monitor.

Position of center speaker and monitor

Since mostly dialogs are output from the center speaker,

keeping the center speaker as close as possible to the

screen makes the overall sound more natural. For TVs

using Braun tubes, however, when installing the center

speaker on the floor, adjust its angle of elevation to point

it towards the listening position.

• If the center speaker is not of the shielded type, install

it away from the TV.

• When installing the center speaker on top of the

monitor, place it facing slightly downwards towards

the listening position.

45° to 60°

Installation on floor

(Diagram as seen

from the side)

Monitor

SC_09TX.book Page 121 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Additional information

122

Troubleshooting

Incorrect operations are often mistaken for trouble and malfunctions. If you think that there is something wrong with

this component, check the points below. Sometimes the trouble may lie in another component. Investigate the other

components and electrical appliances being used. If the trouble cannot be rectified even after exercising the checks

listed below, ask your nearest Pioneer authorized independent service company to carry out repair work.

Power

No sound

Symptom Remedy

The power does not turn on. • Make sure that the power cable is plugged in to an active power outlet.

• Try disconnecting from the power outlet, then plugging back in.

The receiver suddenly switches

off or the Phase Control indicator

blinks.

• Check that there are no loose strands of speaker wire touching the rear panel or another set of wires. If

so, re-attach the speaker wires, making sure there are no stray strands.

• The receiver may have a serious problem. Disconnect from the power and call a Pioneer authorized

independent service company.

During loud playback the power

suddenly switches off.

• Turn down the volume.

• Lower the 63 Hz and 125 Hz equalizer levels in the Manual MCACC setup on page 48.

• Switch on the digital safety feature. While holding down the SETUP button on the front panel, press

 STANDBY/ON to set this receiver to the standby mode. Use / to select DIGITAL SAFETY [OFF], and

then use / to select 1 or 2 (select D.SAFETY OFF to deactivate this feature). If the power switches off

even with 2 switched on, turn down the volume. With 1 or 2 on, some features may be unavailable.

The unit does not respond when

the buttons are pressed.

• Try switching the receiver off, then back on again.

• Try disconnecting the power cable, then connect again.

AMP ERR blinks in the display,

then the power automatically

switches off. The MCACC blinks

and the power does not turn on.

• The receiver may have a serious problem. Do not try switching the receiver on. Contact a Pioneer

authorized independent service company for help.

AMP OVERHEAT flashes, the

power turns off, and the power

indicator flashes.

• Allow the unit to cool down in a well-ventilated place before switching back on.

• Wait at least 1 minute, then try turning the power on again.

Symptom Remedy

No sound is output when an input

source is selected.

No sound output from the front

speakers.

• Check the volume, mute setting (press MUTE) and speaker setting (press SPEAKERS).

• Make sure the correct input source is selected.

• Check that the MCACC setup microphone is disconnected.

• Make sure the correct input signal is selected (press SIGNAL SEL). Note that when PCM is selected, you

won’t be able to hear any other signal format.

• Check that the source component is connected properly (see Connecting your equipment on page 17).

• Check that the speakers are connected properly (see Connecting the speakers on page 29).

No sound from the surround or

center speakers.

• Check that the Stereo listening mode or the Front Stage Surround Advance mode isn’t selected; select

one of the surround listening modes (see Listening in surround sound on page 36).

• Check that the surround/center speakers are not set to NO (see Speaker Setting on page 56).

• Check the channel level settings (see Channel Level on page 57).

• Check the speaker connections (see Connecting the speakers on page 29).

No sound from surround back

speakers.

• Check that the surround back speakers are set to LARGE or SMALL (see Speaker Setting on page 56).

• Make sure surround back processing is set to SBch ON (see Using surround back channel processing on

page 40.

• If the source is Dolby Surround EX or DTS ES with no flag to indicate 6.1 compatibility, then with surround

back processing set to SBch Auto, there will be no sound from the surround back speakers. In this case,

set to SBch ON (see Using surround back channel processing on page 40).

• If the source does not have 6.1 playback channels, make sure that surround back processing is set to SBch

ON and a surround mode is selected (see Listening in surround sound on page 36).

• Check the speaker connections (see Connecting the speakers on page 29). If only one surround back

speaker is connected, make sure it’s connected to the left channel speaker terminal.

SC_09TX.book Page 122 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Additional information

123

Other audio problems

No sound from subwoofer. • Check that the subwoofer is connected properly, switched on and the volume turned up.

• If your subwoofer has a sleep function, make sure it is switched off.

• Make sure that the Subwoofer setting is YES or PLUS (see Speaker Setting on page 56).

• The crossover frequency may be set too low; try setting it higher to match the characteristics of your other

speakers (see Speaker Setting on page 56)

• If there is very little low frequency information in the source material, change your speaker settings to

Front: SMALL / Subwoofer: YES, or Front: LARGE / Subwoofer: PLUS (see Speaker Setting on page 56).

• Check that the LFE channel is not set to OFF, or a very quiet setting (see Setting the Audio options on

page 106).

• Check the speaker level settings (see Channel Level on page 57).

• Check that the subwoofer is only connected to the PREOUT SUBWOOFER2 terminal. When only

connecting one subwoofer, connect it to the PREOUT SUBWOOFER1 terminal.

No sound from one speaker. • Check the speaker connection (see Connecting the speakers on page 29).

• Check the speaker level settings (see Channel Level on page 57).

• Check that the speaker hasn’t been set to NO (see Speaker Setting on page 56).

• The channel may not be recorded in the source. By using one of the advanced effect listening mode, you

may be able to create the missing channel (see Listening in surround sound on page 36).

Sound is produced from analog

components, but not from digital

ones (DVD, LD, CD-ROM etc.).

• Check that the input signal type is set to DIGITAL (see Choosing the input signal on page 39).

• Make sure that the digital input is assigned correctly for the input jack the component is connected to

(see The Input Setup menu on page 101).

• Check the digital output settings on the source component.

• If the source component has a digital volume control, make sure this is not turned down.

• Make sure that the multichannel analog inputs are not selected. Select any other input source.

No sound is output or a noise is

output when Dolby Digital/DTS

software is played back.

• Check that your DVD player is compatible with Dolby Digital/DTS discs.

• Check the digital output settings of your DVD player. Make sure that the DTS signal output is set to On.

• If the source component has a digital volume control, make sure this is not turned down.

No sound when using the System

Setup or Status menu.

• If the HDMI input source is selected, sound is muted until exiting either menu.

• If sound is muted in the sub zone (ZONE 2), it will be restored after exiting the System Setup menu.

Symptom Remedy

Broadcast stations cannot be

selected automatically, or there is

considerable noise in radio

broadcasts.

For FM broadcasts

• Fully extend the FM wire antenna, adjust the position for best reception and secure to a wall, etc.

• Use an outdoor antenna for better reception (see page 31).

For AM broadcasts

• Adjust the position and direction of the AM antenna.

• Use an outdoor antenna for better reception (see page 31).

• Noise may be caused by interference from other equipment, such as a fluorescent light, motor, etc.

Switch off or move the other equipment, or move the AM antenna.

A multichannel DVD source

appears to be downmixed to 2

channels during playback.

• Make sure that the multichannel analog inputs are selected (see Selecting the multichannel analog inputs

on page 68).

Noise is output when scanning a

DTS CD.

• This is not a malfunction of the receiver. The scan function of your player alters the digital information,

making it unreadable, resulting in noise being output. Lower the volume when scanning.

When playing a DTS format LD

there is audible noise on the

soundtrack.

• Make sure that the input signal type is set to DIGITAL (see Choosing the input signal on page 39).

Can’t record audio. • You can only make a digital recording from a digital source, and an analog recording from an analog

source.

• For digital sources, make sure that what you’re recording isn’t copy protected.

• Check that the OUT jacks are properly connected to the recorders input jacks (see Connecting analog

audio sources on page 27).

Recorded audio is different from

the current source, or inaudible.

• The RECOUT source is set to an input source other than the source you’re listening to. Select RECOUT

SOURCE to record the current input source (see Playing a different source when recording on page 109).

Subwoofer output is very low. • To route more signal to the subwoofer, set it to PLUS or set the front speakers to SMALL (see Speaker

Setting on page 56).

Everything seems to be set up

correctly, but the playback sound

is odd.

• The speakers may be out of phase. Check that the positive/negative speaker terminals on the receiver are

matched with the corresponding terminals on the speakers (see Connecting the speakers on page 29).

SC_09TX.book Page 123 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Additional information

124

Video

The PHASE CONTROL feature

doesn’t seem to have an audible

effect.

• If applicable, check that the lowpass filter switch on your subwoofer is off, or the lowpass cutoff is set to

the highest frequency setting. If there is a PHASE setting on your subwoofer, set it to 0º (or depending on

the subwoofer, the setting where you think it has the best overall effect on the sound).

• Make sure the speaker distance setting is correct for all speakers (see Speaker Distance on page 58).

Noise or hum can be heard even

when there is no sound being

input.

• Check that personal computers or other digital components connected to the same power source are not

causing interference.

There seems to be a time lag

between the speakers and the

output of the subwoofer.

• See Automatically setting up for surround sound (MCACC & Full Band Phase Control) on page 12 to set up

your system again using MCACC (this will automatically compensate for a delay in the subwoofer output).

Can’t use the SR+ features. • Make sure that HDMI Control is set to OFF (see Setting the HDMI Control mode on page 99).

The maximum volume available

(shown in the front LCD display)

is lower than the +12dB

maximum.

• This is not a malfunction. If the levels in Channel Level on page 57 have been adjusted, the maximum

volume will change accordingly.

No sound is output from the CD-

R/TAPE/MD OUT, DVR/VCR 1

OUT or DVR/VCR 2 OUT jack.

• Make sure that ZONE 3 / RECSEL Setting in the ZONE Audio Setup menu is set to RECSEL (see ZONE

Audio Setup on page 104).

Can’t select ZONE 3. • Make sure that ZONE 3 / RECSEL Setting in the ZONE Audio Setup menu is set to ZONE 3 (see ZONE

Audio Setup on page 104).

Symptom Remedy

No image is output when an input

is selected.

• Check the video connections of the source component (see page 24).

• For HDMI, or when digital video conversion is switched off (in Setting the Video options on page 108), you

must connect your TV to this receiver using the same type of video cable as you used to connect your video

component.

• Make sure the input assignment is correct for components connected using component video, HDMI or

S-Video cables (see The Input Setup menu on page 101).

• Check the video output settings of the source component.

• Check that the video input you selected on your TV is correct.

• Some components (such as video game units) have resolutions that may not be converted. If adjusting

this receiver’s Resolution setting (in Setting the Video options on page 108) and/or the resolution settings on

your component or display doesn’t work, try switching Digital Video Conversion (in Setting the Video options

on page 108) OFF.

Can’t record video. • Check that the source is not copy-protected.

• The video converter is not available when making recordings. Check that the same type of video cable is

used for connecting both the recorder and the video source (the one you want to record) to this receiver.

Noisy, intermittent, or distorted

picture.

• Sometimes a video deck may output a noisy video signal (during scanning, for example), or the video

quality may just be poor (with some video game units, for example). The picture quality may also depend on

the settings, etc. of your display device. Switch off the video converter and reconnect the source and display

device using the same type of connection (component, S-Video or composite), then start playback again.

ZONE2 video convert function

does not work.

• Conversion is not possible when the video input signal is a component signal. Either use the composite

or S-Video terminal, or connect to the TV using a component cable.

• Turn the video convert function off and connect the source component and monitor with the same type

of cord.

The external image is not

displayed on the LCD screen or

the picture is disturbed.

• The external video will not be displayed properly in the following conditions. Press the LCD VIEW button

to switch to the OSD mode.

– With HDMI inputs.

– When the video converter is off.

– When the resolution is set to PURE.

– When no external image is being input.

– When a non-compatible signal is being input.

SC_09TX.book Page 124 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Additional information

125

Settings

Professional Calibration EQ graphical output

Display

Symptom Remedy

The Auto MCACC Setup

continually shows an error.

• The ambient noise level may be too high. Keep the noise level in the room as low as possible (see also

Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup on page 14). If the noise level cannot be kept low enough, you

will have to set up the surround sound manually (page 56).

After using the Auto MCACC

Setup, the speaker size setting is

incorrect.

• There may have been some low frequency noise in the room from an air-conditioner, motor, etc. Switch off

all other appliances in the room and use Auto MCACC Setup again.

• Depending on a number of factors (room size, speaker placement, etc.) this may occur in some cases.

Change the speaker setting manually in Speaker Setting on page 56, and use the ALL (Keep SP System)

option for the Custom Menu in Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 44 if this is a recurring problem.

Can’t adjust the Fine Speaker

Distance setting (page 49)

properly.

• Check that the speakers are all in phase (make sure the positive (+) and negative (–) terminals are

matched up properly).

The display shows KEY LOCK

ON when you try to make

settings.

• With the receiver in standby, press  STANDBY/ON while holding down the SPEAKERS button to

disable the key lock.

Most recent settings have been

erased.

• The power cord was disconnected from the wall while adjusting this setting.

Symptom Remedy

The EQ response displayed in the

graphical output following

calibration does not appear

entirely flat.

• There are cases where the graph does not appear flat (even when selecting ALL CH ADJUST in the Auto

MCACC Setup) due to adjustments made to compensate for room characteristics to achieve optimal sound.

• Areas of the graph may appear identical (before and after) when there is little or no adjustment needed.

• The graph may appear to have shifted vertically when comparing before and after measurements.

EQ adjustments made using the

Manual MCACC setup on

page 48 do not appear to change

the graphical output.

• Despite level adjustments being made, the filters used for analysis may not display these adjustments in

the graphical output. However, these adjustments are taken this into account by the filters dedicated to

overall system calibration.

Lower frequency response

curves do not seem to have been

calibrated for SMALL speakers.

• Low frequencies used in bass management (the subwoofer channel) will not change for speakers that

have been specified as SMALL in the configuration, or do not output these frequencies.

• Calibration is performed, but due to your speakers’ low frequency limitations, no measurable sound is

output for display.

Graphical output data seems to

have disappeared.

• If the power is switched off, the measurement data for graphical output to a PC is cleared.

Symptom Remedy

The display is dark or off. • Press DIMMER repeatedly to select a different brightness.

After making an adjustment the

display goes off.

• Press DIMMER repeatedly to select a different brightness.

You can’t get DIGITAL to display

when using the SIGNAL SEL

button.

• Check the digital connections and make sure that the digital inputs are assigned correctly (see The Input

Setup menu on page 101).

• If the multichannel analog inputs are selected, select a different input source.

DOLBY DIGITAL or DTS does not

appear on the STATUS audio

input information screen when

playing Dolby/DTS software.

• DOLBY DIGITAL or DTS does not appear if playback is paused.

• Check the playback (especially the digital output) settings of the source component.

When playing a DVD-Audio disc,

the DVD player display shows

96 kHz. However, the receiver’s

display does not.

• This is not a malfunction. 96 kHz audio from DVD-Audio discs is only output from the analog outputs of

the DVD player. This receiver cannot show the playback sample rate when using the analog inputs.

During playback of a DTS 96/24

source, the display doesn’t show

96 kHz.

• Make sure that the receiver is set to AUTO or DIGITAL (see Choosing the input signal on page 39).

SC_09TX.book Page 125 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Additional information

126

Remote control

i.LINK interface

When playing Dolby Digital or

DTS sources, some input

channels do not light correctly

on the STATUS audio input

information screen.

• Check that the player is connected using a digital connection.

• Make sure that the receiver is set to AUTO or DIGITAL (see Choosing the input signal on page 39).

• Check that the player isn’t set up so that Dolby Digital and DTS sources are converted to PCM.

• Ensure that if there are several audio tracks on the disc, the Dolby Digital or DTS is selected.

OSD does not appear in the LCD

display.

• Press the LCD View button on the front panel and change the LCD settings (page 110).

When playing certain discs, none

of the receiver’s input signal is

displayed on the STATUS screen.

• The disc may not contain 5.1/6.1 channel material. Check the disc packaging for more on what audio

tracks are recorded on the disc.

When playing a disc with the

listening mode set to Auto

Surround, 2 PL II or Neo:6

appear on the receiver.

• Make sure that the receiver is set to AUTO or DIGITAL (see Choosing the input signal on page 39).

• If a two channel soundtrack is currently playing (including Dolby Surround encoded), then this is not a

malfunction. Check the disc packaging for details about the audio tracks available.

During playback of a Surround

EX or DTS-ES source on the SBch

AUTO setting, EX or ES does not

appear, or the signal is not

properly processed.

• The source may be Dolby Surround EX/DTS-ES software, but it has no flag to indicate it is 6.1 compatible.

Set to SBch ON (see Using surround back channel processing on page 40), then switch to the THX

Surround EX or Standard EX listening mode (see Listening in surround sound on page 36).

During playback of DVD-Audio,

the display shows PCM.

• This will occur when playing DVD-Audio material over the HDMI connection. This is not a malfunction.

Symptom Remedy

Cannot be remote controlled. • Try replacing the batteries in the remote control (see Loading the batteries on page 8).

• Be sure to operate within 7 m (23 feet) and a 30º angle of the remote sensor on the front panel (see

Operating range of remote control unit on page 33).

• Check that there are no obstacles between the receiver and the remote control.

• Make sure that there is no fluorescent or other strong light shining on to the remote sensor.

• Check the connections of the CONTROL IN jack (see Operating other Pioneer components with this unit’s

sensor on page 118).

Other components can’t be

operated with the system remote.

• If the battery ran down, the preset codes may have been cleared. Re-enter the preset codes.

• The preset code may be incorrect. Redo the procedure for entering preset codes.

The SR cable is connected, but

the connected components can’t

be operated with the remote.

• Reinsert the SR cable, making sure it’s connected to the right jack (see Using this receiver with a Pioneer

plasma display on page 75).

• Make sure that there is an analog or HDMI connection between the units. This is necessary for the SR

feature to work.

• Check that the other component is made by Pioneer. The SR feature only works with Pioneer equipment.

Symptom Remedy

No sound is output. • Check that the source player is compatible with i.LINK audio.

• Check the output settings of the source player.

• Make sure that i.LINK or AUTO is selected using the SIGNAL SEL button (see Choosing the input signal

on page 39).

The i.LINK indicator does not

light up even when an i.LINK-

equipped component is selected.

• Make sure that i.LINK or AUTO is selected using the SIGNAL SEL button (see Choosing the input signal

on page 39).

• Check the i.LINK connections; use an i.LINK cable of less than 3.5 m (11 feet).

• Check that the source components conforms to the i.LINK Audio format.

• Make sure that all components connected between the receiver and the source are switched on.

PQLS OFF or PQLS ON is

displayed temporarily on your

receiver and the sound output is

discontinued.

• During playback through an i.LINK connection, if you change the settings for other i.LINK components,

the sound will be discontinued momentarily. This is not a malfunction.

The program format indicators

don’t disappear when SACD

playback stops.

• The program format indicators remain lit until another format source is input. This is not a malfunction.

SC_09TX.book Page 126 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Additional information

127

HDMI

You can’t get i.LINK to display

when using the SIGNAL SEL

button.

• Make sure your i.LINK source components are switched on.

• Check that i.LINK is assigned correctly (see The Input Setup menu on page 101).

After upgrading a component, it

is not recognized and cannot be

selected using the i.LINK

connection.

• You may need to reset the i.LINK database memory in the receiver (use the front panel):

1 In the standby mode, press  STANDBY/ON while pressing SETUP.

2Use / to select i.LINK DB [NO], then press ENTER.

3Use / to select Clear, then press ENTER.

4When Clear? [OK] appears, press ENTER again. Resetting is completed once the normal screen

appears. If DB ERROR is displayed, perform the procedure again.

Symptom Remedy

The HDMI indicator blinks

continuously.

• Check all the points below.

No picture or sound. • This receiver is HDCP-compatible. Check that the components you are connecting are also HDCP-

compatible. If they are not, please connect them using the component, S-Video or composite video jacks.

• Depending on the connected source component, it’s possible that it will not work with this receiver (even

if it is HDCP-compatible). In this case, connect using the component, S-Video or composite video jacks

between source and receiver.

• If the problem still persists when connecting your HDMI component directly to your monitor, please

consult the component or monitor manual or contact the manufacturer for support.

• If video images do not appear on your TV or plasma display, try adjusting the resolution, DeepColor or

other setting for your component.

• If ‘NOT SUPPORT’ appears in the receiver’s display, try adjusting the resolution, DeepColor or other

setting for your component.

• While analog video signals are being output over HDMI, use a separate connection for audio output.

• When this receiver reproduces MULTI CH IN audio sources with the HDMI setting set to THROUGH, you

cannot hear audio output from all channels. In this case, make a digital or analog audio connection.

• To output signals in DeepColor, use an HDMI cable (High Speed HDMI™ Cable) to connect this receiver

to a component or TV with the DeepColor feature.

No picture. • Try changing the Resolution setting (in Setting the Video options on page 108).

• Set the HDMI output setting to the connected HDMI OUT terminal (in Switching the HDMI output on

page 110).

No sound, or sound suddenly

ceases.

• Check that the HDMI AV setting is set to AMP/THROUGH.

• If the component is a DVI device, use a separate connection for the audio.

• If analog video is being output over HDMI, please use a separate connection for the audio.

• Check the audio output settings of the source component.

Noisy or distorted picture. • Sometimes a video deck may output a noisy video signal (during scanning, for example), or the video

quality may just be poor (with some video game units, for example). The picture quality may also depend on

the settings, etc. of your display device. Switch off the video converter and reconnect the source and display

device using the same type of connection (component, S-Video or composite), then start playback again.

• If the problem still persists when connecting your HDMI component directly to your monitor, please

consult the component or monitor manual or contact the manufacturer for support.

HDCP ERROR shows in the

display.

• Check whether or not the connected component is compatible with HDCP. If it is not compatible with

HDCP, reconnect the source device using a different type of connection (component, S-Video or

composite). Some components that are compatible with HDCP still cause this message to be displayed, but

so long as there is no problem with displaying video, this is not a malfunction.

Amp-linked operation not

possible using HDMI control

function.

• Select ON for the HDMI control setting (see Setting the HDMI Control mode on page 99).

• Turn the TV’s power on before turning on this receiver’s power.

• Set the TV side HDMI control setting to ON.

• Connect the TV to the HDMI OUT 1 terminal and set the HDMI output to HDMI OUT 1. Then turn on first

the TV’s power, then this receiver’s power.

SC_09TX.book Page 127 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Additional information

128

Important information regarding the HDMI

connection

There are cases where you may not be able to route HDMI

signals through this receiver (this depends on the HDMI-

equipped component you are connecting–check with the

manufacturer for HDMI compatibility information).

If you aren’t receiving HDMI signals properly through this

receiver (from your component), please try one of the

following configurations when connecting up.

Configuration A

Use component video cables to connect the video output

of your HDMI-equipped component to the receiver’s

component video input. The receiver can then convert the

analog component video signal to a digital HDMI signal

for transmission to the display. For this configuration,

use the most convenient connection (digital is

recommended) for sending audio to the receiver. See the

operating instructions for more on audio connections.

Note

• The picture quality will change slightly during

conversion.

Configuration B

Connect your HDMI-equipped component directly to the

display using an HDMI cable. Then use the most

convenient connection (digital is recommended) for

sending audio to the receiver. See the operating

instructions for more on audio connections. Set the

display volume to minimum when using this

configuration.

Note

• If your display only has one HDMI terminal, you can

only receive HDMI video from the connected

component.

• Depending on the component, audio output may be

limited to the number of channels available from the

connected display unit (for example audio output is

reduced to 2 channels for a monitor with stereo audio

limitations).

• If you want to switch the input source, you’ll have to

switch functions on both the receiver and your

display unit.

• Since the sound is muted on the display when using

the HDMI connection, you must adjust the volume on

the display every time you switch input sources.

HOME MEDIA GALLERY

Symptoms Causes

Home Media Gallery/NETWORK

No servers are found. • Check the physical connections (hub, 100BASE-TX/10BASE-T, or crossed cable and other cable quality

when cabled directly to a PC). It is strongly recommended to use 100BASE-TX for playback quality and

display speed.

• Check the logical connections (IP Address setup, DHCP, etc.). Confirm the IP Address is correct if

acquired by Auto IP and Firewall setup. Also check if the IP Address is properly acquired with DHCP on the

“Network Setup” screen that follows the “Setup” menu.

• Using two or more application servers on a single PC may cause unstable operation.

For proper operation, it is strongly recommended that one application server is used on a single PC.

• Check the PC if its media server is running. Restart if necessary. Check if one or more servers are On (this

may cause malfunction).

• Check if the PC is operating properly. Reboot the PC after confirming its specifications and setup.

• Check the media server setup. If a client is registered manually the setup procedure may have to be run

again. An option “Not Allowed” may have been selected for connections.

• Check if UPnP (Universal Plug and Play) is enabled on your router. If it is not, enable it. Refer to your

router’s instruction manual for procedures.

• Wait for a short period then select “Update to Latest Information” from the Tool Menu. (See page 78)

No previously connected

server(s) found (items in “Select

Servers” are dimmed).

• Refer to the possible solutions provided for “No servers are found”.

An available server is selected

but cannot be navigated.

• Check if the server is correctly set up for file sharing, if the target folder has been deleted, or if one or more

folders have been corrupted on the server.

• Check if there are too many files in each folder.

A server is arbitrarily selected. • This arbitrary selection happens when the server you used before had been set to display the top menu

screen (if you reset it, other servers connected are also reset). When the “Single Server/USB” option is

selected on the “Auto Connection Setup” screen that follows the “Setup” menu, the server is automatically

accessed if only one server is connected. Use the Tool Menu to select the proper server. (See page 78)

File/folder configuration differs

from one server to another

(strange configuration).

• The Media Navigator displays the server contents as classified by the server.

• If no information (such as ID3 tag) is contained in the file, files cannot be classified on the server.

SC_09TX.book Page 128 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Additional information

129

“The list could not be acquired.”

appears on the Server List

screen.

• Refer to the possible solutions provided for “No servers are found”.

• If the above does not solve the problem, try turning a off on the remote control unit then turn TV a on on

the plasma display.

A communication error message

appears.

• Refer to the possible solutions provided for “No servers are found”.

• If the above does not solve the problem, try turning a off on the remote control unit then turn TV a on on

the plasma display.

Home Media Gallery/PLAYBACK

Image or sound is interrupted or

distorted (Block noise appears).

• Check the physical connections (hub, 100BASE-TX/10BASE-T, or crossed cable and other cable quality

when cabled directly to a PC). It is strongly recommended to use 100BASE-TX for playback quality and

display speed.

• Check if the PC is operating properly. Reboot the PC after confirming its specifications and setup.

• Check if the file complies to the supported format, bit rate or profile. Also check if the file is damaged.

• When connected by a wireless LAN, check if the bit rate is sufficient.

• Some files that comply with the supported format may not be played back or displayed.

Cannot play or display. • Check the physical connections (hub, 100BASE-TX/10BASE-T, or crossed cable and other cable quality

when cabled directly to a PC). It is strongly recommended to use 100BASE-TX for playback quality and

display speed.

• Check if the PC is operating properly. Reboot the PC after confirming its specifications and setup.

• Check if the file complies to the supported format, bit rate or profile. Also check if the file is damaged.

• Check if the leasing contract for the server has expired.

• When connected by a wireless LAN, check if the bit rate is sufficient.

• Some files that comply with the supported format may not be played back or displayed.

• It takes time to capture and display a large-sized image. If this is the case, no operation may be performed.

• See the Pioneer website (www.pioneerelectronics.com) for the formats that are supported.

Home Media Gallery/FIRMWARE

No updates are possible on USB. • Check if the device is Mass Storage Class compliant, if it is connected properly, nothing is damaged

(power unit, mode such as Mass Storage mode and media format, etc.), if it contains the supported files,

and if the speed of the device is sufficient (poor device speed may result in interrupted or delayed display of

images due to a bit-rate problem). When using a digital camera that is not Mass Storage Class compliant,

insert the Flash Memory card into the multi-card reader.

• Confirm that the device is correctly inserted or removed.

• Check that the firmware file has been correctly downloaded. Also check the file size.

• See the Pioneer website (www.pioneerelectronics.com) for details.

Home Media Gallery/USB

USB devices are not properly

recognized.

• Check if the device is Mass Storage Class compliant, if it is connected properly, nothing is damaged

(power unit, mode such as Mass Storage mode and media format, etc.), if it contains the supported files,

and if the speed of the device is sufficient (poor device speed may result in interrupted or delayed display of

images due to a bit-rate problem). When using a digital camera that is not Mass Storage Class compliant,

insert the Flash Memory card into the multi-card reader.

• Confirm that the device is correctly inserted or removed.

• No USB hub is supported. When you connect a home network, connect directly to the device’s USB port.

Image or sound is interrupted or

distorted (Block noise appears).

• Verify that the file complies with the supported format, bit rate or profile. Also check the file for damage.

• Some files that comply with the supported format may not play back or display properly.

• Check if the device is Mass Storage Class compliant, if it is connected properly, nothing is damaged

(power unit, mode such as Mass Storage mode and media format, etc.), if it contains the supported files,

and if the speed of the device is sufficient (poor device speed may result in interrupted or delayed display of

images due to a bit-rate problem). When using a digital camera that is not Mass Storage Class compliant,

insert the Flash Memory card into the multi-card reader.

Home Media Gallery/Slide Show

Slideshow (photo content)

doesn’t start.

• Check if the receiver is placed into the pause or rotation mode. If that is the case, press  or ENTER to

start the slideshow.

Next picture does not appear in

the slideshow.

• The time needed to display a picture may be longer than the time set to display in Slide Show settings.

Reduce the picture size using a PC and try again.

• Slide Show only displays the supported files. If there is only one supported file, that file will remain on the

display and not display any other files.

Symptoms Causes

SC_09TX.book Page 129 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Additional information

130

iPod messages

XM radio messages

Symptom Cause Action

Error I1 There is a problem with the signal path from the

iPod to the receiver.

Switch off the receiver and reconnect the iPod to the receiver.

If this doesn’t seem to work, try resetting your iPod.

Error I2 The software version being used with the iPod

needs to be updated.

Update the software being used with the iPod (please use the

latest iPod software versions later than the iPod updater 2004-

10-20).

Error I3 When operation is not possible with the iPod

operation mode set to Type 1.

Switch the iPod operation mode set to Type 2 (page 62).

When the iPod software version is too old. Update the iPod software to the latest version.

Error I4 When there is no response from the iPod. Update the iPod software to the latest version.

No Music Track There are no playable songs currently stored in

the iPod.

Input some music files compatible with iPod playback. When

you want to play videos, press iPod CTRL to play the video

track using the controls on the iPod.

No Track When there are no tracks in the category

selected on the iPod.

Select a different category.

Symptom Cause Action

Check XM Tuner The XM Mini-Tuner is not installed in the XM

Mini-Tuner Dock or the XM Mini-Tuner dock is

not connected to this receiver.

Confirm the XM Mini-Tuner is fully seated in the dock and

check the XM Mini-Tuner dock cable is connected to this

receiver.

Check Antenna The XM antenna is not connected to the XM Mini-

Tuner Dock or the XM antenna cable has become

damaged.

Check that the XM antenna is securely connected to the XM

Mini-Tuner Dock and check the antenna cable for damage.

Replace the XM antenna if the cable is damaged.

Loading The XM Mini-Tuner is acquiring audio or

program information from the XM satellite

signal. This message can also occur in weak XM

signal conditions.

This message should disappear in a few seconds in good

signal conditions. If you see this message often, reposition

the XM antenna to get better signal reception.

No Signal The XM Mini-Tuner is not receiving the XM

satellite signal. Something may be blocking the

XM antenna’s view of the satellites or the

antenna is not properly aimed.

Check for antenna obstructions and reposition the XM

antenna to get better signal reception.

See instructions supplied with the XM Mini-Tuner and Dock

for antenna installation information.

Off Air The XM channel you selected is not currently

broadcasting.

Check back at a later time; in the mean time, select another

channel.

CH Unauthorized You may be attempting to tune to an XM channel

that is blocked or that you cannot receive with

your XM subscription package.

Consult the latest channel guide at www.xmradio.com for the

current list of channels. For information on receiving this

channel, visit www.xmradio.com or contact XM Satellite

Radio at 1-800-967-2346.

CH Unavailable The selected channel is not available. The

channel may have been reassigned to a different

channel number.

This message may occur initially with a new

radio or a radio that has not received XM’s signal

for an extended period.

Consult the latest channel guide at www.xmradio.com for the

current list of channels. For cases of a new radio or a radio

that has not received XM’s signal for an extended period,

allow the radio to receive the XM satellite signal for at least 5

minutes and then try to select the channel again.

– – – – – – – – No artist name or song title is available for this

selection.

No action required

Upgrade XM Tuner An old type of tuner is connected. Use an XM Mini-Tuner.

XM Power Error A short-circuit occurring in the antenna or

surrounding antenna cable.

Make sure that there is nothing unusual with the antenna or

antenna cable. Switch the power off, then back on again.

SC_09TX.book Page 130 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Additional information

131

SIRIUS radio messages

i.LINK messages

You may see the following messages displayed in the front LCD display when using the i.LINK interface.

Meaning of messages displayed when the HDMI control function is set to ON

HOME MEDIA GALLERY messages

Symptom Cause Action

Antenna Error Antenna is not properly connected. Check that the antenna cable is attached securely.

Check Sirius Tuner SIRIUS Connect tuner is not properly connected. Check that the 8 pin mini DIN cable and AC Adapter are

attached securely.

Acquiring Signal The SIRIUS signal is too weak at the current

location.

n/a

Subscription Updating Unit is updating subscription. Wait until the encryption code has been updated.

Updating Channels Unit is updating channels. Wait until the encryption code has been updated.

Invalid Channel Selected channel is not available/does not exist. Select another channel.

Message Explanation

BUS FULL The i.LINK bus has reached its capacity and cannot transmit any more data.

CANNOT LINK 1 The connection between the receiver and the selected i.LINK-equipped component is unstable. If the

i.LINK cables appear to be connected properly and both the receiver and i.LINK-equipped component are

on, switch both units off, then on again to re-establish the connection between them.

CANNOT LINK 2 The receiver can’t identify the selected i.LINK-equipped component. For example, the receiver may not be

able to identify an i.LINK-equipped personal computer.

LINK CHECK The receiver is checking the i.LINK network. It does this when components are added to, or removed from

the network. The sound may be interrupted if this happens during playback.

LOOP CONNECT The i.LINK network cannot function because the connected components form a loop. See The Input Setup

menu on page 101 for more on this.

NO NAME When an i.LINK-equipped component has no name, this message is displayed instead of the proper

component name.

NO SIGNAL A component is outputting an i.LINK signal that the receiver cannot reproduce. This receiver can only

reproduce signals from i.LINK-Audio-equipped components. See About i.LINK on page 66 for more on this.

PQLS OFF This is displayed on a playback component when PQLS turns off during playback. The sound may be

interrupted momentarily when this happens.

PQLS ON This is displayed on a playback component when PQLS turns on during playback. The sound may be

interrupted momentarily when this happens.

UNKNOWN When an i.LINK-equipped component name cannot be recognized, this message is displayed instead of

the proper component name.

Message (error number) Problem Remedy

HDMI C ERR 110 to 190

HDMI C ERR 1A0

HDMI C ERR 1B0

HDMI C ERR 1C0

HDMI C ERR 2C0

HDMI cable is not properly connected. • Check the connection.

• There may be a broken wire in the cable.

• This receiver or connected components may be damaged.

No. Message Problem

001 Content playback failed (001). No details are available for the error

100 A communication error occurred (100). No further details are available for the error

101 No response from the server (101). Timeout period reaches due to delayed server response

102 Disconnected from the network (102). Cables are disconnected

103 Invalid response was received from the server (103). Invalid response from the server

300 This format is not supported (300). A file that is not supported is selected

500 Authorization failed (500). Failed to obtain WMDRM authorization

SC_09TX.book Page 131 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Additional information

132

• The message consists of “Error”, “Warning” and “Information” and is displayed for 5 seconds.

Note

• If the unit does not operate normally due to external effects such as static electricity disconnect the power plug

from the outlet and insert again to return to normal operating conditions.

501 Authorization failed (501). Failed to obtain WMDRM authorization

503 Authorization failed (503). Please check for trouble in routers,

hubs, and other network devices.

Failed to obtain WMDRM authorization

504 Authorization failed (504). The maximum allowed number of

devices are connected to the server.

Failed to obtain WMDRM

505 Authorization failed (505). The content license is off. Please turn

on the license from the server.

Failed to obtain WMDRM authorization

Displaying pictures in the Home Media Gallery for an extended period may cause an after-image.

No. Message Problem

SC_09TX.book Page 132 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Additional information

133

Surround sound formats

Below is a brief description of the main surround sound

formats you’ll find on DVDs, satellite, cable and

terrestrial broadcasts, and video cassettes.

Dolby

The Dolby technologies are explained below. See

www.dolby.com for more detailed information.

Dolby Digital

Dolby Digital is a multichannel digital audio coding

system widely used in cinemas, and in the home for DVD

and digital broadcast soundtracks. It can deliver up to six

discrete audio channels, comprising five full range

channels and a special LFE (low frequency effects)

channel used mainly for deep, rumbling sound effects;

hence the term “5.1-channel” Dolby Digital.

In addition to the format features above, Dolby Digital

decoders offer downmixing for compatibility with mono,

stereo and Dolby Pro Logic audio from a number of bit

rates and channels. Another feature, called Dialog

Normalization, attenuates programs based on the

average level of dialog in a program relative to its peak

level (also known as Dialnorm) in order to achieve

uniform playback level.

Dolby Digital Surround EX

Dolby Digital Surround EX (the EX stands for EXtended)

is an extension of Dolby Digital encoding whereby a

surround back channel is matrixed into the surround left/

right channels for 6.1 channel playback. This allows for

compatibility with Dolby Digital 5.1 channel decoding, as

well as for decoding using Dolby Digital EX.

Dolby Pro Logic IIx and Dolby Surround

Dolby Pro Logic IIx is an improved version of the Dolby

Pro Logic II (and Dolby Pro Logic) decoding system. Using

the innovative “steering logic” circuit, this system

extracts surround sound from sources as follows:

• Dolby Pro Logic – 4.1 channel sound (mono

surround) from any stereo source

• Dolby Pro Logic II – 5.1 channel sound (stereo

surround) from any stereo source

• Dolby Pro Logic IIx – 6.1 or 7.1 channel sound

(stereo surround and surround back) from two

channel or 5.1(and 6.1) channel sources

With two channel sources, the “.1” subwoofer channel is

generated by bass management in the receiver.

Dolby Surround is an encoding system which embeds

surround sound information within a stereo soundtrack,

which a Dolby Pro Logic decoder can then use for

enhanced surround listening with greater sound detail.

Dolby Digital Plus

Dolby Digital Plus is the next-generation audio

technology for all high-definition programming and

media. It combines the efficiency to meet future

broadcast demands with the power and flexibility to

realize the full audio potential expected in the upcoming

high-definition era. Built on Dolby Digital, the multi-

channel audio standard for DVD and HD broadcasts

worldwide, Dolby Digital Plus was designed for the next-

generation A/V receivers but remains fully compatible

with all current A/V receivers.

Dolby Digital Plus delivers multi-channel audio programs

of up to 7.1 channels (*) and supports multiple programs

in a single encoded bitstream with the maximum bit rate

potential of up to 6 Mbps and the maximum bit rate

performance of up to 3 Mbps on HD DVD and 1.7 Mbps

on Blu-ray Disc, and it outputs Dolby Digital bitstreams

for playback on existing Dolby Digital systems. Dolby

Digital Plus can accurately reproduce the sound

originally intended by directors and producers.

It also features multi-channel sound with discrete

channel output, interactive mixing and streaming

capability in advanced systems. Supported by High-

Definition Media Interface (HDMI), a single-cable digital

connection is possible for high-definition audio and

video.

Dolby TrueHD

Dolby TrueHD is the next-generation lossless encoding

technology developed for high-definition optical discs in

the upcoming era. Dolby TrueHD delivers tantalizing

sound that is bit-for-bit identical to the studio master,

unlocking the true high-definition entertainment

experience on high-definition optical discs in the next

generation. When coupled with high-definition video,

Dolby TrueHD offers an unprecedented home theater

experience with stunning sound and high-definition

picture.

It supports bit rates of up to 18 Mbps and records up to 8

full-range channels (*) individually with 24-bit/96 kHz

audio. It also features extensive metadata including

dialogue normalization and dynamic range control.

Supported by High-Definition Media Interface (HDMI), a

single-cable digital connection is possible for high-

definition audio and video.

HD DVD and Blu-ray Disc standards currently limit their

maximum number of audio channels to eight, whereas

Dolby Digital Plus and Dolby TrueHD support more than

eight audio channels.

SC_09TX.book Page 133 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Additional information

134

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.

“Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, “Surround EX” and the double-D

symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

DTS

The DTS technologies are explained below. See

www.dtstech.com for more detailed information.

DTS Digital Surround

DTS Digital Surround is a 5.1-channel audio coding

system from DTS Inc. now widely used for DVD-Video,

DVD-Audio, 5.1 music discs, digital broadcasts, and

video games. It can deliver up to six discrete audio

channels, comprising five full range channels, including

an LFE channel. Higher sound quality is achieved

through the use of a low compression rate, and high

rates of transmittance during playback.

DTS-ES

DTS-ES (the ES stands for Extended Surround) is a

decoder that is capable of decoding both DTS-ES

Discrete 6.1 and DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 encoded sources.

DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 gives ‘true’ 6.1 channel sound, with

a completely separate (discrete) surround back channel.

DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 has a surround back channel matrixed

into the surround left/right channels. Both sources are

also compatible with a conventional DTS 5.1 channel

decoder.

DTS Neo:6

DTS Neo:6 can generate 7.1 channel surround sound

from any matrixed stereo source (such as video or TV)

and from 5.1 channel sources. It uses both the channel

information already encoded into the source, as well as

its own processing to determine channel localization

(with two channel sources, the “.1” subwoofer channel is

generated by bass management in the receiver). Two

modes (Cinema and Music) are available using DTS

Neo:6 with two channel sources.

DTS 96/24

DTS 96/24 is an extension of the original DTS Digital

Surround which offers high quality 96 kHz/24-bit audio

using a DTS 96/24 decoder. This format is also fully

backward compatible with all existing decoders. This

means that DVD players can play this software using a

conventional DTS 5.1 channel decoder.

DTS-EXPRESS

DTS-EXPRESS is a low-bitrate encoding technology

supporting up to 5.1 channels with fixed data transfer

rates. This format is incorporated with sub audio on HD

DVD and secondary audio on Blu-ray Disc while boasting

the potential applicability to upcoming broadcasts and

memory audio contents.

DTS-HD Master Audio

DTS-HD Master Audio is a technology that delivers

master audio sources recorded in a professional studio

to listeners without any loss of data, preserving audio

quality. DTS-HD Master Audio adopts variable data

transfer rates, facilitating data transfer to the maximum

rate of 24.5 Mbps in the

Blu-ray disc format, 18.0 Mbps in the HD-DVD format,

which by far exceeds that of a standard DVD. These high

data transfer rates enable lossless transmission of 96

kHz/24-bit 7.1-channel audio sources without

deteriorating the quality of the original sound. DTS-HD

Master Audio is an irreplaceable technology that can

reproduce sound faithfully as intended by the creator of

music or movies.

“DTS” is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc. and “DTS-HD

Master Audio” is a trademark of DTS, Inc.

Windows Media Audio 9 Professional

Windows Media Audio 9 Professional (WMA9 Pro) is a

discrete surround format developed by Microsoft

Corporation.

WMA9 Pro can support up to 5.1/7.1 channel playback

with sampling rates up to 24-bit/96 kHz. Using the unique

WMA compression techniques, WMA9 Pro can deliver

multichannel music and soundtracks over high-speed

internet networks at low bit rates with minimal audio

degradation. Playback may be enjoyed with the Windows

Media Player 9 Series (or above) and other third-party

media players on a personal computer, or with an AV

amplifier with on-board WMA9 Pro decoding.

Windows Media and the Windows logo are trademarks or

registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the

United States and/or other countries.

SC_09TX.book Page 134 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Additional information

135

About THX

The THX technologies are explained below. See

www.thx.com for more detailed information.

• THX Cinema processing

THX is an exclusive set of standards and technologies established by

THX Ltd. THX grew from George Lucas’ personal desire to make your

experience of the film soundtrack, in both movie theatres and in your

home theatre, as faithful as possible to what the director intended.

Movie soundtracks are mixed in special movie theatres called

dubbing stages and are designed to be played back in movie theatres

with similar equipment and conditions. This same soundtrack is then

transferred directly onto Laserdisc, VHS tape, DVD, etc., and is not

changed for playback in a small home theatre environment. THX

engineers developed patented technologies to accurately translate

the sound from the movie theatre environment into the home,

correcting the tonal and spatial errors that occur. On this product,

when the THX indicator is on, THX features are automatically added

in Cinema modes (e.g. THX Cinema, THX Surround EX).

• Re-Equalization

The tonal balance of a film soundtrack will be excessively bright and

harsh when played back over audio equipment in the home because

film soundtracks were designed to be played back in large movie

theaters using very different professional equipment. Re-Equalization

restores the correct tonal balance for watching a movie soundtrack in

a small home environment.

• Timbre Matching

The human ear changes our perception of a sound depending on the

direction from which the sound is coming. In a movie theatre, there is

an array of surround speakers so that the surround information is all

around you. In a home theatre, you use only two speakers located to

the side of your head. The Timbre Matching feature filters the

information going to the surround speakers so that they more closely

match the tonal characteristics of the sound coming from the front

speakers. This ensures seamless panning between the front and

surround speakers.

• Adaptive Decorrelation

In a movie theatre, a large number of surround speakers help create

an enveloping surround sound experience, but in a home theatre

there are usually only two speakers. This can make the surround

speakers sound like headphones that lack spaciousness and

envelopment. The surround sounds will also collapse into the closest

speaker as you move away from the middle seating position. Adaptive

Decorrelation slightly changes one surround channel’s time and

phase relationship with respect to the other surround channel. This

expands the listening position and creates—with only two speakers—

the same spacious surround experience as in a movie theatre.

• THX Ultra2

Before any home theatre component can be THX Ultra2 certified, it

must incorporate all the features above and also pass a rigorous

series of quality and performance tests. Only then can a product

feature the THX Ultra2 logo, which is your guarantee that the Home

Theatre products you purchase will give you superb performance for

many years to come. THX Ultra2 requirements cover every aspect of

the product including pre-amplifier and power amplifier performance

and operation, and hundreds of other parameters in both the digital

and analog domain.

• THX Surround EX

THX Surround EX - Dolby Digital Surround EX is a joint development

of Dolby Laboratories and the THX Ltd. In a movie theater, film

soundtracks that have been encoded with Dolby Digital Surround EX

technology are able to reproduce an extra channel which has been

added during the mixing of the program. This channel, called

Surround Back, places sounds behind the listener in addition to the

currently available front left, front center, front right, surround right,

surround left and subwoofer channels. This additional channel

provides the opportunity for more detailed imaging behind the

listener and brings more depth, spacious ambience and sound

localization than ever before. Movies that were created using the

Dolby Digital Surround EX technology, when released into the home

consumer market may exhibit wording to that effect on the

packaging. A list of movies created using this technology can be

found on the Dolby web site at www.dolby.com.

Only receiver and controller products bearing the THX Surround EX

logo, when in the THX Surround EX mode, faithfully reproduce this

new technology in the home.

This product may also engage the “THX Surround EX” mode during

the playback of 5.1 channel material that is not Dolby Digital

Surround EX encoded. In such case the information delivered to the

Surround Back channel will be program dependent and may or may

not be very pleasing depending on the particular soundtrack and the

tastes of the individual listener.

• Advanced Speaker Array (ASA)

ASA is a proprietary THX technology which processes the sound fed

to 2 side and 2 back surround speakers to provide the optimal

surround sound experience. When you set up your home theater

system using all eight speaker outputs (Left, Center, Right, Surround

Right, Surround Back Right, Surround Back Left, Surround Left and

Subwoofer) placing the two Surround Back speakers close together

facing the front of the room as shown in the diagram will provide the

largest sweet spot. If for practical reasons you have to place the

Surround Back speakers apart, you will need to go THX Audio Set-up

screen and choose the setting that most closely corresponds to the

speaker spacing, which will re-optimize the surround sound-field.

ASA is used in three new modes; THX Ultra2 CINEMA, THX Ultra2

MUSIC and THX Ultra2 GAMES.

• Boundary Gain Compensation™

Depending on the listener’s and the subwoofer’s position, the listener

may experience an excessive bass effect. This feature compensates

for excessive bass resulting from a boundary gain effect. This feature

is designed to operate when used with a subwoofer certified to THX

Ultra2™ specifications.

•THX Music

For the replay of multi-channel music the THX MusicMode should be

selected. In this mode THX ASA processing is applied to the surround

channels of all 5.1 encoded music sources such as DTS, Dolby Digital

and DVD-Audio to provide a wide stable rear soundstage.

• THX Games

For the replay of stereo and multi-channel game audio the THX

Games Mode should be selected. In this mode THX ASA processing

is applied to the surround channels of all 5.1 and 2.0 encoded game

sources such as analog, PCM, DTS and Dolby Digital. This accurately

places all game audio surround information, providing a full 360

degree playback environment. THX Games Mode is unique as it gives

you a smooth transition of audio in all points of the surround field.

• THX Loudness Plus Description

THX Loudness Plus is a new volume control technology featured in

THX Ultra2 Plus™ and THX Select2 Plus™ Certified receivers. With

THX Loudness Plus, home theater audiences can now experience the

rich details in a surround mix at any volume level. A consequence of

turning the volume below Reference Level is that certain sound

SC_09TX.book Page 135 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Additional information

136

elements can be lost or perceived differently by the listener. THX

Loudness Plus compensates for the tonal and spatial shifts that occur

when the volume is reduced by intelligently adjusting ambient

surround channel levels and frequency response. This enables users

to experience the true impact of soundtracks regardless of the volume

setting. THX Loudness Plus is automatically applied when listening in

any THX listening mode. The new THX Cinema, THX Music, and THX

Games modes are tailored to apply the proper THX Loudness Plus

settings for each type of content

•ASA Description

ASA is a proprietary THX technology which processes the sound fed

to 2 side and 2 back surround speakers to provide the optimal

surround sound experience. When you set up your home theater

system using all eight speaker outputs (Left, Center, Right, Surround

Right, Surround Back Right, Surround Back Left, Surround Left and

Subwoofer), be sure to go to the THX Audio Set-up screen and choose

the setting that most closely corresponds to the speaker spacing,

which will re-optimize the surround sound-field. ASA is used in three

modes; THX Ultra2 Cinema, THX Ultra2 Music and THX Ultra2 Games.

•THX Ultra2 Cinema

THX Ultra2 Cinema mode plays 5.1 movies using all 8 speakers giving

you the best possible movie watching experience. In this mode, ASA

processing blends the side surround speakers and back surround

speakers providing the optimal mix of ambient and directional

surround sounds.

DTS-ES (Matrix and 6.1 Discrete) and Dolby Digital Surround EX

encoded soundtracks will be automatically detected in Ultra2 Cinema

mode if the appropriate flag has been encoded.

Some Dolby Digital Surround EX soundtracks are missing the digital

flag that allows automatic switching. If you know that the movie that

you are watching is encoded in Surround EX, you can manually select

the THX Surround EX playback mode, otherwise THX Ultra2 Cinema

mode will apply ASA processing to provide optimum replay.

•THX Ultra2 Music

For the playback of multi-channel music the THX Ultra2 Music mode

should be selected. In this mode THX ASA processing is applied to the

surround channels of all 5.1 encoded music sources such as DTS,

Dolby Digital and DVD-Audio to provide a wide stable rear

soundstage.

• THX Ultra2 Games

For the playback of stereo and multi-channel game audio the THX

Ultra2 Games mode should be selected. In this mode THX ASA

processing is applied to the surround channels of all 5.1 and 2.0

encoded game sources such as analog, PCM, DTS and Dolby Digital.

This accurately places all game audio surround information,

providing a full 360 degree playback environment. THX Ultra2 Games

mode is unique as it gives you a smooth transition of audio in all

points of the surround field.

THX, the THX logo and Ultra2 Plus are trademarks of THX Ltd. which may

trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

About Neural - THX Surround

Neural Surround™, THX

Technologies has been chosen as the

official surround sound broadcast format for XM Satellite Radio’s “XM

HD Surround” and other leading FM/HD radio stations in the USA

and worldwide. Neural Surround, THX Technologies delivers the rich

envelopment and discrete image detail of surround sound in a format

100 % compatible with stereo.

This product is manufactured under license from Neural Audio

Corporation and THX Ltd. Pioneer Corporation hereby grants the user

a non-exclusive, non-transferable, limited right of use to this product

under USA and foreign patent, patent pending and other technology

or trademarks owned by Neural Audio Corporation and THX Ltd.

Neural Surround is a trademark owned by Neural Audio Corporation,

THX is a trademark of THX Ltd., which may be registered in some

About XM

ABOUT XM RADIO FOR U.S. & CANADIAN

PRODUCTS

XM Radio offers an extraordinary variety of commercial-free music,

plus the best in premier sports, news, talk radio, stand-up comedy,

children’s and entertainment programming. XM is broadcast in

superior digital audio from coast to coast. From rock to reggae, from

classical to hip hop, XM has something for every music fan. For U.S.

customers, information about XM Radio is available online at

www.xmradio.com. For Canadian customers, information about XM

Canada is online at www.xmradio.ca.

XM READY

LEGAL FOR U.S. & CANADIAN

PRODUCTS

XM monthly service subscription sold separately. XM Mini-Tuner and

Home Dock required (each sold separately) to receive XM service. It

is prohibited to copy, decompile, disassemble, reverse engineer,

hack, manipulate, or otherwise make available any technology or

software incorporated in receivers compatible with the XM Satellite

Radio System. Installation costs and other fees and taxes, including

a one-time activation fee may apply. All fees and programming

subject to change. Channels with frequent explicit language are

indicated with an XL. Channel blocking is available for XM radio

receivers by calling 1-800-XMRADIO (US residents) and 1-877-

GETXMSR (Canadian residents). For a full listing of the XM

commercial- free channels and advertising-supported channels, visit

lineup.xmradio.com (US residents) or xmradio.ca (Canadian

residents). Subscriptions subject to Customer Agreement available at

xmradio.com (US residents) and xmradio.ca (Canadian residents).

the property of their respective owners.

XM READY

SUBSCRIPTIONS FOR U.S. PRODUCTS &

CANADIAN PRODUCTS

Once you have installed the XM Mini-Tuner Dock, inserted the XM

Mini-Tuner, connected the XM Dock to your XM Ready

home audio

system, and installed the antenna, you are ready to subscribe and

begin receiving XM programming. There are three places to find your

eight character XM Radio ID: On the XM Mini-Tuner, on the XM Mini-

Tuner package, and on XM Channel 0). Record the Radio ID in the

following eight squares for reference.

Note: The XM Radio ID does not use the letters “I”, “O”, “S” or “F”.

Activate your XM Satellite Radio service in the U.S. online at

http://activate.xmradio.com or call 1-800-XM-RADIO (1-800-967-2346).

Activate your XM Satellite Radio service in Canada online at

https://activate.xmradio.ca or call 1-877-GET-XMSR (1-877-438-9677).

You will need a major credit card. XM will send a signal from the

satellites to activate the full channel lineup. Activation normally takes

10 to 15 minutes, but during peak busy periods you may need to keep

your XM Ready home audio system on for up to an hour. When you

can access the full lineup on your XM Ready home audio system you

are done.

SC_09TX.book Page 136 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Additional information

137

About open source related licenses

Center Ltd and Clark Cooper

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS”, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING

BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND

NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM,

DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING ROM,

OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.

[please replace <year> with the value from the FreeType version you actually use]

If only executable code is distributed, then the accompanying documentation must state that “this software is based

in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group”

If you modify libpng you may insert additional notices immediately following this sentence.

to the same disclaimer and license as libpng-1.2.5 with the following individual added to the list of Contributing

Authors

Cosmin Truta

and are distributed according to the same disclaimer and license as libpng-1.0.6 with the following individuals added

to the list of Contributing Authors

Simon-Pierre Cadieux

Eric S. Raymond

Gilles Vollant

and with the following additions to the disclaimer:

There is no warranty against interference with your enjoyment of the library or against infringement. There is no

warranty that our efforts or the library will fulfill any of your particular purposes or needs. This library is provided with

all faults, and the entire risk of satisfactory quality, performance, accuracy, and effort is with the user.

Pehrson, and are distributed according to the same disclaimer and license as libpng-0.96, with the following

individuals added to the list of Contributing Authors:

Tom Lane

Glenn Randers-Pehrson

Willem van Schaik

Distributed according to the same disclaimer and license as libpng-0.88, with the following individuals added to the

list of Contributing Authors:

SC_09TX.book Page 137 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Additional information

138

John Bowler

Kevin Bracey

Sam Bushell

Magnus Holmgren

Greg Roelofs

Tom Tanner

Inc.

For the purposes of this copyright and license, “Contributing Authors” is defined as the following set of individuals:

Andreas Dilger

Dave Martindale

Guy Eric Schalnat

Paul Schmidt

Tim Wegner

The PNG Reference Library is supplied “AS IS”. The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc. disclaim all warranties,

expressed or implied, including, without limitation, the warranties of merchantability and of fitness for any purpose.

The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc. assume no liability for direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or

consequential damages, which may result from the use of the PNG Reference Library, even if advised of the possibility

of such damage.

Permission is hereby granted to use, copy, modify, and distribute this source code, or portions hereof, for any purpose,

without fee, subject to the following restrictions:

1. The origin of this source code must not be misrepresented.

2. Altered versions must be plainly marked as such and must not be misrepresented as being the original source.

3. This Copyright notice may not be removed or altered from any source or altered source distribution.

The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc. specifically permit, without fee, and encourage the use of this source

code as a component to supporting the PNG file format in commercial products. If you use this source code in a

product, acknowledgment is not required but would be appreciated.

A “png_get_copyright” function is available, for convenient use in “about” boxes and the like: printf

(“%s”,png_get_copyright (NULL)); Also, the PNG logo (in PNG format, of course) is supplied in the files “pngbar.png”

and “pngbar.jpg (88x31) and “pngnow.png” (98x31). Libpng is OSI Certified Open Source Software. OSI Certified Open

Source is a certification mark of the Open Source Initiative.

Glenn Randers-Pehrson

[email protected]

September 12, 2004

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the

following conditions are met:

– Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following

disclaimer.

– Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following

disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

SC_09TX.book Page 138 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Additional information

139

– Neither the name of the Xiph.org Foundation nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote

products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS

OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY

AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR

CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR

CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR

SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY

THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR

OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY

OF SUCH DAMAGE.

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS”, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING

BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND

NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM,

DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM,

OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS-IS” AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR

OTHERWISE, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A

PARTICULAR PURPOSE.

IN NO EVENT SHALL SAM LEFFLER OR SILICON GRAPHICS BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, INDIRECT

OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND, OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF

USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER OR NOT ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF DAMAGE, AND ON ANY THEORY OF

LIABILITY, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.

This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://

www.openssl.org/)”

Linux Source Notice

The Pioneer Plasma Television is powered by utilizing the Linux operating system. The machine readable copy of the

corresponding source code is available for the cost of distribution. To obtain a copy, please visit

http://www.pioneerelectronics.com/ for more information.

GNU General Public License

Version 2, June 1991

59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA

Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.

SC_09TX.book Page 139 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Additional information

140

Preamble

The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU

General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software-to make sure the

software is free for all its users. This General Public License applies to most of the Free Software Foundation’s software

and to any other program whose authors commit to using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered

by the GNU Library General Public License instead.) You can apply it to your programs, too.

When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to

make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service if you wish), that

you receive source code or can get it if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free

programs; and that you know you can do these things.

To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to

surrender the rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the

software, or if you modify it.

For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the

rights that you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. And you must show them

these terms so they know their rights.

We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and (2) offer you this license which gives you legal

permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the software.

Also, for each author’s protection and ours, we want to make certain that everyone understands that there is no

warranty for this free software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we want its recipients to

know that what they have is not the original, so that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original

authors’ reputations.

Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software patents. We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors

of a free program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the program proprietary. To prevent this, we

have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone’s free use or not licensed at all.

The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow.

GNU General Public License

TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION

0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying

it may be distributed under the terms of this General Public License. The “Program”, below, refers to any such

program or work, and a “work based on the Program” means either the Program or any derivative work under

and/or translated into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the term

“modification”.) Each licensee is addressed as “you”.

Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they are outside its

scope. The act of running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program is covered only if its

contents constitute a work based on the Program (independent of having been made by running the Program).

Whether that is true depends on what the Program does.

1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program’s source code as you receive it, in any medium,

provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and

disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty; and

give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License along with the Program.

You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer warranty

protection in exchange for a fee.

2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the Program,

and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also

meet all of these conditions:

a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date

of any change.

b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in whole or in part contains or is derived from the

Program or any part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this

License.

SC_09TX.book Page 140 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Additional information

141

c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when run, you must cause it, when started

running for such interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an announcement including an

appropriate copyright notice and a notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide a warranty)

and that users may redistribute the program under these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy

of this License.

(Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but does not normally print such an announcement, your work based

on the Program is not required to print an announcement.)

These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from

the Program, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves, then this License,

and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you distribute

the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be

on the terms of this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each

and every part regardless of who wrote it.

Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather,

the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Program.

In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program with the Program (or with a work based

on the Program) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope

of this License.

3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, under Section 2) in object code or executable form

under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following:

a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which must be distributed

under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or,

b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give any third party, for a charge no more

than your cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete machine-readable copy of the

corresponding source code, to be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium

customarily used for software interchange; or,

c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to distribute corresponding source code. (This

alternative is allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you received the program in object code

or executable form with such an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.)

The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For an executable

work, complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface

definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a

special exception, the source code distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed (in either

source or binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which

the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the executable.

If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, then

offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place counts as distribution of the source code,

even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code.

4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program except as expressly provided under this License.

Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is void, and will automatically

terminate your rights under this License.

However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses

terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance.

5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else grants you

permission to modify or distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if you

do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based on the

Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying,

distributing or modifying the Program or works based on it.

6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the Program), the recipient automatically receives

a license from the original licensor to copy, distribute or mo

dify the Program subject to these terms and conditions.

You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients’ exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not

responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to this License.

SC_09TX.book Page 141 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Additional information

142

7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (not limited

to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict

the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute

so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a

consequence you may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit royalty-

free redistribution of the Program by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then the only

way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Program.

If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance of the

section is intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances.

It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest

validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software

distribution system, which is implemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous

contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application

of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other

system and a licensee cannot impose that choice.

This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License.

8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted

interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Program under this License may add an explicit

geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among

countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this

License.

9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the General Public License from time to

time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new

problems or concerns.

Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies a version number of this License

which applies to it and “any later version”, you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that

version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version

number of this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation.

10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose distribution conditions are different,

write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write

to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two

goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of

software generally.

NO WARRANTY

11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO

THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE

ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES

OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY

AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU

ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.

12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT

HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED

ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR

CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT

NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU

OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF

SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.

END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS

How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs

If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, the best way to achieve

this is to make it free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms.

SC_09TX.book Page 142 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Additional information

143

To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most

effectively convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the “copyright” line and a pointer to

where the full notice is found.

This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public

License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later

version.

This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied

warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for

more details.

You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this program; if not, write to the Free

Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.

Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.

If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like this when it starts in an interactive mode:

Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) year name of author

Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type ‘show w’. This is free software, and you

are welcome to redistribute it under certain conditions; type ’show c’ for details.

The hypothetical commands ’show w’ and ’show c’ should show the appropriate parts of the General Public License.

Of course, the commands you use may be called something other than ’show w’ and ’show c’; they could even be

mouse-clicks or menu items-whatever suits your program.

You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if any, to sign a “copyright disclaimer”

for the program, if necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names:

Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the program ’Gnomovision’ (which makes passes at

compilers) written by James Hacker.

signature of Ty Coon, 1 April 1989

Ty Coon, President of Vice

This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into proprietary programs. If your program is

a subroutine library, you may consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the library. If this

is what you want to do, use the GNU Lesser General Public License instead of this License.

GNU Lesser General Public License

Version 2.1, February 1999

59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA

Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.

[This is the first released version of the Lesser GPL. It also counts as the successor of the GNU Library Public License,

version 2, hence the version number 2.1.]

Preamble

The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU

General Public Licenses are intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software-to make sure the

software is free for all its users. This license, the Lesser General Public License, applies to some specially designated

software packages-typically libraries-of the Free Software Foundation and other authors who decide to use it. You can

use it too, but we suggest you first think carefully about whether this license or the ordinary General Public License is

the better strategy to use in any particular case, based on the explanations below.

When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom of use, not price. Our General Public Licenses are

designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service if

you wish); that you receive source code or can get it if you want it; that you can change the software and use pieces of

it in new free programs; and that you are informed that you can do these things.

SC_09TX.book Page 143 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Additional information

144

To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid distributors to deny you these rights or to ask you to

surrender these rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the

library or if you modify it.

For example, if you distribute copies of the library, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights

that we gave you. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. If you link other code with the

library, you must provide complete object files to the recipients, so that they can relink them with the library after

making changes to the library and recompiling it. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights.

We protect your rights with a two-step method: (1) we copyright the library, and (2) we offer you this license, which

gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the library.

To protect each distributor, we want to make it very clear that there is no warranty for the free library. Also, if the library

is modified by someone else and passed on, the recipients should know that what they have is not the original version,

so that the original author’s reputation will not be affected by problems that might be introduced by others.

Finally, software patents pose a constant threat to the existence of any free program. We wish to make sure that a

company cannot effectively restrict the users of a free program by obtaining a restrictive license from a patent holder.

Therefore, we insist that any patent license obtained for a version of the library must be consistent with the full freedom

of use specified in this license.

Most GNU software, including some libraries, is covered by the ordinary GNU General Public License. This license, the

GNU Lesser General Public License, applies to certain designated libraries, and is quite different from the ordinary

General Public License. We use this license for certain libraries in order to permit linking those libraries into non-free

programs.

When a program is linked with a library, whether statically or using a shared library, the combination of the two is

legally speaking a combined work, a derivative of the original library. The ordinary General Public License therefore

permits such linking only if the entire combination fits its criteria of freedom. The Lesser General Public License

permits more lax criteria for linking other code with the library.

We call this license the “Lesser” General Public License because it does Less to protect the user’s freedom than the

ordinary General Public License. It also provides other free software developers Less of an advantage over competing

non-free programs. These disadvantages are the reason we use the ordinary General Public License for many libraries.

However, the Lesser license provides advantages in certain special circumstances.

For example, on rare occasions, there may be a special need to encourage the widest possible use of a certain library,

so that it becomes a de-facto standard. To achieve this, non-free programs must be allowed to use the library.

A more frequent case is that a free library does the same job as widely used non-free libraries. In this case, there is

little to gain by limiting the free library to free software only, so we use the Lesser General Public License.

In other cases, permission to use a particular library in non-free programs enables a greater number of people to use

a large body of free software. For example, permission to use the GNU C Library in non-free programs enables many

more people to use the whole GNU operating system, as well as its variant, the GNU/Linux operating system.

Although the Lesser General Public License is Less protective of the users’ freedom, it does ensure that the user of a

program that is linked with the Library has the freedom and the wherewithal to run that program using a modified

version of the Library.

The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow. Pay close attention to the difference

between a “work based on the library” and a “work that uses the library”. The former contains code derived from the

library, whereas the latter must be combined with the library in order to run.

GNU Lesser General Public License

TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION

0. This License Agreement applies to any software library or other program which contains a notice placed by the

Public License (also called “this License”). Each licensee is addressed as “you”.

A “library” means a collection of software functions and/or data prepared so as to be conveniently linked with

application programs (which use some of those functions and data) to form executables.

SC_09TX.book Page 144 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Additional information

145

The “Library”, below, refers to any such software library or work which has been distributed under these terms. A

“work based on the Library” means either the Library or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a

work containing the Library or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated

straightforwardly into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the term

“modification”.)

”Source code” for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For a library,

complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface

definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the library.

Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they are outside its

scope. The act of running a program using the Library is not restricted, and output from such a program is covered

only if its contents constitute a work based on the Library (independent of the use of the Library in a tool for writing

it). Whether that is true depends on what the Library does and what the program that uses the Library does.

1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Library’s complete source code as you receive it, in any

medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice

and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty;

and distribute a copy of this License along with the Library.

You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer warranty

protection in exchange for a fee.

2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the Library,

and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also

meet all of these conditions:

a) The modified work must itself be a software library.

b) You must cause the files modified to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date

of any change.

c) You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this

License.

d) If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function or a table of data to be supplied by an application program

that uses the facility, other than as an argument passed when the facility is invoked, then you must make a

good faith effort to ensure that, in the event an application does not supply such function or table, the facility

still operates, and performs whatever part of its purpose remains meaningful.

(For example, a function in a library to compute square roots has a purpose that is entirely well-defined

independent of the application. Therefore, Subsection 2d requires that any application-supplied function or table

used by this function must be optional: if the application does not supply it, the square root function must still

compute square roots.) These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that

work are not derived from the Library, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in

themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate

works. But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Library, the

distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the

entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it.

Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather,

the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Library.

In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Library with the Library (or with a work based on

the Library) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this

License.

3. You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU General Public License instead of this License to a given copy

of the Library. To do this, you must alter all the notices that refer to this License, so that they refer to the ordinary

GNU General Public License, version 2, instead of to this License. (If a newer version than version 2 of the ordinary

GNU General Public License has appeared, then you can specify that version instead if you wish.) Do not make any

other change in these notices.

Once this change is made in a given copy, it is irreversible for that copy, so the ordinary GNU General Public

License applies to all subsequent copies and derivative works made from that copy. This option is useful when you

wish to copy part of the code of the Library into a program that is not a library.

SC_09TX.book Page 145 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Additional information

146

4. You may copy and distribute the Library (or a portion or derivative of it, under Section 2) in object code or executable

form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you accompany it with the complete corresponding

machine-readable source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium

customarily used for software interchange.

If distribution of object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent

access to copy the source code from the same place satisfies the requirement to distribute the source code, even

though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code.

5. A program that contains no derivative of any portion of the Library, but is designed to work with the Library by being

compiled or linked with it, is called a “work that uses the Library”. Such a work, in isolation, is not a derivative work

of the Library, and therefore falls outside the scope of this License. However, linking a “work that uses the Library”

with the Library creates an executable that is a derivative of the Library (because it contains portions of the Library),

rather than a “work that uses the library”. The executable is therefore covered by this License. Section 6 states

terms for distribution of such executables.

When a “work that uses the Library” uses material from a header file that is part of the Library, the object code for

the work may be a derivative work of the Library even though the source code is not. Whether this is true is

especially significant if the work can be linked without the Library, or if the work is itself a library. The threshold for

this to be true is not precisely defined by law.

If such an object file uses only numerical parameters, data structure layouts and accessors, and small macros and

small inline functions (ten lines or less in length), then the use of the object file is unrestricted, regardless of

whether it is legally a derivative work. (Executables containing this object code plus portions of the Library will still

fall under Section 6.)

Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Library, you may distribute the object code for the work under the terms

of Section 6. Any executables containing that work also fall under Section 6, whether or not they are linked directly

with the Library itself.

6. As an exception to the Sections above, you may also combine or link a “work that uses the Library” with the Library

to produce a work containing portions of the Library, and distribute that work under terms of your choice, provided

that the terms permit modification of the work for the customer’s own use and reverse engineering for debugging

such modifications.

You must give prominent notice with each copy of the work that the Library is used in it and that the Library and

its use are covered by this License. You must supply a copy of this License. If the work during execution displays

directing the user to the copy of this License.

Also, you must do one of these things:

a) Accompany the work with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code for the Library including

whatever changes were used in the work (which must be distributed under Sections 1 and 2 above); and, if the

work is an executable linked with the Library, with the complete machine-readable “work that uses the Library”,

as object code and/or source code, so that the user can modify the Library and then relink to produce a

modified executable containing the modified Library. (It is understood that the user who changes the contents

of definitions files in the Library will not necessarily be able to recompile the application to use the modified

definitions.)

b) Use a suitable shared library mechanism for linking with the Library. A suitable mechanism is one that (1) uses

at run time a copy of the library already present on the user’s computer system, rather than copying library

functions into the executable, and (2) will operate properly with a modified version of the library, if the user

installs one, as long as the modified version is interface-compatible with the version that the work was made

with.

c) Accompany the work with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give the same user the materials

specified in Subsection 6a, above, for a charge no more than the cost of performing this distribution.

d) If distribution of the work is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, offer equivalent access

to copy the above specified materials from the same place.

e) Verify that the user has already received a copy of these materials or that you have already sent this user a copy.

SC_09TX.book Page 146 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Additional information

147

For an executable, the required form of the “work that uses the Library” must include any data and utility programs

needed for reproducing the executable from it. However, as a special exception, the materials to be distributed

need not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components

(compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself

accompanies the executable.

It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license restrictions of other proprietary libraries that do not

normally accompany the operating system. Such a contradiction means you cannot use both them and the Library

together in an executable that you distribute.

7. You may place library facilities that are a work based on the Library side-by-side in a single library together with

other library facilities not covered by this License, and distribute such a combined library, provided that the

separate distribution of the work based on the Library and of the other library facilities is otherwise permitted, and

provided that you do these two things:

a) Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work based on the Library, uncombined with any

other library facilities. This must be distributed under the terms of the Sections above.

b) Give prominent notice with the combined library of the fact that part of it is a work based on the Library, and

explaining where to find the accompanying uncombined form of the same work.

8. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library except as expressly provided under this

License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library is void, and will

automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from

you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance.

9. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else grants you

permission to modify or distribute the Library or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if you do

not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Library (or any work based on the Library), you

indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or

modifying the Library or works based on it.

10. Each time you redistribute the Library (or any work based on the Library), the recipient automatically receives a

license from the original licensor to copy, distribute, link with or modify the Library subject to these terms and

conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients’ exercise of the rights granted herein.

You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License.

11. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (not limited

to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict

the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute

so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a

consequence you may not distribute the Library at all.

For example, if a patent license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Library by all those who receive

copies directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to

refrain entirely from distribution of the Library.

If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance of the

section is intended to apply, and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances.

It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest

validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software

distribution system which is implemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous

contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application

of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other

system and a licensee cannot impose that choice.

This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed

to be a consequence of the rest of this License.

12. If the distribution and/or use of the Library is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted

interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Library under this License may add an explicit

geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among

countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this

License.

13. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the Lesser General Public License from

time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address

new problems or concerns.

SC_09TX.book Page 147 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Additional information

148

Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Library specifies a version number of this License

which applies to it and “any later version”, you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that

version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Library does not specify a license

version number, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation.

14. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other free programs whose distribution conditions are

incompatible with these, write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free

Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision

will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting

the sharing and reuse of software generally.

NO WARRANTY

15. BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE LIBRARY, TO THE

EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT

HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE LIBRARY “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,

EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF

MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND

PERFORMANCE OF THE LIBRARY IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE LIBRARY PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE

COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.

16. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT

HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE LIBRARY AS PERMITTED

ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR

CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE LIBRARY (INCLUDING BUT

NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU

OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER SOFTWARE), EVEN IF SUCH

HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.

END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS

How to Apply These Terms to Your New Libraries

If you develop a new library, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, we recommend making it

free software that everyone can redistribute and change. You can do so by permitting redistribution under these terms

(or, alternatively, under the terms of the ordinary General Public License).

To apply these terms, attach the following notices to the library. It is safest to attach them to the start of each source

file to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the “copyright” line and a

pointer to where the full notice is found.

This library is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public

License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later

version.

This library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied

warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU Lesser General Public

License for more details.

You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public License along with this library; if not, write to the

Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA

Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.

You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if any, to sign a “copyright disclaimer”

for the library, if necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names:

Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the library ’Frob’ (a library for tweaking knobs) written by

James Random Hacker.

signature of Ty Coon, 1 April 1990

Ty Coon, President of Vice

That’s all there is to it!

SC_09TX.book Page 148 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Additional information

149

Listening modes with different input signal formats

The following charts outline the listening modes available with different input signal formats, depending on the surround back

channel processing and decoding method you have selected.

Stereo (2 channel) signal formats

SBch Processing Input signal format Standard THX Auto Surround

SBch

Processing

ON/AUTO

(Automatically

selects 6.1/7.1

channel decoding)

Dolby Digital Plus

Dolby TrueHD

WMA9 Pro

(44.1 kHz/48 kHz)

2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE

2 Pro Logic llx MUSIC

2 Pro Logic llx GAME

2 PRO LOGIC

2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE+THX

2 PRO LOGIC+THX

THX Ultra2 GAMES

2 Pro Logic llx MUSIC+THX

MUSIC

2 Pro Logic llx GAME+THX

GAMES

Stereo playback

DTS-HD Master Audio

DTS-HD

DTS-EXPRESS

WMA9 Pro

(88.2 kHz/96 kHz)

Stereo playback THX CINEMA

THX MUSIC

THX GAMES

As above

Dolby Digital Surround 2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE

2 Pro Logic llx MUSIC

2 Pro Logic llx GAME

2 PRO LOGIC

Neo:6 CINEMA

Neo:6 MUSIC

2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE+THX

2 Pro Logic llx MUSIC+THX

MUSIC

2 Pro Logic llx GAME+THX

GAMES

Neo:6 CINEMA+THX

THX Ultra2 GAMES

Neo:6 MUSIC+THX MUSIC

2 PRO LOGIC+THX CINEMA

2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE

DTS Surround As above As above Neo:6 CINEMA

SACD As above Neo:6 MUSIC+THX MUSIC

2 Pro Logic llx MUSIC+THX

MUSIC

Stereo playback

XM Radio 2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE

2 Pro Logic llx MUSIC

2 Pro Logic llx GAME

2 PRO LOGIC

Neo:6 CINEMA

Neo:6 MUSIC

XM HD Surround

2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE+THX

2 PRO LOGIC+THX

Neo:6 CINEMA+THX

THX GAMES MODE

XM HD Surround

Other stereo sources 2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE

2 Pro Logic llx MUSIC

2 Pro Logic llx GAME

2 PRO LOGIC

Neo:6 CINEMA

Neo:6 MUSIC

Neural THX

2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE+THX

2 Pro Logic llx MUSIC+THX

MUSIC

2 Pro Logic llx GAME+THX

GAMES

Neo:6 CINEMA+THX

THX Ultra2 GAMES

Neo:6 MUSIC+THX MUSIC

2 PRO LOGIC+THX CINEMA

Stereo playback

SC_09TX.book Page 149 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Additional information

150

SBch

Processing

OFF

Dolby Digital Plus

Dolby TrueHD

WMA9 Pro

(44.1 kHz/48 kHz)

2 Pro Logic ll MOVIE

2 Pro Logic ll MUSIC

2 Pro Logic ll GAME

2 PRO LOGIC

2 PRO LOGIC+THX

2 Pro Logic ll MOVIE+THX

CINEMA

2 Pro Logic ll MUSIC+THX

MUSIC

2 Pro Logic ll GAME+THX

GAMES

Neo:6 MUSIC+THX MUSIC

Neo:6 CINEMA+THX

Stereo playback

DTS-HD Master Audio

DTS-HD

DTS-EXPRESS

WMA9 Pro

(88.2 kHz/96 kHz)

Stereo playback THX CINEMA

THX MUSIC

THX GAMES

As above

Dolby Digital Surround 2 Pro Logic ll MOVIE

2 Pro Logic ll MUSIC

2 Pro Logic ll GAME

2 PRO LOGIC

Neo:6 CINEMA

Neo:6 MUSIC

2 PRO LOGIC+THX

2 Pro Logic ll MOVIE+THX

CINEMA

2 Pro Logic ll MUSIC+THX

MUSIC

2 Pro Logic ll GAME+THX

GAMES

Neo:6 MUSIC+THX MUSIC

Neo:6 CINEMA+THX

2 Pro Logic ll MOVIE

DTS Surround As above As above Neo:6 CINEMA

SACD As above Neo:6 MUSIC+THX MUSIC

2 PRO LOGIC ll MUSIC+THX

MUSIC

Stereo playback

XM Radio 2 Pro Logic ll MOVIE

2 Pro Logic ll MUSIC

2 Pro Logic ll GAME

2 PRO LOGIC

Neo:6 CINEMA

Neo:6 MUSIC

XM HD Surround

2 Pro Logic ll MOVIE+THX

2 PRO LOGIC+THX

Neo:6 CINEMA+THX

XM HD Surround

Other stereo sources 2 Pro Logic ll MOVIE

2 Pro Logic ll MUSIC

2 Pro Logic ll GAME

2 PRO LOGIC

Neo:6 CINEMA

Neo:6 MUSIC

Neural THX

2 Pro Logic ll MOVIE+THX

CINEMA

Neo:6 MUSIC+THX MUSIC

2 Pro Logic ll GAME+THX

GAMES

2 Pro Logic ll MUSIC+THX

MUSIC

Neo:6 CINEMA+THX

2 PRO LOGIC+THX

Stereo playback

a.No sound is output from the surround back speakers when 2 Pro Logic is selected.

b.Unavailable with only one surround back speaker connected.

c.This is only selectable when the input signal is an analog or PCM signal.

d.Automatically selected if no surround back speakers are connected.

SBch Processing Input signal format Standard THX Auto Surround

SC_09TX.book Page 150 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Additional information

151

Multichannel signal formats

SBch Processing Input signal format Standard THX Auto Surround

SBch

Processing

(7.1 channel

decoding used for

all sources)

Dolby Digital Plus

Dolby TrueHD

DTS-HD

DTS-HD Master Audio

WMA9 Pro

(44.1 kHz/48 kHz)

PCM

(6.1/7.1 channel)

Straight decoding THX CINEMA

THX MUSIC

THX GAMES

Straight decoding

Dolby Digital Plus

Dolby TrueHD

(except for 176.4 kHz/

192 kHz)

(5.1 channel)

Dolby Digital EX

2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE

2 Pro Logic llx MUSIC

THX SURROUND EX

2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE+THX

THX Ultra2 CINEMA

THX Ultra2 MUSIC

THX Ultra2 GAMES

2 Pro Logic llx MUSIC+THX

2 EX+THX GAMES

Dolby Digital EX

2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE

Dolby TrueHD

(176.4 kHz/192 kHz)

(5.1 channel)

Straight decoding

THX CINEMA

THX Ultra2 CINEMA

THX Ultra2 MUSIC

THX Ultra2 GAMES

THX MUSIC

THX GAMES

Straight decoding

DTS-EXPRESS

DTS-HD

DTS-HD Master Audio

WMA9 Pro

(88.2 kHz/96 kHz)

(5.1 channel)

Straight decoding

THX CINEMA

THX Ultra2 CINEMA

THX Ultra2 MUSIC

THX Ultra2 GAMES

THX MUSIC

THX GAMES

Straight decoding

Dolby Digital EX

(6.1 channel flagged)

Dolby Digital EX

2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE

2 Pro Logic llx MUSIC

THX SURROUND EX

2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE+THX

THX Ultra2 CINEMA

THX Ultra2 MUSIC

THX Ultra2 GAMES

2 Pro Logic llx MUSIC+THX

2 EX+THX GAMES

Dolby Digital EX

2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE

DTS-ES

(6.1 channel sources/

6.1 channel flagged)

DTS-ES (Matrix/Discrete)

DTS+2 Pro Logic llx

MOVIE

DTS+2 Pro Logic llx

MUSIC

DTS-ES Matrix+THX CINEMA

DTS-ES Discrete+THX CINEMA

DTS+2 Pro Logic IIx

MOVIE+THX

THX Ultra2 CINEMA

THX Ultra2 MUSIC

THX Ultra2 GAMES

DTS-ES Matrix+THX MUSIC

DTS-ES Matrix+THX GAMES

DTS-ES Discrete+THX MUSIC

DTS-ES Discrete+THX GAMES

DTS-ES (Matrix/Discrete)

SC_09TX.book Page 151 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Additional information

152

SBch

Processing

(7.1 channel

decoding used for

all sources)

DTS and DTS 96/24

(5.1 channel encoding)

DTS+Neo:6

DTS+2 Pro Logic llx

MOVIE

DTS+2 Pro Logic llx

MUSIC

DTS+Neo:6+THX CINEMA

DTS+2 Pro Logic IIx

MOVIE+THX

THX Ultra2 CINEMA

THX Ultra2 MUSIC

THX Ultra2 GAMES

DTS+Neo:6+THX MUSIC

DTS+Neo:6+THX GAMES

2 Pro Logic llx MUSIC+THX

DTS+Neo:6

Dolby Digital

WMA9 Pro

(44.1 kHz/48 kHz)

PCM

(5.1 channel encoding)

Dolby Digital EX

2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE

2 Pro Logic llx MUSIC

THX SURROUND EX

2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE+THX

THX Ultra2 CINEMA

THX Ultra2 MUSIC

THX Ultra2 GAMES

2 Pro Logic llx MUSIC+THX

2 EX+THX GAMES

Dolby Digital EX

2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE

SACD

(5.1 channel encoding)

Dolby Digital EX

2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE

2 Pro Logic llx MUSIC

THX Ultra2 MUSIC

2 Pro Logic llx MUSIC+THX

MUSIC

Dolby Digital EX

2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE

SBch

Processing

AUTO

(Automatically

selects 6.1/7.1

channel decoding)

Dolby Digital Plus

Dolby TrueHD

DTS-HD

DTS-HD Master Audio

WMA9 Pro

PCM

(6.1/7.1 channel)

Straight decoding THX CINEMA Straight decoding

Dolby TrueHD

(176.4 kHz/192 kHz)

(5.1 channel)

Straight decoding

THX Ultra2 CINEMA

THX CINEMA

(Maximum 5.1 channel playback

with only one surround back

speaker)

Straight decoding

Dolby Digital EX

(6.1 channel flagged)

Dolby Digital EX

2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE

THX SURROUND EX Dolby Digital EX

2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE

DTS-ES (6.1 channel

sources/6.1 channel

flagged)

DTS-ES (Matrix/Discrete) DTS-ES+THX (Matrix/Discrete) DTS-ES (Matrix/Discrete)

Other 5.1 channel

sources

(5.1 channel encoding)

Straight decoding

THX Ultra2 CINEMA

THX CINEMA

Straight decoding

SACD

(5.1 channel encoding)

Straight decoding

THX Ultra2 MUSIC

THX MUSIC

Straight decoding

SBch

Processing

OFF

SACD

(5.1 channel)

Straight decoding THX MUSIC Straight decoding

Other 5.1/6.1/7.1 channel

sources

As above THX CINEMA

THX MUSIC

THX GAMES

As above

a.Unavailable with only one surround back speaker connected.

b.This can be selected when only one surround speaker is connected.

c.Automatically selected if no surround back speakers are connected.

SBch Processing Input signal format Standard THX Auto Surround

SC_09TX.book Page 152 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Additional information

153

Stream direct with different input signal formats

The following charts show what you will hear with different input signal formats, depending on the Stream Direct mode (see

Using Stream Direct on page 38) you have selected.

Stereo (2 channel) signal formats

Multichannel signal formats

Surround Back speaker(s) Input signal format DIRECT PURE DIRECT

Connected

Dolby Digital Surround

2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE 2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE

DTS Surround Neo:6 CINEMA Neo:6 CINEMA

Other stereo sources Stereo playback Stereo playback

Analog sources As above ANALOG DIRECT (stereo)

PCM sources As above PCM DIRECT (stereo)

DVD-A sources As above PCM DIRECT (stereo)

SACD sources As above SACD DIRECT (stereo)

Not connected

Dolby Digital Surround

2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE 2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE

DTS Surround Neo:6 CINEMA Neo:6 CINEMA

Other stereo sources Stereo playback Stereo playback

Analog sources As above ANALOG DIRECT (stereo)

PCM sources As above PCM DIRECT (stereo)

DVD-A sources As above PCM DIRECT (stereo)

SACD sources As above SACD DIRECT (stereo)

Surround Back speaker(s) Input signal format DIRECT PURE DIRECT

Connected

Dolby Digital EX (6.1 channel flagged) Dolby Digital EX

2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE

Dolby Digital EX

2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE

DTS-ES (6.1 channel sources/6.1 channel

flagged)

DTS-ES (Matrix/Discrete) DTS-ES (Matrix/Discrete)

DVD-A sources/Muti-ch PCM Straight decoding PCM DIRECT

SACD sources

(5.1 channel encoding)

As above SACD DIRECT

Other 5.1/6.1/7.1 channel sources As above Straight decoding

Not connected

DVD-A sources/Muti-ch PCM Straight decoding PCM DIRECT

SACD sources

(5.1 channel encoding)

As above SACD DIRECT

Other 5.1/6.1/7.1 channel sources As above Straight decoding

a.Unavailable with only one surround back speaker connected.

SC_09TX.book Page 153 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Additional information

154

Cautions on Handing

Liquid crystal screen

• There may be small black dots or brightly shining

spots (bright points) on the liquid crystal screen. This

is a particularity of liquid crystal screens, and is not a

malfunction.

• When using in cold places, the screen may be dark

for a while after the power is turned on. The

brightness will return to normal after a while.

• If the liquid crystal display is exposed to direct

sunlight, the sunlight will reflect off of it, making the

display hard to see. Block the direct sunlight.

Liquid crystal backlight

• The backlight will reach the end of its service life after

approximately 10 000 hours. (The service life may be

shortened if used continuously at high temperatures

on a rack or when used continuously in low

temperatures. When using on a rack, be sure to allow

for heat dissipation.)

Cleaning the shiny surfaces of the panel and

the liquid crystal display window

Use the included wiping cloth (dry) to gently wipe any dirt

off the shiny surfaces of this receiver’s panel and the

liquid crystal display window.

Notes on handling the included wiping cloth

• Using the wiping cloth with dust on it may scratch

this receiver’s surface.

•If the wiping cloth is dirty, clean it as described

below. Dilute neutral detergent in about 100 parts

water, wash the cloth by rubbing it against itself in

this solution, rinse it carefully to remove any traces of

detergent, then let it dry.

• If the wiping cloth has been lost or is extremely dirty,

order a new one either from your nearest sales outlet

or directly from the Pioneer Parts Order Center. You

can also use a commercially available lens cleaning

cloth instead.



SC-09TX

MASTER

VOLUME

STANDBY/ON

INPUT

SELECTOR

R1R2R3R4R5

ACTIVE MONITOR

L5L4L3L2L1

Liquid crystal

display window

Shiny surfaces

of panel

SC_09TX.book Page 154 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Additional information

155

Specifications

Amplifier section

Continuous average power output of 200 watts* per

channel, min., at 8 ohms, from 20 Hz to 20 000 Hz with

no more than 0.05 %** total harmonic distortion

(front).

Multi channel simultaneous power output

(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.05 %, 8 Ω)

any 10 ch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 W (Total 1400 W)

Stereo power output

20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.05 %, 8 Ω . . . . . . . . . . 200 W + 200 W

20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.05 %, 6 Ω . . . . . . . . . . 270 W + 270 W

1 kHz, 0.05 %, 4 Ω . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400 W + 400 W

* Measured pursuant to the Federal Trade Commission’s

Trade Regulation rule on Power Output Claims for Amplifiers

** Measured by Audio Spectrum Analyzer

Audio Section

Input (Sensitivity/Impedance)

PHONO MM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.0 mV/47 kΩ

LINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475 mV/47 kΩ

Frequency Response (LINE). . . . . . .5 Hz to 100 000 Hz dB

Output (Level/Impedance)

REC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475 mV/2.2 kΩ

Signal-to-Noise Ratio (IHF, short circuited, A network)

LINE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105 dB

Signal-to-Noise Ratio [EIA, at 1 W (1 kHz)]

LINE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93 dB

Composite Video / S-Video Section

Input (Sensitivity/Impedance) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Vp-p/75 Ω

Output (Level/Impedance) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Vp-p/75 Ω

Signal-to-Noise Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65 dB

Frequency Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 Hz to 10 MHz

Component Video Section

Input (Sensitivity/Impedance) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Vp-p/75 Ω

Output (Level/Impedance) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Vp-p/75 Ω

Signal-to-Noise Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65 dB

Frequency Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 Hz to 100 MHz

Network Section

LAN terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 BASE-T/100-BASE-TX

USB Section

USB terminal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . USB2.0 compatible

FM Tuner Section

Frequency Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87.5 MHz to 108 MHz

Antenna Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Ω unbalanced

AM Tuner Section

Frequency Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530 kHz to 1700 kHz

Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Loop antenna

Miscellaneous

Power Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AC 120 V, 60 Hz

Power Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550 W, 850 VA

In standby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0.55 W (HDMI Control OFF)

0.75 W (HDMI Control ON)

Dimensions . . . . . .440 (W) mm x 247 (H) mm x 479 (D) mm

(17

/8 (W) in. x 9

/4 (H) in. x 18

/8 (D) in.)

Weight (without package). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35.5 kg (78.3 lb)

Furnished Parts

Setup microphone (for Auto MCACC setup). . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

AA/IEC R6P dry cell batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

Remote control unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

AM loop antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

FM wire antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

iPod control cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Power cord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Wiping cloth. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Warranty card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

These operating instructions

Note

• Specifications and the design are subject to possible

modifications without notice, due to improvements.

SC_09TX.book Page 155 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Additional information

156

Cleaning the unit

• Use a polishing cloth or dry cloth to wipe off dust and

dirt.

• When the surface is dirty, wipe with a soft cloth

dipped in some neutral cleanser diluted five or six

times with water, and wrung out well, and then wipe

again with a dry cloth. Do not use furniture wax or

cleansers.

• Never use thinners, benzine, insecticide sprays or

other chemicals on or near this unit, since these will

corrode the surface.

Our philosophy

Pioneer is dedicated to making your home theater

listening experience as close as possible to the vision of

the moviemakers and mastering engineer when they

created the original soundtrack. We do this by focusing

on three important steps:

5 Achieving the highest possible sound quality

6 Allowing for customized acoustic calibration

according to any listening area

7 Fine-tuning the receiver with the help of world-

class studio engineers

With the cooperation of AIR Studios, this receiver has been designated

AIR Studios Monitor Reference:

Features

• Direct Energy HD Amplifier

Through a collaboration, Pioneer and ICEpower have

jointly development a unique class D amplifier called a

“Direct Energy High Fidelity Class D (HD) amplifier”. This

new generation reference amplifier offers outstanding

performance (high output of 1400 W simultaneous, high

response and low distortion of 0.005 %) with high sound

quality and reproduces the latest in multi-channel digital

contents.

• 10-channel amplifier multi-assign function

One of five patterns of the 10-channel amplifier (speaker

terminals) can be selected according to the desired

scene.

• Easy setup using Advanced MCACC

The Auto MCACC Setup provides a quick but accurate

surround sound setup, which includes the advanced

features of Professional Acoustic Calibration EQ. This

innovative technology measures the reverb

characteristics of your listening area, allowing you to

customize your system calibration with the help of a

graphical output that can be displayed on-screen, or

using a computer. With the additional benefits of

numerous MCACC preset memories, standing wave

control and microphone measurements from a series of

reference points, your home theater experience can be

truly customized for optimal surround sound.

• Phase Control

The Phase Control feature corrects the phase distortion

as well as group delay for LFE (Low-Frequency Effects)

audio signals during multichannel playback.

• Full Band Phase Control

The Full Band Phase Control feature analyzes the

frequency-phase characteristics of the speakers

connected and corrects the phase distortion to the

flattened frequency-phase characteristics. This

correction minimizes the group delay of the middle- and

low-frequency ranges against the high-frequency range

and improves the frequency-phase characteristics

across all ranges. Furthermore, the enhanced frequency-

phase characteristics between channels ensure better

surround sound integration.

• HOME MEDIA GALLERY

This receiver can play back contents stored on your

computer when your computer is connected to the LAN

terminal of this receiver. It is also possible to play

contents stored on USB devices.

• Dolby Digital and DTS decoding, including Dolby

Digital EX, Dolby Pro Logic IIx, DTS 96/24, DTS-ES, Dolby

Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD, DTS-EXPRESS and DTS-HD

Master Audio

Dolby Digital and DTS decoding brings theater sound

right into your home with up to six channels of surround

sound, including a special LFE (Low Frequency Effects)

channel for deep, realistic sound effects.

The built-in Dolby Pro Logic IIx and DTS Neo:6 decoders

not only provide full surround sound decoding for Dolby

Surround sources, but will also generate convincing

surround sound for any stereo source.

Also, with the addition of a surround back speaker, you

can take advantage of the built-in Dolby Digital EX and

DTS-ES decoders for six-channel surround sound.

Furthermore, Dolby Digital Plus and Dolby TrueHD,

which are designed for the next-generation high-

definition media such as Blu-ray Disc and HD DVD,

support up to 7.1 channels and 8 channels respectively.

DTS-EXPRESS is a low-bitrate encoding technology

supporting up to 5.1 channels, with fixed data transfer

rates ranging from 24 kbps to 256 kbps (this encoding is

available only when signals are delivered to this receiver

as primary audio).

DTS-HD Master Audio delivers audio signals to listeners

without any loss of data with its high transfer rates.

SC_09TX.book Page 156 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Additional information

157

THX certified design

This receiver amplifier is THX Ultra2™ certified, allowing

you to take advantage of new THX technologies such as

ASA (Advanced Speaker Array), which can process any

5.1 channel source for 6.1 channel (THX Surround EX) or

7.1 channel (THX Ultra2 CINEMA, THX Ultra2 MUSIC and

THX Ultra2 GAMES) playback. These features are also

available when using the i.LINK interface.

• HDMI and digital video conversion

This receiver is compatible with the HDMI digital video

format (HDMI Version 1.3a), providing you with high-

definition digital video/audio via a single cable.

High-quality sound formats such as DTS-HD and Dolby

TrueHD are supported while this receiver is also

compatible with the DeepColor and x.v.Color feature

(x.v.Color is trademarks of Sony Corporation). You can

operate this receiver in synchronization with your Pioneer

component that supports the HDMI Control function by

connecting your component to this receiver via HDMI.

Also, the built-in digital video converter of this receiver

makes both de-interlacing and up-scaling possible, and

analog video signals being input are converted and

output as digital video signals at the HDMI terminal.

•i.LINK

digital interface

The i.LINK interface makes it possible to connect this

receiver to i.LINK-equipped components, allowing you to

enjoy high sampling rate (up to 192 kHz) PCM

multichannel digital audio from DVD-Audio and SACD

discs, as well as digital audio from DVD-Video, CD and

Video CD discs, all with a single cable.

• iPod, XM and SIRIUS Ready

With the new iPod, XM and SIRIUS Radio terminals,

you’ll be up and running in no time. This receiver’s

enhanced compatibility makes XM HD Surround

playback as well as on-screen control of your iPod, XM

and SIRIUS Radio an added possibility.

SC_09TX.book Page 157 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

S001_En

Selecting fine audio equipment such as the unit

you’ve just purchased is only the start of your

musical enjoyment. Now it’s time to consider how

you can maximize the fun and excitement your

equipment offers. This manufacturer and the

Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer

Electronics Group want you to get the most out of

your equipment by playing it at a safe level. One that

lets the sound come through loud and clear without

annoying blaring or distortion-and, most importantly,

without affecting your sensitive hearing.

Sound can be deceiving. Over time your hearing

“comfort level” adapts to higher volumes of sound.

So what sounds “normal” can actually be loud and

harmful to your hearing. Guard against this by

setting your equipment at a safe level BEFORE your

hearing adapts.

To establish a safe level:

• Start your volume control at a low setting.

• Slowly increase the sound until you can hear it

comfortably and clearly, and without distortion.

Once you have established a comfortable sound

level:

• Set the dial and leave it there.

Taking a minute to do this now will help to prevent

hearing damage or loss in the future. After all, we

want you listening for a lifetime.

We Want You Listening For A Lifetime

Used wisely, your new sound equipment will

provide a lifetime of fun and enjoyment. Since

hearing damage from loud noise is often

undetectable until it is too late, this manufacturer

and the Electronic Industries Association’s

Consumer Electronics Group recommend you avoid

prolonged exposure to excessive noise. This list of

sound levels is included for your protection.

Decibel

Level Example

30 Quiet library, soft whispers

Living room, refrigerator, bedroom away from traffic

50 Light traffic, normal conversation, quiet office

60 Air conditioner at 20 feet, sewing machine

70 Vacuum cleaner, hair dryer, noisy restaurant

Average city traffic, garbage disposals, alarm clock

at two feet.

THE FOLLOWING NOISES CAN BE DANGEROUS

UNDER CONSTANT EXPOSURE

Subway, motorcycle, truck traffic, lawn mower

100 Garbage truck, chain saw, pneumatic drill

120 Rock band concert in front of speakers,

thunderclap

140 Gunshot blast, jet plane

180 Rocket launching pad

Information courtesy of the Deafness Research Foundation.

SC_09TX.book Page 158 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Should this product require service in the U.S.A. and you

wish to locate the nearest Pioneer Authorized Independent

Service Company, or if you wish to purchase replacement

parts, operating instructions, service manuals, or

accessories, please call the number shown below.

1 – 8 0 0 – 4 2 1 – 1 4 0 4

Please do not ship your product to Pioneer without first

calling the Customer Support at the above listed number for

assistance.

Pioneer Electronics Service, Inc.

P.O. BOX 1760, Long Beach,

CA 90801-1760, U.S.A.

For warranty information please see the Limited Warranty

sheet included with your product.

Should this product require service in Canada, please

contact a Pioneer Canadian Authorized Dealer to locate the

nearest Pioneer Authorized Service Company in Canada.

Alternatively, please contact the Customer Satisfaction

Department at the following address:

Pioneer Electronics of Canada, Inc.

Customer Satisfaction Department

300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R 0P2

1-877-283-5901

905-479-4411

For warranty information please see the Limited Warranty

sheet included with your product.

Si ce produit doit être réparé au Canada, veuillez vous

adresser à un distributeur autorisé Pioneer du Canada pour

obtenir le nom du Centre de Service Autorisé Pioneer le plus

près de chez-vous. Vous pouvez aussi contacter le Service à

la clientèle de Pioneer:

Pioneer Électroniques du Canada, Inc.

Service Clientèle

300, Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R 0P2

1-877-283-5901

905-479-4411

Pour obtenir des renseignements sur la garantie, veuillez

vous reporter au feuillet sur la garantie restreinte qui

accompagne le produit.

S018_C_EF

SC_09TX.book Page 159 Monday, November 26, 2007 10:32 PM

Operatin

Instructions

-09TX

perating Instruction

O/V

REC

Printed in<ARB7385-A>

ublished by Pioneer Corporation

Copyri

2007 Pioneer Cor

oration

All ri

hts reserved

IONEER

ELITE

SOUND.VISION.SOUL

and the Pioneer

Elite an

sound.vision.soul lo

os are trademarks of Pioneer Corporation

PIONEER CORPORATION

4-1, Meguro 1-Chome, Meguro-ku, Tokyo 153-8654, Japan

PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC.

P.O. BOX 1540, Long Beach, California 90801-1540, U.S.A. TEL: (800) 421-1404

PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC.

300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R 0P2, Canada TEL: 1-877-283-5901, 905-479-4411

PIONEER EUROPE NV

Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium TEL: 03/570.05.11

PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. LTD.

253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936 TEL: 65-6472-7555

PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD.

178-184 Boundary Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia, TEL: (03) 9586-6300

PIONEER ELE

TRONI

S DE MEXI

O S.A. DE

Blv

vila Camacho 138 10 piso Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico,D.

000

TEL: 55-

-42

K002